FURUNO 1724C/1734C Marine Radar, GD-1720C Color Video Plotter OPERATOR'S MANUAL

The paper used in this manual
is elemental chlorine free.
C
MODEL 1724C/1734C
Color Video Plotter
GD-1720C
VX2
Your Local Agent/Dealer
9-52 Ashihara-cho,
Nishinomiya 662-8580, JAPAN
Telephone : +81-(0)798-65-2111
Fax :
+81-(0)798-65-4200
All rights reserved.
Printed in Japan
FIRST EDITION : APR. 2005
Pub. No. OME-35550
(HIMA ) M1704C SER & GD1720C
http://www.furuno.co.jp/
OPERATOR'S MANUAL
MODEL 1724C/1734C, GD-1720C OPERATOR'S MANUAL
(Elemental Chlorine Free)
Marine Radar
SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
WARNING
WARNING
ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD
Do not open the equipment.
Only qualified personnel
should work inside the
equipment.
Do not disassemble or modify the
equipment.
Fire, electrical shock or serious injury can
result.
Immediately turn off the power at the
switchboard if the equipment is emitting
smoke or fire.
Continued use of the equipment can cause
fire or electrical shock. Contact a FURUNO
agent for service.
Keep heater away from equipment.
A heater can melt the equipment's power
cord, which can cause fire or electrical
shock.
Radio Frequency
Radiation Hazard
The radar antenna emits electromagnetic
radio frequency (RF) energy which can be
harmful, particularly to your eyes. Never
look directly into the antenna aperture from
a close distance while the radar is in
operation or expose yourself to the transmitting antenna at a close distance.
Distances at which RF radiation levels of
100 and 10 W/m2 exist are given in the
table below.
Note: If the antenna unit is installed at a
close distance in front of the wheel house,
your administration may require halt of
transmission within a certain sector of
antenna revolution. This is possible - Ask
your FURUNO representative or dealer to
provide this feature.
Distance to
Distance to
MODEL 100 W/m2 point 10 W/m2 point
1724C
Use the proper fuse.
1734C
Fuse rating is shown on the equipment.
Use of a wrong fuse can result in damage
to the equipment.
CAUTION
A warning label is attached to the equipment. Do not remove the label. If the
label is missing or damaged, contact
a FURUNO agent or dealer about
replacement.
WARNING
To avoid electrical shock, do not
remove cover. No user-serviceable
parts inside.
Name: Warning Label (1)
Type: 86-003-1011-0
Code No.: 100-236-230
Nil
0.40 m
Worst case 1.50 m
Worst case 4.00 m
CAUTION
No one navigation device should ever be
solely replied upon for the navigation of
a vessel.
Always confirm position against all available
aids to navigation, for safety of vessel and
crew.
NOTICE
The brilliance of the LCD is adjustable
to match a wide variety of lighting
conditions. However, its maximum
setting may not be sufficiently bright
to permit viewing of the display with
polarized sunglasses.
i
TABLE OF CONTENTS
FOREWORD ...................................vii
SYSTEM CONFIGURATIONS .........ix
1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW .. 1-1
1.1 Operating Controls ..................................1-1
1.1.1 Display unit controls ........................ 1-1
1.1.2 Remote controller............................ 1-3
1.2 Inserting a Chart Card.............................1-4
1.3 Turning the Unit On/Off ...........................1-5
1.4 Display Brilliance, Panel Brilliance, Hue .1-6
1.4.1 Display brilliance, panel brilliance.... 1-6
1.4.2 Hue
..................................... 1-7
1.5 Selecting a Display..................................1-8
1.5.1 Display modes ................................ 1-8
1.5.2 Selecting a display .......................... 1-9
1.5.3 Switching control in combination and
overlay screens ................................... 1-10
1.5.4 Selecting image source ..................1-11
1.6 Cursor pad, Cursor................................1-12
1.7 Entering the MOB Mark, Setting MOB as
Destination...................................................1-13
1.8 Data Boxes ............................................1-14
1.8.1 Showing, hiding data boxes with soft
key
................................... 1-14
1.8.2 Rearranging data boxes ................ 1-14
1.8.3 Temporarily erasing a data box ..... 1-14
1.9 Function Keys........................................1-15
1.10 Simulation Display...............................1-16
2. RADAR OPERATION ............. 2-1
2.1 Radar Display..........................................2-1
2.2 Transmitting, Stand-by ............................2-2
2.3 Tuning......................................................2-2
2.4 Adjusting the Gain ...................................2-2
2.5 Reducing Sea Clutter ..............................2-3
2.5.1 How the A/C SEA works .................. 2-3
2.5.2 Adjusting the A/C SEA..................... 2-4
2.6 Reducing Precipitation Clutter.................2-4
2.7 Range Scale............................................2-5
2.8 Pulselength..............................................2-6
2.9 Presentation Mode ..................................2-7
2.9.1 Selecting a presentation mode ........ 2-7
2.9.2 Description of presentation modes .. 2-8
ii
2.10 Measuring the Range ............................2-9
2.10.1 Measuring range by range rings ....2-9
2.10.2 Measuring range by cursor ............2-9
2.10.3 Measuring range by VRM ............ 2-10
2.10.4 Various VRM operations .............. 2-10
2.11 Measuring the Bearing ........................2-11
2.11.1 Measuring bearing by cursor........ 2-11
2.11.2 Measuring bearing by EBL ........... 2-11
2.11.3 Various EBL operations................ 2-11
2.12 Erasing the Heading Line, North Marker....
.................................................2-12
2.13 Reducing Noise Interference...............2-12
2.14 Rejecting Radar Interference ..............2-13
2.15 Zoom .................................................2-14
2.15.1 Zooming radar targets.................. 2-14
2.15.2 Zooming ARP, TTM targets .......... 2-14
2.16 Shifting the Picture ..............................2-15
2.16.1 Manual shift ................................. 2-15
2.16.2 Automatic shift ............................. 2-15
2.17 Using the Offset EBL...........................2-16
2.17.1 Predicting collision course ........... 2-16
2.17.2 Measuring range & bearing between
two targets
................................. 2-17
2.18 Echo Trails...........................................2-18
2.18.1 Trail time ................................. 2-18
2.18.2 Starting echo trails ....................... 2-19
2.18.3 Trail gradation.............................. 2-20
2.18.4 Trail color ................................. 2-20
2.19 Echo Stretch ........................................2-21
2.20 Echo Averaging ...................................2-22
2.21 Outputting TLL Data ............................2-23
2.22 Guard Alarm ........................................2-24
2.22.1 Setting a guard alarm zone .......... 2-24
2.22.2 When the alarm is violated… ....... 2-25
2.22.3 Cancelling the guard alarm .......... 2-25
2.23 Watchman............................................2-25
2.23.1 How watchman works .................. 2-25
2.23.2 Turning on/off watchman.............. 2-26
2.23.3 Setting watchman stand-by interval ....
................................. 2-26
2.24 Waypoint Marker .................................2-27
2.25 ARP, TTM Operation ...........................2-28
2.25.1 Activating/deactivating ARP, TTM 2-29
2.25.2 Acquiring and tracking targets (ARP) ..
................................. 2-29
2.25.3 Displaying target number (ARP, TTM).
................................. 2-31
2.25.4 Terminating tracking of ARP targets ....
................................. 2-31
2.25.5 Setting vector attributes (ARP) .... 2-32
2.25.6 Displaying past position (ARP) .... 2-33
2.25.7 ARP, TTM target data .................. 2-34
2.25.8 CPA/TCPA alarm (ARP)............... 2-35
2.25.9 Lost target alarm (ARP) ............... 2-36
2.25.10 Showing, hiding ARP target tracks....
.................................... 2-36
2.26 Interpreting the Radar Display ............2-37
2.26.1 False echoes ............................... 2-37
2.26.2 SART (Search and Rescue
Transponder)
................................. 2-38
2.26.3 Racon (Radar Beacon) ................ 2-39
3. PLOTTER OPERATION ......... 3-1
3.1 Plotter Displays .......................................3-1
3.1.1 Full-screen plotter display................ 3-1
3.1.2 Nav graphic display ......................... 3-3
3.1.3 Highway display............................... 3-6
3.1.4 Nav data display .............................. 3-7
3.2 Presentation Mode ..................................3-8
3.3 Shifting the Display..................................3-9
3.4 Chart Scale..............................................3-9
3.5 Chart Cards .............................................3-9
3.5.1 Chart card overview......................... 3-9
3.5.2 Indices and chart enlargement....... 3-10
3.5.3 Navionics charts ............................ 3-11
3.5.4 C-MAP charts ................................ 3-14
3.6 Working with Track ................................3-18
3.6.1 Displaying track ............................. 3-18
3.6.2 Stopping, restarting plotting of own ship
track
.................................... 3-19
3.6.3 Changing track color...................... 3-19
3.6.4 Track plotting method and interval for
own ship track .................................... 3-20
3.6.5 Changing own ship track/mark
distribution setting .................................. 3-21
3.6.6 Erasing track ................................. 3-22
3.7 Marks, Lines ..........................................3-24
3.7.1 Entering a mark, line...................... 3-24
3.7.2 Changing mark attributes............... 3-24
3.7.3 Selecting line type ......................... 3-25
3.7.4 Erasing marks, lines ...................... 3-26
3.8 Waypoints ............................................. 3-27
3.8.1 Entering waypoints ........................ 3-27
3.8.2 Editing waypoint data .................... 3-30
3.8.3 Erasing waypoints ......................... 3-32
3.8.4 Changing waypoint mark size
(Navionics GOLD).................................. 3-33
3.8.5 Searching waypoints ..................... 3-34
3.9 Routes .................................................. 3-35
3.9.1 Creating routes.............................. 3-35
3.9.2 Connecting routes ......................... 3-38
3.9.3 Inserting waypoints........................ 3-39
3.9.4 Removing waypoints from a route . 3-40
3.9.5 Erasing routes ............................... 3-41
3.10 Navigation........................................... 3-41
3.10.1 Navigating to a “quick point” ........ 3-41
3.10.2 Navigating to waypoints............... 3-42
3.10.3 Navigating to ports, port services 3-43
3.10.4 Following a route......................... 3-45
3.10.5 Canceling route navigation .......... 3-48
3.11 Alarms ................................................ 3-49
3.11.1 Audio alarm on/off ....................... 3-49
3.11.2 Arrival alarm ................................ 3-50
3.11.3 Anchor watch alarm..................... 3-51
3.11.4 XTE (Cross-Track Error) alarm .... 3-52
3.11.5 Speed alarm ................................ 3-52
3.11.6 Proximity alarm............................ 3-53
3.11.7 Trip alarm ................................. 3-53
3.11.8 Grounding alarm (C-MAP
specification)
.................................... 3-54
3.11.9 Alarm information ........................ 3-55
3.12 Resetting Trip Distance ...................... 3-57
4. VIDEO SOUNDER OPERATION ..
........................................... 4-1
4.1 Sounder Displays ....................................4-1
4.1.1 Selecting a sounder display............. 4-1
4.1.2 Description of sounder displays....... 4-2
4.1.3 Selecting screen split method in
combination displays................................ 4-6
4.2 Automatic Sounder Operation.................4-6
4.2.1 How the automatic sounder works... 4-6
4.2.2 Types of automatic sounder modes. 4-6
4.2.3 How to enable automatic sounder
operation
...................................... 4-7
4.3 Manual Sounder Operation .....................4-7
4.3.1 Selecting the manual mode ............. 4-7
4.3.2 Selecting display range ................... 4-7
4.3.3 Adjusting the gain............................ 4-8
iii
4.3.4 Shifting the range ............................ 4-8
4.4 Measuring Depth, Time ...........................4-9
4.5 Reducing Interference.............................4-9
4.6 Reducing Low Level Noise....................4-10
4.7 Erasing Weak Echoes ........................... 4-11
4.8 White Marker .........................................4-12
4.9 Picture Advance Speed .........................4-12
4.9.1 Advancement independent of ship’s
speed
................................... 4-12
4.9.2 Advancement synchronized with ship’s
speed
................................... 4-13
4.10 Display Colors .....................................4-14
4.11 Alarms .................................................4-15
4.11.1 Audio alarm on/off ....................... 4-15
4.11.2 Bottom alarm ............................... 4-16
4.11.3 Fish alarm ................................. 4-16
4.11.4 Fish alarm (B/L)........................... 4-17
4.11.5 Water temperature alarm............. 4-17
4.11.6 When an alarm setting is violated... .....
................................... 4-18
4.12 Water Temperature Graph...................4-19
4.13 Changing Pulse Repetition Rate.........4-19
4.14 Saving Sounder Picture to an SD Card .....
.................................................4-20
4.15 Interpreting the Sounder Display ........4-20
4.15.1 Zero line
................................. 4-20
4.15.2 Bottom echo................................ 4-21
4.15.3 Fish school echoes ..................... 4-22
4.15.4 urface noise/Aeration .................. 4-22
5.
................................................ 5-1
6. DATA TRANSFER .................. 6-1
6.1 Memory Card Operations........................6-1
6.1.1 Deleting all data from memory cards
(other than chart data).............................. 6-1
6.1.2 Saving data to a memory card......... 6-2
6.1.3 Playing back data from a memory card
..................................... 6-3
6.2 Uploading, Downloading Data.................6-4
6.2.1 Setting communication software on the
PC
..................................... 6-4
6.2.2 Uploading or downloading data ....... 6-4
6.3 Loading Waypoint Data from Yeoman.....6-7
6.4 Receiving Data Via Network Equipment .6-8
6.5 Outputting Data Through the Network ....6-9
7. CUSTOMIZING YOUR UNIT .. 7-1
7.1
iv
General Setup.................................7-1
7.2 Radar Setup ............................................7-4
7.2.1 Radar display setup .........................7-4
7.2.2 Radar range setup ...........................7-7
7.2.3 Function key setup...........................7-8
7.3 Plotter Setup..........................................7-10
7.3.1 Navigation options ......................... 7-10
7.3.2 Function key setup......................... 7-11
7.4 Chart Setup ...........................................7-14
7.4.1 Chart offset .................................... 7-14
7.4.2 Navionics GOLD chart attributes.... 7-15
7.4.3 C-MAP chart attributes................... 7-16
7.5 Data Boxes Setup..................................7-22
7.6 Hot Page Setup .....................................7-23
7.7 Navigator Setup.....................................7-24
7.7.1 Navigation data source .................. 7-24
7.7.2 GPS receiver setup (Set equipped with
GP-310B/320B) .................................... 7-26
7.7.3 TD display setup ............................ 7-29
7.8 Nav Data Display Setup ........................7-32
7.9 Sounder Setup.......................................7-33
7.9.1 System setup................................. 7-33
7.9.2 Sensor setup ................................. 7-36
7.9.3 Sounding range, zoom range, bottom
lock range
.................................... 7-37
7.9.4 Function key setup......................... 7-38
7.10 Nav Graphic Display Setup .................7-40
8. MAINTENANCE,
TROUBLESHOOTING .................. 8-1
8.1 Preventive Maintenance..........................8-1
8.2 Replacement of Batteries........................8-2
8.3 Replacement of Fuse ..............................8-2
8.4 Replacing the Magnetron ........................8-3
8.5 Simple Troubleshooting...........................8-3
8.5.1 General
......................................8-3
8.5.2 Radar
......................................8-4
8.5.3 Plotter
......................................8-4
8.5.4 Sounder
......................................8-5
8.6 Diagnostics ..............................................8-6
8.6.1 Memory I/O test ...............................8-6
8.6.2 Test pattern......................................8-8
8.6.3 Keyboard, remote controller test .... 8-10
8.7 GPS Status Display ...............................8-11
8.8 Clearing Memories ................................8-12
8.9 Error Messages .....................................8-13
APPENDIX ................................. AP-1
Menu Overview ................................... AP-1
ALARM key ........................................... AP-9
Geodetic Chart List...................................AP-10
Icons ......................................................... AP-11
SPECIFICATIONS........................SP1
INDEX...........................................IN-1
v
COMPLIANCE WITH R&TTE DIRECTIVE 1999/5/EC
This radar complies with the R&TTE Directive 1999/5/EC. In accordance with Article 6-3 of this
directive, FURUNO intends to put this radar on the market of the following countries in EU as
well other markets.
Austria, Belgium, Cyprus, Denmark, Estonia, Finland, France, Germany, Greece, Hungary,
Ireland, Italy, Latvia, Lithuania, Malta, Poland, Portugal, Slovenia, Spain, Sweden, The
Netherlands, United Kingdom, Iceland, Norway
vi
FOREWORD
A Word to the Owner of the Model 1724C/1734C Series
Marine Radar, GD-1720C Color Video Plotter
FURUNO Electric Company thanks you for purchasing the Model 1724C/1734C Series
Marine Radar, GD-1720C Color Video Plotter. We are confident you will discover why the
FURUNO name has become synonymous with quality and reliability.
For over 50 years FURUNO Electric Company has enjoyed an enviable reputation for
quality and reliability throughout the world. This dedication to excellence is furthered by our
extensive global network of agents and dealers.
Your equipment is designed and constructed to meet the rigorous demands of the marine
environment. However, no machine can perform its intended function unless properly
installed and maintained. Please carefully read and follow the operation and maintenance
procedures set forth in this manual.
We would appreciate feedback from you, the end-user, about whether we are achieving our
purposes.
Thank you for considering and purchasing FURUNO.
Features
The 1724C/1734C Radar Series and the GD-1720C Video Plotter work within our network
system called the “NavNet.” Each product has an IP address to communicate with NavNet
compatible products within the network, using TCP/IP protocol through an Ethernet
10BASE-T network.
The main features are as follows:
• Bright 7” screen visible even under direct sunlight.
• User friendly operation with combination of discrete keys, soft keys, and cursor pad.
• Accepts the following SD chart cards: NAVIONICS GOLD or C-MAP NT MAX charts,
depending on specification. All names mentioned above are registered trademarks of
their respective companies.
• Fast chart redraw.
• Built-in NavNet interface circuit board.
• 12-channel GPS Receiver GP-310B with highly accurate position fixing optionally
available, GP-310B and 320B (WAAS capability).
• User programmable function keys.
• Video sounder picture available with connection of the optional Network Sounder.
• ARP function (when connecting with MODEL 1824C series)
vii
Notice
• No part of this manual may be copied or reproduced without written permission.
• If this manual is lost or worn, contact your dealer about replacement.
• The contents of this manual and equipment specifications are subject to change without
notice.
• The example screens (or illustrations) shown in this manual may not match the screens
you see on your display. The screen you see depends on your system configuration and
equipment settings.
• This manual is intended for use by native speakers of English.
• FURUNO will assume no responsibility for the damage caused by improper use or
modification of the equipment or claims of loss of profit by a third party.
viii
SYSTEM CONFIGURATIONS
All NavNet products incorporate a “network circuit board” to integrate each NavNet product
on board through an optional LAN cable (Ethernet 10BASE-T). Each NavNet product is
assigned an IP address to enable transfer of images between other NavNet products. For
example, video plotter pictures can be transferred to a radar and vice versa. Pictures
received via the NavNet may be adjusted at the receiving end.
The number of display units which may be installed depends on the number of network
sounder connected. For a system incorporating three or more products, a “hub” is required
to process data.
For one network sounder: one radar and three plotters, or four plotters
For two network sounder: one radar and two plotters, or four plotters
NavNet system (Model 1724C/1734C)
Antenna Unit
(ex. MODEL 1724C)
GPS receiver
GP-310B/320B
E/S
Navigator
Display Unit
RDP-148
Remote
Controller
RMC-100
External buzzer
PC
Echo sounder
Heading
sensor
Other NavNet unit
(GD-1720 etc.)
Rectifier
PR-62
Network sounder
ETR-6/10N
12-24 VDC
100/110/115/220/230 VAC
1φ, 50/60 Hz
NavNet system (Model 1724C/1734C)
ix
Single-unit NavNet system (GD-1720C)
GPS receiver
GP-310B/320B
External buzzer
Display Unit
RDP-148
Remote
Controller
RMC-100
Echo sounder
Heading sensor
Other NavNet unit
(MODEL 1724C etc.)
Rectifier
PR-62
Network sounder
ETR-6/10N
12-24 VDC
100/110/115/220/230 VAC
1φ, 50/60 Hz
Single-unit NavNet system (GD-1720C)
x
Two-unit NavNet system
GP-310B/320B
Antenna Unit
Radar data
Plotter data
Two-unit NavNet system
xi
Three-or-more-unit NavNet system (Max. 4 display units)
GP-310B/320B
Antenna Unit
Radar data
Plotter data
HUB
Sounder data
Network sounder
ETR-6/10N
Note: The picture disappears
10 seconds after the NavNet
cable is disconnected from a
"sub" NavNet display unit.
Three-or-more-unit NavNet system
xii
1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW
This chapter provides the basic information needed to get you started using your radar,
video plotter.
1.1
Operating Controls
1.1.1
Display unit controls
Display unit controls
The radar, video plotter, sounder and chart systems are operated with the controls of the
display unit (and the remote controller). Ten keys are labeled and they provide the function
shown on their labels. The five soft keys provide various functions according to current
operating mode. The ENTER knob mainly functions to register selections on the menu and
adjust the EBL, VRM and gain. The Cursor pad’s main function is to move the cursor
across the screen. When you correctly execute an operation, the unit generates a beep.
Invalid operation causes the unit to emit three beeps.
Selects display mode.
Momentary press:
Registers own ship’s
position as a waypoint.
Press three seconds:
Marks man overboard
position.
Soft keys
Shows or hides the soft
keys, function keys,
nav data alternately.
Cursor pad
Selects menu items and options;
shifts cursor. Press, release and
press again to change setting
consecutively.
Opens/closes the alarm menu.
Clears data; erases selected mark.
Opens/closes the main menu.
Selects a range.
ENTER knob
Push: Registers options on menus.
Rotate: Selects character; adjusts sensitivity
(sounder, radar); chooses menu items and options.
Displays the soft keys for EBL/VRM.
Radar: Displays the soft keys for adjustment of
gain, A/C SEA, A/C RAIN and FTC.
Sounder: Adjusts gain.
Long press: Turns power on/off.
Momentary press: Opens the
display for adjustment of brilliance,
etc. For radar, switches STBY and TX.
Chart slot
1-1
1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW
Soft keys
The function of the five soft keys changes according to the operation. Their labels for their
current functions are shown on the screen to the left of the keys. To hide or show the soft
keys, press the HIDE/SHOW key. Each press of the key shows preset soft keys, user
function keys or turns off navigation information (at the top of the screen).
SOFT
KEYS
Display unit
Some soft keys show the current setting of a soft key in reverse video as shown below.
34° 22. 3456'N
080° 22. 3456'E
359.9°M TRIP NU
19.9 kt
99.9 nm
16.0nm
MARK
ENTRY
MODE
NTH UP
NAV
POS
D.BOX
ON/OFF
WPT 002 FISH
BRIDGE
Plotter displays
1-2
Current option
shown in reverse video
1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW
1.1.2
Remote controller
SAVE
RANGE
MOB
DISP
ABC
1
DEF
2
GHI
3
JKL
4
MNO
5
PQR
6
STU
7
VWX
8
YZ&
9
’# 0
EBL/VRM
WPT
Operating distance
90°: Up to 5 m
±45°: Up to 3 m
Replace the batteries (AA) when the
distance from which the display
unit can be operated shortens.
Note: The remote controller may
become damaged if dropped.
Mishandling of the remote
controller is not covered by
the warranty.
GAIN
CENTER
MARK
ENT
CNTL
ENT
CLEAR
BRILL
SK1
TONE
SK2
MENU
TX/STBY
ACQ
ALARM
HIDE/SHOW
SK3
SK4
SK5
Remote controller
Key
RANGE
DISP
SAVE MOB
Ten keys
EBL/VRM
GAIN
WPT
MARK ENT
CENTER
CNTL
Function
Same as RANGE key on
display unit.
Same as DISP key on
display unit.
Same as SAVE/MOB key on
display unit.
Enter alphanumerics.
Same as EBL/VRM key on
display unit.
Same as GAIN key on
display unit.
Displays “alphabet” WPT list
on plotter display.
Same as MARK ENTRY soft
key.
Returns own ship to screen
center on plotter display.
Switches control between
displays on combination
displays.
Key
ENT
CLEAR
MENU
BRILL
TONE
TX/STBY
ACQ
ALARM
HIDE/SHOW
SK1 – SK5
(soft keys)
.
Function
Same as ENTER knob on
display unit.
Same as CLEAR key on
display unit.
Same as MENU key on
display unit.
Adjusts display brilliance.
Not used.
Toggles radar between
standby and transmit.
Acquires radar target.
(Requires radar source
equipped with ARP.)
Same as ALARM key on the
display unit.
Same as HIDE/SHOW key
on display unit.
Same as soft keys on display
unit.
1-3
1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW
1.2
Inserting a Chart Card
Your unit reads SD cards, in the following formats: Navionics GOLD Chart cards or C-MAP
NT MAX chart cards, depending on the type of display unit you have. Insert the appropriate
chart card for your area as follows:
1. Open the chart drive.
Chart slot
Display unit
2. Insert chart card label side up.
3. Close the lid.
To remove chart card, push the card once and then pull it out.
Note 1: Do not remove a card while the chart is being drawn. This may cause the
equipment to freeze.
Note 2: Do not insert or remove a card while the power is on. This may cause the
equipment to freeze.
Note 3: For multiple display units, do not use the same chart card type in more than one
display unit.
Note 4: Remove the card with care; rough handling can damage the card and destroy its
contents.
1-4
1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW
1.3
Turning the Unit On/Off
Press the POWER/BRILL key to turn the unit on. A beep sounds and then the equipment
shows the startup NavNet screen (about 20 seconds), the product information screen,
startup test results and chart usage disclaimer. During this period the equipment is
inoperative. The startup test checks the ROM, RAM, internal battery and backup data for
proper operation, displaying the results for each as OK or NG (No Good). If NG appears an
appropriate message appears on the screen. For any NG, try to press any key to go to the
chart disclaimer screen, then perform the diagnostic test as shown in the paragraph “8.6
Diagnostics.”
For start up with the radar display, the magnetron takes from 60 seconds to 90seconds
(depending on radar model) to warm up before the radar can be operated. The time
remaining for warming up of the magnetron is counted down at the center of the display.
You may press any key at the chart disclaimer screen to show the last-used display, or wait
several seconds to let the equipment do it for you.
To turn the unit off, press and hold down the POWER/BRILL key until the screen goes dark
(approx. 3 sec.). To protect the LCD attach the hard cover. Note that the network sounder
will be turned off approx. three minutes after turning off the power. This is due to the
system’s electrical characteristics.
Note: The first time you turn on the power (or any time the power is applied after a memory
reset), you are asked if you want to start the simulation mode, which provides simulated
operation of the equipment after the installation mode selection. Push the ENTER knob to
start the simulation mode, or press the CLEAR key to start normal operation. For further
details about the simulation mode, see the paragraph “1.10 Simulation Display.”
1-5
1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW
1.4
Display Brilliance, Panel Brilliance, Hue
You can adjust display brilliance, panel brilliance and hue as shown below.
1.4.1
Display brilliance, panel brilliance
1. Press the POWER/BRILL key momentarily. A set of soft keys for adjustment of
brilliance and hue appear.
Current selection is higtlighted.
.250/SP.125nm
H-UP
319.9°M
BRILL
CONTST
DISPLY
BRILL
PANEL
BRILL
HUE
RADAR
STBY
RETURN
DISPLAY BRILLIANCE
8
Brilliance adjustment soft keys
2. Press the DISPLY BRILL or PANEL BRILL soft key as appropriate. An adjustment
window appears at the bottom of the screen. This window shows the name of the item
selected for adjustment plus current brilliance level, by bar graph.
DISPLAY BRILLIANCE
8
Display brilliance
PANEL BRILLIANCE
8
Panel brilliance
Display brilliance and panel brilliance windows
3. Adjust the ENTER knob, clockwise to raise the setting or counterclockwise to decrease
it. You may also use the soft key pressed at step 2. Eight levels of display brilliance and
panel brilliance are available.
4. Hit the RETURN soft key to finish.
Note 1: If the unit is turned off with minimum brilliance, the screen will be dark at the next
power-up. Press the POWER/BRILL key consecutively to adjust the brilliance.
Note 2: This equipment does not have a contrast control.
1-6
1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW
1.4.2
Hue
You may select the colors for the radar, plotter and overlay displays as below.
1. Press the POWER/BRILL key momentarily.
2. Press the HUE soft key to show the hue setting window.
HUE
▲
¡ DAY
¡ NIGHT
¡ TWILIGHT
¤ MANUAL SET
▼
Hue window
3. Operate the Cursor pad to select hue desired, referring to the table below. MANUAL
SET follows the color settings on the CHART DETAILS menu for the plotter and the
RADAR DISPLAY SETUP menu for the radar.
Night
Characters
Red
Radar ring
Red
Radar echo
Orange
Background
Black
Landmass (plotter) Orange*
Day
Black
Green
Multi
White
Light-orange
Twilight
Green
Green
Orange
Blue**
Orange
* = Beige and light-beige on C-MAP display unit.
**= Black for Overlay screen
4. Hit the RETURN soft key to finish.
Note: When using the overlay screen, the own ship track will be hidden if the radar
background and own ship track are blue and the “MANUAL SET” hue setting is used. In this
case, set HUE to other position and then return to “MANUAL” to show the own ship track in
black.
1-7
1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW
1.5
Selecting a Display
1.5.1
Display modes
If you have a radar, navigator and network sounder five full-screen displays are available:
radar, plotter, echo sounder, nav data and overlay. In addition to the full-screen display, you
can divide the screen into halves and thirds to show two and three sets of images on a
combination display.
Full screen
(Ex. radar)
Combination screen
(Ex. radar + sounder)
Overlay screen
(Radar and plotter,
color model only.
Requires L/L data)
Display screens
The table below shows the displays available with each screen type.
Screen type and available display screen
1-8
Full screen
Combination screen options Overlay screen
options
(half- or thirds-screen)
Plotter, radar, sounder,
nav data, overlay
Plotter, radar, sounder,
compass (or wind), highway,
compass (or wind)/highway,
nav data, overlay
Radar + plotter
1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW
1.5.2
Selecting a display
1. Press the DISP key to show the display screen selection window. The icons of modes
not available are shaded. HOTPAGE 1-HOTPAGE 5 are user-arrangeable displays
called “hot pages,” which you can configure as you like. For further details, see the
paragraph “7.6 Hot Page Setup.”
RADAR PLOTTER SOUNDER NAV DATA OVRLAY
Basic display
screens
Hot pages
HOTPAGE1 HOTPAGE2 HOTPAGE3HOTPAGE4 HOTPAGE5
· TURN KNOB TO SELECT MODE
AND PUSH KNOB TO ENTER.
· PUSH ANY SOFT KEY TO
SELECT IMAGE SOURCE.
Display screen selection window
2. Rotate the ENTER knob to select a basic display screen or a hot page screen.
3. Push the ENTER knob.
4. If you select a basic display screen, a group of appropriate combination displays appear.
In the example below, the radar combination screens are shown.
PUSH ENTER KNOB.
Radar combination screen selection window
5. Rotate the ENTER knob to select display desired.
6. Push the ENTER knob to finish.
1-9
1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW
1.5.3
Switching control in combination and overlay screens
A soft key is provided in relevant combination and overlay screens to switch control
between displays. In the example below, the CNTRL PLOTTR and CNTRL RADAR soft
keys enable switching control between the plotter and sounder screens in the
plotter/sounder combination display.
12 LP3nm
12 LP3nm
H-UP
H-UP
SIGNAL
PROC.
ST-BY
RADAR
DISPLY
CNTL
CNTRL
RADAR
RADAR
MARK
ENTRY
ST-BY
To adjust
plotter
NAV ° R
359.9
FUNC
11.7nm
NAV ° R
359.9
POS
11.7nm
+
34° 22. 3456'N
080° 22. 3456'E
CNTRL
RADAR
WP-002
+
359.9°M
TRIP NU
19.9 kt
99.9 nm
TARGET
16.0nm
FISH
Radar display selected
MODE
NTH UP
34° 22. 3456'N
080° 22. 3456'E
CNTRL
PLOTTR
359.9°M
TRIP NU
19.9 kt
99.9 nm
16.0nm
CNTRL
PLOTTR
To adjust
radar
WP-002
FISH
Plotter display selected
How to switch control between modes in the plotter/sounder combination display
1-10
1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW
1.5.4
Selecting image source
When more than one network radar or network sounder is connected to the equipment, you
may select an image source for each as shown below. This is not necessary when only one
network radar or network sounder is connected.
1. Press the DISP key.
2. Press any soft key to show the following display.
▲
RADAR SOURCE
1 (HOST NAME: NAVNET1)
SOUNDER SOURCE*
SOUNDER _
SELECT
SOURCE
EDIT
IP ADDRESS
172.031.003.003
DEVICE NUMBER
2 (HOST NAME: NAVNET2)
IF THERE IS MORE THAN
ONE NETWORK RADAR OR
ECHO SOUNDER, YOU MAY
SELECT THE IMAGE
SOURCES FOR DISPLAY.
RETURN
*: Do not change this setting.
Select source menu
3. Use the Cursor pad to select RADAR SOURCE, SOUNDER SOURCE or AUX
SOURCE as appropriate, then press the EDIT key.
RADAR SOURCE
SOUNDER SOURCE
▲
▲
¤
¡
¡
¡
▼
1 (NAVNET1)
2 (NAVNET2)
3 (NAVNET3)
4 (NAVNET4)
Radar source
¤
¡
¡
¡
¡
¡
¡
¡
¡
¡
▼
ETR0 (SOUNDER)
ETR1 (SOUNDER1)
ETR2 (SOUNDER2)
ETR3 (SOUNDER3)
ETR4 (SOUNDER4)
ETR5 (SOUNDER5)
ETR6 (SOUNDER6)
ETR7 (SOUNDER7)
ETR8 (SOUNDER8)
ETR9 (SOUNDER9)
Sounder source
Radar source and sounder source windows
4.
5.
6.
7.
Use the Cursor pad to choose source.
Push the ENTER knob to set.
Press the DISP key to finish.
Turn the power off and on again.
1-11
1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW
1.6
Cursor pad, Cursor
The Cursor pad functions to shift the cursor, for measurement of range and bearing to a
location (radar) and latitude and longitude position (plotter). Roll the Cursor pad to shift the
cursor. The cursor moves in the direction of Cursor pad rotation.
.250/SP.125nm
H-UP
319.9°M
SIGNAL
PROC
Cursor
RADAR
DISPLY
Cursor data
L/L position,
Range and
bearing from
own ship to
cursor
+
34° 22. 3456'N
080° 22. 3456'E
272.4°M
15.9 nm
16.0nm
TRIP NU
99.9 nm
MARK
ENTRY
MODE
NTH UP
NAV
FUNC
CENTER
Cursor
TARGET
GOTO
CURSOR
ZOOM &
D. BOX
D. BOX
ON/ OFF
359.9°R
0.24nm
+
Radar display
Plotter display
Cursor, cursor data
1-12
1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW
1.7
Entering the MOB Mark, Setting MOB as
Destination
The MOB mark functions to mark man
overboard position. You can inscribe the
mark from any mode except nav data,
when playing back data or conducting
any test. Note that this function requires
position data.
Note: The function of the SAVE/MOB
key depends on the setting of SAVE
MOB KEY FUNCTION in the GENERAL
SETUP menu. The description below
shows the procedure using the default
setting. For further details, see Save
MOB Key Function on page 7-2.
MOB
mark
M
(MOB)
Range, bearing
Current
Man
overboard position
M 162.5°M
O
B 0.49 nm
MOB Data Box
Bearing and range
to MOB position
MOB concept
1. Press and hold down the SAVE/MOB key for about three seconds when someone falls
overboard. The display shows the waypoint number being saved (youngest empty
waypoint number, 001-999) followed by the MOB confirmation window.
Time remaining is counted down while pressing the SAVE/MOB key.
WAYPOINT SAVED!
XXXWPT
CONTINUE PUSHING
FOR MOB!
XXX = Waypoint number
CONTINUE PUSHING
FOR MOB!
XX SEC
MAN OVER BOARD!
GO TO MOB?
YES ... PUSH ENTER KNOB
NO ... PUSH CLEAR KEY
XX = Time remaining is counted down.
MOB mark messages
2. Push the ENTER knob to select the MOB position as the destination, or press the
CLEAR key to only mark current ship’s position as a waypoint. If you select the MOB
position as destination;
• A full-screen radar, plotter or overlay appears depending on the display in use, with
the range set to 0.5 nm. Further, the waypoint marker appears on the radar display.
• The MOB mark “MOB” appears at the MOB position and a light-blue line runs
between it and current position. This line shows the shortest course to the MOB
position.
• Range and bearing to the MOB position are shown in the MOB data box.
To erase an MOB mark from the plotter display, you must first erase its corresponding
waypoint. Place the cursor on the MOB mark, then press the CLEAR key followed by
pushing the ENTER knob to erase the waypoint. Then, repeat to erase the MOB mark.
1-13
1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW
1.8
Data Boxes
Data boxes, providing navigation data, may be shown on any full-screen display. Up to six
data boxes (two in case of large characters) may be shown, and the default data boxes are
position (in latitude and longitude), course over ground, speed over ground and trip log. The
user may choose which data to display, where to locate it, and show or hide it as desired. In
addition, data boxes may be set independently for each display mode (plotter, radar,
sounder). For how to select data for the data boxes, see the paragraph “7.5 Data Boxes
Setup.”
319.9°M
.250/SP.125nm
H-UP
MARK
ENTRY
MODE
NTH UP
NAV
POS
D.BOX
ON /OFF
TRIP LOG
177nm
POSITION
47°
58.535'N
122°
36.496'W
COG
SOG
323.6°M
20.0
kt
350.4°M
0.000 nm
Data boxes
Data boxes
1.8.1
Showing, hiding data boxes with soft key
D. BOX ON/OFF
ZOOM & D. BOX → D. BOX ON/OFF (EBL/VRM data box, cursor data
box also shown/hidden)
Sounder: AUTO/D. BOX→D. BOX ON/OFF
Plotter:
Radar:
1.8.2
Rearranging data boxes
You may select the location for data boxes as follows:
1. Using the Cursor pad, place the cursor inside the data box you wish to move. As the
cursor enters the box it changes to a “hand”. Push the ENTER knob, and the hand
changes to a fist, meaning the box is correctly selected.
2. Use the Cursor pad to move the data box to the location desired, then push the ENTER
knob.
1.8.3
Temporarily erasing a data box
If a data box is obscuring a desired object, you may temporarily erase the box. Use the
Cursor pad to place the cursor inside the data box you wish to erase, then press the
CLEAR key. To redisplay the box, press the D. BOX soft key twice to display it.
1-14
1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW
1.9
Function Keys
The function keys provide for one-touch execution of a desired function. The default
function key settings are as shown in the table below.
Function
Key
Default Setting, Key Label
Radar
Plotter
Sounder
#1
Heading line on/off, HL
Track on/off, TRK
TLL output, TLL
#2
Rings on/off, RNG
Edit mark/line, EML
Clutter, CLT
#3
Echo trail, TRL
Ruler, RUL
Signal level, SLV
#4
Offcenter, OFC
Add new waypoint,
ADD
Noise limiter, NL
#5
STBY/TX, TX
Waypoint
Picture advance, PA
alphanumeric list, ALP
1. Press the HIDE/SHOW key to replace the preset soft key labels with the function key
labels.
.250/SP.125nm
H-UP
319.9°M
34° 22. 3456'N
080° 22. 3456'E
TARGET
359.9°M
TRIP NU
19.9 kt
99.9 nm
16.0nm
H
L
T
R
K
R
N
G
E
M
L
T
R
L
S
F
T
R
U
L
Function
keys
002WP
A
D
D
FISH
BRIDGE
D
B
X
Function
keys
A
L
p
359.9°R
0.24nm
+
Radar
Plotter
Function keys
2. Press function key desired.
Note: Function keys can be individually programmed for the plotter, radar and sounder
displays. For further details see the following:
Radar: paragraph 7.2.3
Plotter: paragraph 7.3.2
Sounder: paragraph 7.9.4
1-15
1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW
1.10 Simulation Display
The simulation display, for use by service technicians for demonstration purposes, provides
simulated operation to help acquaint you with the many features your unit has to offer. It
allows you to view and control a simulated plotter, radar and sounder picture, without
position-fixing equipment, network radar or a network sounder. Most controls are operative,
thus you may practice setting destination, enter waypoints, measure range and bearing to a
target, etc. Three simulation displays are provided for both the radar and echo sounder.
The simulation icon (SIM) appears when any simulation mode is active.
To start the simulation display;
1. Press the MENU key.
2. Press the SYSTEM CONFIGURATION, SYSTEM SETUP and SIMULATION SETUP
soft keys in that order.
RADAR
LIVE
PLOTTER
LIVE
SOUNDER
LIVE
SPEED
00.0kt
COURSE
000.0°
LATITUDE
45°35.000’N
LONGITUDE
123°00.000’W
START DATE & TIME
00:00 01.APR.01
SIM
SETUP
EDIT
RETURN
GET RADAR SIMULATION DATA
NO
Simulation setup menu
3. Follow appropriate procedure on the next several pages. To stop the simulation mode
and return to normal operation, choose LIVE for radar, sounder or plotter.
Radar
NavNet display unit-generated echoes or user data
1. Select RADAR, then press the EDIT soft key.
RADAR
▲
¡ BUILT IN DATA 1
¡ BUILT IN DATA 2
¡ USER DATA
¤ LIVE
▼
2. Select BUILT IN DATA 1 or 2 for internally generated echoes or USER DATA for
user-saved radar data. Push the ENTER knob.
3. Press the MENU key to close the menu.
1-16
1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW
NavNet radar antenna-generated echoes (not available with the GD-1720C)
1. Select GET RADAR SIMULATION DATA, then press the EDIT soft key.
2. Select YES, then push the ENTER knob to erase simulation data and get new data. The
message “NOW GETTING SIMULATION DATA. Do not turn off display unit.” appears
while the unit is receiving radar data.
Note: If the network radar could not be found “Radar source is not found. Cannot get
demo data.” appears. And if the radar is not active, the message “Radar is not active.
Cannot get demo data.” is displayed. Check that the radar is plugged in and its signal
cable is firmly fastened.
3. Select RADAR, then press the EDIT soft key.
4. Select BUILT IN DATA 2, then push the ENTER knob.
5. Press the MENU key to close the menu.
Plotter
1.
2.
3.
4.
Select PLOTTER, then press the EDIT soft key.
PLOTTER
Select SIMULATION, then push the ENTER knob.
Select SPEED, then press the EDIT soft key.
▲
¡ SIMULATION
Enter speed (setting range, 0-99 kt, default speed, 0 kt) with
¤ LIVE
the alphanumeric keys, then push the ENTER knob.
▼
5. Select COURSE, then press the EDIT soft key.
6. Select “8 FIGURE” to trace the simulated ship’s track in a
figure-eight course, or enter your own course at DIRECTION. To enter course, use the
Cursor pad to select digit, and enter value with the alphanumeric keys.
7. Press the ENTER soft key.
8. Select LATITUDE, then press the EDIT soft key.
9. Enter latitude (setting range, 85°N-85°S, default setting, 45°35.000’N), then push the
ENTER knob.
10. Select LONGITUDE, then press the EDIT soft key.
11. Enter longitude (setting range, 180°E-180°W, default setting, 125°00.000’W), then push
the ENTER knob.
12. Select START DATE & TIME, then press the EDIT soft key.
13. Enter start date and time, then push the ENTER knob.
14. Press the MENU key to close the menu.
Sounder
1. Select SOUNDER, then press the EDIT soft key.
2. Select BUILT IN DATA (internally generated echoes) or
ETR (network sounder-generated echoes), then push the
ENTER knob.
Note: The depth, shift, bottom-zoom, bottom-lock and
bottom discrimination cannot be shown in the BUILT IN
DATA mode.
3. Press the MENU key to close the menu.
SOUNDER
▲
¡ BUILT IN DATA
¡ ETR
¤ LIVE
▼
1-17
1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW
This page intentionally left blank.
1-18
2. RADAR OPERATION
This chapter covers radar operation, including the ARP (Auto Plotter) function. ARP
requires a Model 18x4C/19x4C series network radar equipped with the ARP circuit board as
radar source.
2.1
Radar Display
Cursor
Pulselength
Range/
range ring
interval
Presentation
mode
..250 /SP.125nm
Heading
M: Magnetic
T: True
Heading line
North marker
319.9°M
TRAIL 30m
02m30s
G1 IN
G2 OUT
ES L
H-UP
Alarm icon
IR L
Battery icon
Trail time
Trail elapsed time
Guard zone 1
Guard zone 2
Echo stretch
Interference rejector
Guard zone 2
Zoom area
VRM2
EBL1
VRM1
Guard zone 1
EBL2
Range ring
Own ship vector*
(ARP-equipped model,
true vector mode)
Zoom
window
* = Radar source
Model 1834/1834C
series radar
EBL2
EBL1 range
EBL1
VRM1 range
VRM2
VRM1
0 .225nm
0 .158nm
27.0°R
327.1°R
359.9°R
0.18nm
EBL2 bearing, VRM2 range
Cursor range
and bearing
(Cursor position may
also be shown, in
L/L or Loran C TD.)
Radar display
2-1
2. RADAR OPERATION
2.2
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Transmitting, Stand-by
Confirm that the network radar is plugged in.
Press the DISP key to select a radar display.
Press the POWER/BRILL key momentarily.
Press the RADAR STBY soft key to highlight TX on its label.
Press the RETURN soft key.
When the radar picture is not required, but you want keep it in a state of readiness, press
the RADAR TX soft key to highlight STBY on its label.
2.3
Tuning
The radar receiver can be tuned automatically or manually, and the default tuning method is
automatic. If you require manual tuning, do the following:
1. Press the MENU key to display the main menu.
2. Press the RADAR DISPLAY SETUP soft key.
3. Select TUNING, then press the EDIT soft key.
TUNING
¤ AUTO
¡ MAN
Tuning bar
Tuning window
4. Choose MAN.
5. Adjust the ENTER knob until the tuning bar is at its longest position.
6. Press the MENU key to close the menu.
Note: If the auto setting does not provide satisfactory tuning, ask your dealer how to
re-adjust tuning.
2.4
Adjusting the Gain
The GAIN key adjusts the gain sensitivity of the radar receiver. It works in a manner similar
to that of volume control of a broadcast receiver, which amplifies received signals.
The proper setting is such that the background noise is just visible on the screen. If your
gain setting is too low, weak echoes may be missed. On the other hand, excessive gain
yields too much background noise; strong targets may be missed because of the poor
contrast between desired echoes and the background noise on the display.
To adjust the receiver sensitivity, transmit on long range, and then do the following:
2-2
1. Press the GAIN key to show the “gain adjustment”
GAIN SENSITIVITY
soft keys, and the last-used adjustment window
appears. The example below shows the gain
¤ AUTO ROUGH
sensitivity adjustment window. The gain soft keys
¡ AUTO MODERATE
¡ AUTO CALM
shown depend on radar source as shown below.
¡ MAN
0
2. If the gain sensitivity window is not displayed, press
the GAIN soft key to show the gain sensitivity setting
window.
Gain sensitivity window
3. Use the Cursor pad to select AUTO ROUGH, AUTO
MODERATE, AUTO CALM, or MAN (manual) as
appropriate. Select an AUTO option according to the sea state.
4. For manual adjustment, rotate the ENTER knob to adjust, while observing the radar
echo. The range of adjustment is 0-100.
5. Press the GAIN key on the front panel or the RETURN soft key to finish.
Adjusting the FTC
To suppress rain clutter from heavy storms or scattered rain clutter, adjust the FTC.
In addition to reducing clutter, the FTC can be used in fine weather to clarify the picture
when navigating in confined waters. However, with the circuit active the receiver is less
sensitive.
1. Press the GAIN key.
2. Press the FTC soft key, and then rotate the ENTER knob toadjust.
3. Press the GAIN key on the front panel or RETURN soft key to finish.
2.5
Reducing Sea Clutter
2.5.1
How the A/C SEA works
Echoes from waves can be troublesome, covering the central part of the display with
random signals known as “sea clutter”. The higher the waves and the higher the antenna
above the water, the further the clutter will extend. Sea clutter may affect radar performance
because real targets are sometimes hidden by the echoes of small waves. (See the
left-hand figure in the figure below.) When sea clutter masks the picture, adjust the A/C
SEA to reduce the clutter.
The A/C SEA reduces the amplification of echoes at short ranges (where clutter is the
greatest) and progressively increases amplification as the range increases, so amplification
will be normal at those ranges where there is no sea clutter.
Sea clutter at
screen center
A/C SEA adjusted;
sea clutter suppressed
Effect of A/C SEA
2-3
2. RADAR OPERATION
2.5.2
Adjusting the A/C SEA
A/C SEA should be adjusted so that the clutter is broken up into small dots, and small
targets become distinguishable.
1. Press the GAIN key.
2. Press the A/C SEA soft key to show the A/C SEA setting window.
A/C SEA
¡ AUTO ROUGH
¡ AUTO MODERATE
¡ AUTO CALM
¤ MAN
0
A/C SEA setting window
3. Use the Cursor pad to select AUTO ROUGH, AUTO MODERATE, AUTO CALM, or
MAN (manual) as appropriate. Select an AUTO option according to the sea state.
4. For manual adjustment, rotate the ENTER knob to adjust. The range of adjustment is
0-100. Do not overadjust – weak echoes may be missed.
5. Press the GAIN key on the front panel or RETURN soft key to finish.
2.6
Reducing Precipitation Clutter
The vertical beamwidth of the antenna is designed to see surface targets even when the
ship is rolling. However, by this design the unit will also detect precipitation clutter (rain,
snow, hail, etc.) in the same manner as normal targets. Precipitation clutter shows as
random dots on the screen.
When echoes from precipitation mask solid targets, adjust the A/C RAIN to split up these
unwanted echoes into a speckled pattern, making recognition of solid targets easier.
1. Press the GAIN key.
2. Press the A/C RAIN soft key to show the A/C RAIN window.
A/C RAIN
0
A/C RAIN setting window
3. Rotate the ENTER knob to adjust the A/C RAIN. The current level is shown on the A/C
RAIN level bar in the A/C RAIN window, and the range of adjustment is 0 to 100(%). Do
not overadjust – weak echoes may be missed.
4. Press the GAIN key on the front panel or RETURN soft key to finish.
2-4
2. RADAR OPERATION
2.7
Range Scale
The range setting determines the size of the area (in nautical miles) that will appear on your
display. In addition, the range setting will also automatically adjust the range ring interval so
that accurate range measurements may be made while operating on any range setting.
The range, range ring interval and pulselength appear at the top left-hand corner of the
display.
Press the [RANGE (+ or -)] key to change the range scale.
Range scales (nm, sm)
Range
0.125
0.25
0.5
0.75
1
1.5
2
3
4
6
8
12
16
24
36
48
64
72
Ring
Interval
0.0625
0.125
0.125
0.25
0.25
0.5
0.5
1
1
2
2
3
4
6
12
12
16
18
No. of
Rings
2
2
5
4
5
4
5
4
5
4
5
5
5
5
4
5
5
5
Range scales (km)
Range
0.25
0.5
0.75
1
1.5
2
3
4
6
8
12
16
24
36
48
64
72
Ring Interval
0.125
0.25
0.25
0.25
0.5
0.5
1
1
2
2
3
4
6
12
12
16
18
No. of Rings
2
2
4
5
4
5
4
5
4
5
5
5
5
4
5
5
5
Note 1: Maximum range depends on the network radar as shown below.
Model 1724C, 1734C, 1824C: 24 nm
Model 1834C: 36 nm
Model 1934C: 48 nm
Model 1944C: 64 nm
Model 1954C: 72 nm
Note 2: You may choose which ranges to use from the RADAR RANGE SETUP menu. For
details see paragraph 7.2.2. This function is not available with the GD-1720C.
2-5
2. RADAR OPERATION
2.8
Pulselength
The pulselength in use is displayed at the upper left corner of the display. Appropriate
pulselengths are preset to individual range scales. Therefore, you are not usually required
to select them. If you are not satisfied with the current pulselength setting, however, it is
possible to change it for the ranges shown below. Generally, select a longer pulse for
longer detection range and shorter pulse for better range discrimination.
1.5 nm, 1.5 sm, 3 km: Short pulse, medium pulse
3 nm, 3 sm, 6 km: Medium pulse, long pulse
1. If not displayed, press the HIDE/SHOW key to show the radar soft keys.
2. Press the SIGNAL PROC. soft key.
1.5/
H-UP
.500nm
SP
319.9°M
SIGNAL
PROCESS
I. REJ
LOW
PULSE
SHORT
E. STR
LOW
RETURN
359.9°R
1.40nm
+
Signal process soft keys
3. Choose the 1.5 nm or 3 nm with the RANGE key.
4. Press the PULSE soft key to select the pulselength setting. SHORT or MEDIUM for 1.5
nm, 1.5 sm, 3 km and MEDIUM or LONG for 3 nm, 3 sm,
6 km.
5. Press the RETURN soft key to finish.
2-6
2. RADAR OPERATION
2.9
Presentation Mode
This unit provides four radar presentation modes: head-up, course-up, north-up and true
motion.
Heading data is required for modes other than head-up.
2.9.1
Selecting a presentation mode
1. If not displayed, press the HIDE/SHOW key to show the radar soft keys.
2. Press the RADAR DISPLY soft key to show the RADAR DISPLAY soft keys.
3. Press the MODE soft key. Each pressing of the key changes the presentation mode and
the presentation mode indication in the sequence of North-up, True Motion, Head-up,
and Course-up.
Function
North-up
True Motion
Head-up
Course-up
Indicator on display
N-UP
TR-M
H-UP
C-UP
Soft key label
NTH UP
TRUE M
HD UP
CSE UP
4. Press the RETURN soft key to finish.
Note: When heading data is lost, the presentation mode automatically goes to head-up, the
heading indication at the screen top shows “- - -.-°” and the audio alarm sounds. Press the
ALARM key to acknowledge the alarm. The message “HEADING DATA MISSING” appears.
Restore compass signal to show heading indication. Use the CLEAR key presentation
mode if necessary. The audio alarm may be silenced with the CLEAR key.
2-7
2. RADAR OPERATION
2.9.2
Description of presentation modes
Head-up
Heading Line
North Marker
A display without azimuth stabilization in which the line
connecting the center with the top of the display
indicates own ship’s heading. Targets are painted at
their measured distances and in their directions
relative to own ship’s heading.
The short line on the bearing scale is the north marker.
Course-up
The radar picture is stabilized and displayed with the
currently selected course at the top of the screen. As
you change heading, the ship’s heading line moves. If
you select a new course, the picture resets to display
the new course at the top of the display.
Targets are painted at their measured distances and in
their directions relative to the intended course which is
maintained at the 0-degree position. The heading line
moves in accordance with ship’s yawing and course
changes.
North-up
Head-up display
North Marker
Heading Line
Course-up display
North
Heading Line
In the north-up mode, targets are painted at their
measured distances and in their true (compass)
directions from own ship. North is maintained at the
top of the screen. The heading line changes its
direction according to ship’s heading.
True motion
Fixed radar targets maintain a constant position on the
screen, while your own ship moves across the radar
image at the correct speed and heading. A map-like
image is displayed, with all moving vessels traveling in
true perspective to each other and to fixed landmasses.
As your ship’s position approaches the edge of the
screen, the radar display is automatically reset to
reveal the area ahead of your ship. You can manually
reset your ship’s position at any time by pressing the
RADAR DISPLY soft key followed by the SHIFT soft
key.
North-up display
North
Heading Line
True motion display
2-8
2. RADAR OPERATION
2.10 Measuring the Range
You can measure the range to a radar target three ways: by the range rings, by the cursor,
and by the VRM (Variable Range Marker).
2.10.1 Measuring range by range rings
Count the number of rings between the center of the display and the target. Check the
range ring interval and judge the distance of the echo from the inner edge of the nearest
ring.
To turn the range rings on, do the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
If not displayed, press the HIDE/SHOW key to show the radar soft keys.
Press the RADAR DISPLY soft key.
Press the RINGS soft key to turn the rings on and select desired brilliance.
Press the RETURN soft key to finish.
2.10.2 Measuring range by cursor
Operate the Cursor pad to place the cursor intersection on the inside edge of the radar
target. The range to the target, as well as the bearing, appears to the right of “+” at the
bottom of the display.
Target
.250/SP.125nm
H-UP
Cursor
319.9°M
SIGNAL
PROC.
RADAR
DISPLY
NAV
FUNC
TARGET
ZOOM &
D. BOX
+ 4.3°R
0.240nm
Bearing and range from own
ship to cursor position
How to measure range to a target with the cursor
2-9
2. RADAR OPERATION
2.10.3 Measuring range by VRM
1. Press the EBL/VRM key to display the EBL/VRM soft keys.
2. Press the VRM1 ON (dotted ring VRM) or VRM2 ON (dashed ring VRM) soft key to
select the desired VRM. The selected VRM’s indication, at the bottom of the screen, is
highlighted.
3. Rotate the ENTER knob then place the VRM on the inside edge of a radar target. Read
the VRM indication to find range to the target.
.250/SP.125nm
H-UP
319.9°M
EBL
VRM
EBL1
ON
VRM1
ON
VRM1
(Dotted line)
OFFSET
EBL2
ON
VRM2
(Dashed line)
VRM2
ON
EBL1
VRM1 range
VRM1
---.-°R
0.119nm
VRM2 range
EBL2
VRM2
---.-°R
0.242nm
359.9°R
0.240nm
+
Active marker is highlighted.
How to measure range with the VRM
4. You may hide the EBL/VRM soft keys by pressing the EBL/VRM key.
2.10.4 Various VRM operations
Erasing a VRM, VRM indication: Press appropriate VRM soft key, then press the CLEAR
key. The VRM is erased and its indication becomes blank.
Erasing EBL/VRM data boxes: Press the EBL or VRM soft key associated with the
EBL/VRM data box you wish to erase. Press the CLEAR key once or twice to erase the
data box.
Hiding EBL/VRM data boxes: Press the ZOOM & D. BOX and D. BOX ON/OFF soft keys
to show or hide the EBL/VRM data boxes.
Moving EBL/VRM data boxes: When an EBL/VRM data box is obscuring a target you
want to see, you can move it to another location as shown below. This cannot be done
when the EBL/VRM soft keys are shown.
1. Press the EBL/VRM key to turn off the EBL/VRM soft keys.
2. Using the Cursor pad, place the cursor inside the data box you wish to move. As the
cursor enters the box it changes to a “hand.” Push the ENTER knob, and the hand
changes to a fist, meaning the box is correctly selected.
3. Use the Cursor pad to move the data box to the location desired, then push the ENTER
knob.
2-10
2. RADAR OPERATION
2.11 Measuring the Bearing
There are two ways to measure the bearing to a target: by the cursor, and by the EBL
(Electronic bearing Line).
2.11.1 Measuring bearing by cursor
Use the Cursor pad to place the cursor at the center of the target. The bearing to the target
appears in the range and bearing box at the bottom right-hand corner on the screen.
2.11.2 Measuring bearing by EBL
1. Press the EBL/VRM key.
2. Press the EBL1 ON (dotted line EBL) or EBL2 ON (dashed line EBL) soft key to select
the desired EBL. The selected EBL’s indication, at the bottom of the screen, is
highlighted.
3. Rotate the ENTER knob to bisect the radar target with the EBL. Read the EBL indication
to find the bearing to the target.
.250/SP.125nm
H-UP
319.9°M
EBL
VRM
EBL1
ON
EBL1
(Dotted line)
VRM1
ON
OFFSET
EBL2
ON
EBL2
(Dashed line)
VRM2
ON
EBL2 bearing
EBL1 bearing
R: Relative
T: True
EBL1
VRM1
330.1°R
-.---nm
EBL2
VRM2
234.1°R
-.---nm
359.9°R
0.24nm
+
Active marker is highlighted.
How to measure bearing with the EBL
4. You may hide the EBL/VRM soft keys by pressing the EBL/VRM key.
Note: The bearing to a target may be shown relative to own ship’s heading (Relative) or
True bearing (requires heading data). This may be done with “EBL REFERENCE,” which is
in the RADAR DISPLAY SETUP menu.
2.11.3 Various EBL operations
Erasing an EBL, EBL indication: Press appropriate EBL soft key, then press the CLEAR
key. The EBL is erased and its indication becomes blank.
Erasing, hiding, moving EBL/VRM data boxes: See paragraph 2.10.4.
2-11
2. RADAR OPERATION
2.12 Erasing the Heading Line, North Marker
The heading line indicates the ship's heading in all presentation modes. It is a line from the
own ship position to the outer edge of the radar display area and appears at zero degrees
on the bearing scale in head-up mode; it changes its orientation in the north-up, course-up
and true motion modes with ship’s movement.
The north marker appears as a short dashed line. In the head-up and course-up modes the
north marker moves around the bearing scale as the ship’s heading moves.
To temporarily erase the heading line and north marker, press the RADAR DISPLY soft key
followed by the HL OFF soft key. Release the key to redisplay the markers. (If the radar soft
keys are not shown, hit the HIDE/SHOW key to display them.)
2.13 Reducing Noise Interference
Noise, appearing on the displays as random “speckles,” can be reduced as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Press the MENU key to open the menu.
Press the RADAR DISPLAY SETUP soft key.
Select NOISE REJECTION, then press the EDIT soft key.
Select OFF, LOW or HIGH as appropriate.
Press the ENTER soft key.
Press the MENU key to close the menu.
2-12
2. RADAR OPERATION
2.14 Rejecting Radar Interference
Radar interference may occur when near another shipborne radar that is operating in the
same frequency band as your radar. Its on-screen appearance looks like many bright dots
either scattered at random or in the form of dotted lines extending from the center to the
edge of the display. Interference effects are distinguishable from normal echoes because
they do not appear in the same place on successive rotations of the scanner.
Be sure to turn off the interference rejector when no interference exists – weak targets may
be missed.
Radar interference
1. If not displayed, press the HIDE/SHOW key to show the radar soft keys.
2. Press the SIGNAL PROC. soft key.
1.5/
H-UP
.500nm
SP
319.9°M
SIGNAL
PROCESS
I. REJ
LOW
E. AVG
OFF
PULSE
SHORT
E. STR
LOW
RETURN
359.9°R
1.40nm
+
SIGNAL PROCESS soft keys
3. Press the I. REJ soft key successively to choose the interference rejection level desired;
LOW, MED, HIGH or OFF.
4. Press the RETURN soft key to finish.
The display shows IR L (Low), IR M (Medium) or IR H (High) when the interference rejector
is on.
2-13
2. RADAR OPERATION
2.15 Zoom
The zoom feature allows you to double the size of the area selected with the “zoom
square.” It is available on any range but is inoperative in true motion and when the display
is shifted.
2.15.1 Zooming radar targets
1.
2.
3.
4.
If not displayed, press the HIDE/SHOW key to show the radar soft keys.
Use the Cursor pad to set the cursor where you want to zoom.
Press the ZOOM & D. BOX soft key to show ZOOM & D. BOX soft keys.
Press the ZOOM ON/OFF soft key to select ON. A hollow square, called the “zoom
area,” appears on the display.
5. To release the cursor, press the CURSOR FLOAT soft key. (The hollow square changes
to a dashed one.) To relocate the zoom circle, select location with the Cursor pad, then
press the CURSOR LOCK key.
6. To quit the zoom function, press the ZOOM ON/OFF soft key to select OFF.
319.9°M
.250/SP.125nm
H-UP
ZOOM
D. BOX
ZOOM
ON /OFF
Zoom circle
CURSOR
FLOAT
ARPA
TGT ZM
D. BOX
ON/OFF
Zoom window
RETURN
Requires optional
ARP Board in
18x4C/19x4C series
network radar.
Not shown when
radar source is
otherwise.
001.0°R
0.160nm
+
Zoom
2.15.2 Zooming ARP, TTM targets
You may zoom in on TTM (Tracked Target Message) and ARP targets. TTM targets can
come from a NavNet connected radar, or from other ARP radar that is outputting the TTM
message. (TTM is a NMEA 0183 data sentence that is an available output from some ARP
capable radar.) Target numbers must be turned on to use this function. This can be done by
enabling the target ID number option in the ARP SETUP menu.
1.
2.
3.
4.
If not displayed, press the HIDE/SHOW key to show the radar soft keys.
Press the ZOOM/D. BOX soft key to show ZOOM & D. BOX soft keys.
Press the ZOOM ON/OFF soft key to select ZOOM ON.
Press the ARP TGT ZM soft key.
2-14
2. RADAR OPERATION
SELECT TARGET NO.
▲
1
▼
Target no. selection window
5. Use the ENTER knob to select number (1-10), then push the ENTER knob. If the target
number does not exist several beeps sound and the zoom function is cancelled.
To cancel, press the CURSOR LOCK soft key.
Note: The zoom window blends in with the background when the background color for the
radar picture is white. If the window is difficult to see, change the background color.
2.16 Shifting the Picture
Own ship position, or sweep origin, can be displaced manually or automatically to expand
the view field without switching to a larger scale. Zoom is not available when the display is
shifted.
SHIFT
2.16.1 Manual shift
The sweep origin can be shifted in
any presentation mode to a point
specified by the cursor by up to 50%
of the range in use in any direction.
Cursor
1. Locate the cursor anywhere within
Place cursor
Press the MANUAL soft key.
the effective radius of the display.
where desired.
2. If not displayed, press the
Manual shift
HIDE/SHOW key to show the
radar soft keys.
3. Press the RADAR DISPLY soft key.
4. Press the SHIFT soft key.
5. Press the MANUAL soft key to shift. The heading line shifts to the cursor location.
SHIFT appears at right-hand corner of the display.
To cancel shift, press the RADAR DISPLY, SHIFT and OFF soft keys.
2.16.2 Automatic shift
The amount of automatic shift is calculated
Ship's speed
X 0.5 = Amount of shift(%)
according to ship’s speed, and the amount of
Shift speed setting
shift is limited to 50% of the range in use. For
example, if you set the shift speed setting for 15 knots and the ship is running at 10 knots
the amount of shift will be about 34%. The formula for determining shift amount is as shown
above. Automatic shift mode is only available in the head-up mode.
2-15
2. RADAR OPERATION
Setting automatic shift maximum speed
1.
2.
3.
4.
If not displayed, press the HIDE/SHOW key to show the radar soft keys.
Press the RADAR DISPLY soft key.
Press the SHIFT soft key to show the shift soft keys.
Press the AUTO S.SPD soft key to display the auto ship
AUTO SHIP SPEED
speed setting window.
15
5. Adjust the Cursor pad or ENTER knob to set the
maximum speed of your vessel, and then push the
ENTER knob or the ENTER soft key to set. The setting
range is 1-999 kt and the default setting is 15 kt.
Automatic shift
Press the AUTO soft key. To cancel, press the RADAR DISPLY, SHIFT and OFF soft keys.
2.17 Using the Offset EBL
The offset EBL can be used to predict a potential collision course. It can also be used to
measure the range and bearing between two targets.
2.17.1 Predicting collision course
The procedure below may be used to check if a radar target is on a potential collision
course with your vessel.
1. Press the EBL/VRM key to show the EBL/VRM soft keys.
2. Press the EBL1 ON soft key to turn on the EBL1.
3. Press the OFFSET soft key. The origin of EBL1 moves to the cursor position, which is
marked with an “X.”
4. Use the Cursor pad to place the cursor on the radar target which looks like it might be
on a collision course with own ship.
5. Push the ENTER knob to fix the origin position.
6. After waiting for a few minutes (at least three minutes), rotate the ENTER knob so the
EBL bisects the target at the new position. If the target tracks along the EBL towards the
center of the display (your ship’s position), the target may be on a collision course with
your vessel.
To cancel the offset EBL, press the OFFSET soft key.
2-16
2. RADAR OPERATION
.250/SP.125nm
H-UP
319.9°M
EBL
VRM
EBL1
ON
VRM1
ON
Target tracked
here
OFFSET
Initial target
position
EBL2
ON
VRM2
ON
EBL1
VRM1
45.0°R
-.---nm
359.9°R
.0.240nm
+
Predicting collision course with the offset EBL
2.17.2 Measuring range & bearing between two targets
The procedure which follows shows how to measure the range and bearing between two
targets, using the targets “A” and “B” in the figure below as an example.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Operate the Cursor pad to place the cursor on the target “A.”
Press the EBL/VRM key to show the EBL/VRM soft keys.
Press the EBL1 ON soft key to turn on the EBL1.
Press the OFFSET soft key. The origin of EBL1 moves to the cursor position, which is
marked with an “X.”
Rotate the ENTER knob so the EBL bisects the target “B.”
Push the ENTER knob, then press the VRM1 ON soft key.
Rotate the ENTER knob to place the VRM1 on the inner edge of the target “B.”
Look at the indications for VRM1 and EBL1 to find the range and bearing between the
two targets.
2-17
2. RADAR OPERATION
To cancel the offset EBL, press the OFFSET soft key.
.250/SP.125nm
H-UP
319.9°M
EBL
VRM
EBL1
ON
VRM1
ON
Target B
OFFSET
Target A
EBL2
ON
VRM2
ON
EBL1
Bearing and range
between target A
and target B
VRM1
45.0°R
0.125nm
359.9°R
0.24nm
+
Measuring range and bearing between two targets
2.18 Echo Trails
Echo trails are simulated afterglow of target echoes that represent their movements relative
or true to own ship. This function is useful for alerting you past possible collision situations.
Echo trail
Sample echo trails
2.18.1 Trail time
1. If not displayed, press the HIDE/SHOW key to show the radar soft keys.
2. Press the TARGET soft key.
3. Press the TRAIL soft key to show the trail soft keys.
2-18
2. RADAR OPERATION
319.9°M
.250/SP.125nm
H-UP
TRAIL
TRAIL
ON /OFF
TRAIL
TIME
GRAD
SINGLE
HIGH
TRAIL
COLOR
RETURN
359.9°R
0.24nm
+
Trail soft keys
4. Press the TRAIL TIME soft key to show the trail time window.
TRAIL TIME
▲
¤ 15 seconds
¡ 30 seconds
¡ 1 minute
¡ 3 minutes
¡ 6 minutes
¡ 15 minutes
¡ 30 minutes
¡ CONTINUOUS
▼
Trail time window
5. Use the Cursor pad to select time desired.
6. Press the ENTER soft key.
7. Press the RETURN soft key twice to finish.
2.18.2 Starting echo trails
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
If not displayed, press the HIDE/SHOW key to show the radar soft keys.
Press the TARGET soft key.
Press the TRAIL soft key.
Press the TRAIL ON/OFF soft key to select ON.
Press the RETURN soft key twice to finish.
“TRAIL,” the echo trail time selected and elapsed time appear at the top right-hand corner
of the display. Then, afterglow starts extending from all targets. Trails are restarted when
the range or mode is changed and zoom or shift is turned on.
For continuous trails, the maximum continuous trail time is 99 minutes and 59 seconds.
When the elapsed time clock counts up to that time, the elapsed time display resets to zero
and trails begin again.
To turn off echo trail, press the TRAIL ON/OFF soft key to select OFF at step 4 in the above
procedure.
2-19
2. RADAR OPERATION
2.18.3 Trail gradation
The echo trails can be shown in single or multiple gradations. Multiple gradation paints the
trails thinner with time, like the afterglow on an analog PPI radar.
1.
2.
3.
4.
If not displayed, press the HIDE/SHOW soft key to show the radar soft keys.
Press the TARGET and TRAIL soft keys.
Press the GRAD soft key to select SINGLE or MULTI as appropriate.
Press the RETURN soft key twice to finish.
Multitone
Monotone
2.18.4 Trail color
Trails may be shown target trails in blue, yellow, green or white.
1. If not displayed, press the HIDE/SHOW key to show the radar soft keys.
2. Press the TARGET, TRAIL and TRAIL COLOR soft keys in that order.
TRAIL COLOR
BLUE
YELLOW
GREEN
WHITE
Trail color window
3. Use the Cursor pad to select the color desired, then press the ENTER soft key.
4. Press the RETURN soft key twice.
2-20
2. RADAR OPERATION
2.19 Echo Stretch
Normally, the reflected echoes from long range targets appear on the display as weaker
and smaller blips even though they are compensated by the radar’s internal circuitry. The
echo stretch function magnifies these small blips in all ranges. Two types of echo stretch
are available: ES LOW which stretches echoes in bearing direction and ES HIGH which
stretches them in both range and bearing directions.
Target
Range
direction
Bearing
direction
Bearing
direction
Echo Stretch OFF
"LOW" Echo stretch
"HIGH" Echo stretch
Types of echo stretch
This function magnifies not only targets but also sea clutter and radar interference. For this
reason, be sure sea clutter and radar interference are properly suppressed before activating
the echo stretch.
1.
2.
3.
4.
If not displayed, press the HIDE/SHOW key to show the radar soft keys.
Press the SIGNAL PROC. soft key.
Press the E. STR soft key to select HIGH, LOW or OFF as appropriate.
Press the RETURN soft key to finish.
The display shows ES H (High) or ES L (Low) when the echo stretch is on.
2-21
2. RADAR OPERATION
2.20 Echo Averaging
The echo average feature, which requires a Model 18x4/19x4 series network radar as radar
source, effectively suppresses sea clutter. Echoes received from stable targets such as
ships appear on the screen at almost the same position during every rotation of the antenna.
On the other hand, unstable echoes such as sea clutter appear at random positions.
To distinguish real target echoes from sea clutter, echo average performs scan-to-scan
correlation. Correlation is made by storing and averaging echo signals over successive
picture frames. If an echo is solid and stable, it is presented in its normal intensity. Sea
clutter is averaged over successive scans resulting in the reduced brilliance, making it
easier to discriminate real targets from sea clutter.
To properly use the echo average function, it is recommended to first suppress sea clutter
with the A/C SEA control and then do the following:
1. If not displayed, press the HIDE/SHOW key to display the radar soft keys.
2. Press the SIGNAL PROC. soft key.
3. Press the E. AVG soft key to select desired echo averaging.
OFF: No averaging
LOW: Helps distinguish targets from sea clutter and suppresses brilliance of unstable
echoes.
MED: Distinguishes small stationary targets such as navigation buoys.
HIGH: Stably displays distant targets.
4. Press the RETURN soft key to finish.
(a) Echo average OFF
(b) Echo average ON
Effect of echo averaging
2-22
2. RADAR OPERATION
2.21 Outputting TLL Data
Target position data can be output to units of the network and shown on their plotter screen
with the TLL mark (X). This function requires position and heading data.
1. Operate the Cursor pad to place the cursor on the target whose position you wish to
output.
2. If not displayed, press the HIDE/SHOW key to display the radar soft keys.
3. Press the TARGET soft key.
.250/SP.125nm
H-UP
319.9°M
TARGET
TRAIL
TLL
OUTPUT
ACQ
TARGET
INFO
Shown with selection of
18x4C/19x4C series network
radar equipped with ARP
function as source.
Not shown otherwise.
RETURN
359.9°R
0.240nm
+
TARGET soft keys
4. Press the TLL OUTPUT soft key to output target position data. The TLL mark appears
on the plotter screen at the target’s position the moment the TLL OUTPUT soft key was
pressed. Further, that position is recorded as a waypoint on all NavNet units, under the
youngest empty waypoint number on each NavNet unit.
5. Press the RETURN soft key to finish.
Note: The screen of the TLL recipient may be temporarily interrupted when receiving TLL
from another NavNet display unit. Press any key to restore normal operation.
2-23
2. RADAR OPERATION
2.22 Guard Alarm
The guard alarm allows the operator to set the desired range and bearing for a guard zone.
When ships, islands, landmasses, etc. violate the guard zone, an audio alarm sounds and
the offending target blinks to call the operator’s attention.
CAUTION
• The alarm should not be relied upon as
the sole means for detecting possible
collision situations.
• A/C SEA, A/C RAIN and GAIN controls
should be properly adjusted to be sure
the alarm system does not overlook
target echoes.
2.22.1 Setting a guard alarm zone
To set a guard alarm zone, set the radar to transmit and do the following:
1. Press the ALARM key.
2. Use the Cursor pad to set the cursor on the top left corner (or top right corner) of the
guard zone you want to set, then press the SET GUARD1 or SET GUARD2 soft key,
depending on which guard zone you want to set.
3. Use the Cursor pad to set the cursor on the bottom right corner (or top left corner) of
the guard zone area, then push the ENTER knob.
4. Press the RETURN soft key to finish.
.250/SP.125nm
H-UP
319.9°M
ALARM
319.9°M
.250/SP.125nm
H-UP
ALARM
GUARD 1
SET
GUARD1
SET
GUARD1
2
1
MOVE +CURSOR TO
ANOTHER CORNER OF
GUARD1 AND PUSH KNOB
TO SET.
SET
GUARD2
SET
GUARD2
RETURN
RETURN
317.2°R
+0.230nm
(1) Drag cursor to top (or bottom) corner
for guard zone and press the SET
GUARD1 or SET GUARD2 soft key.
ENO19.9
ALARM
B
L T
V
R
M
.125n
.032nm
m
°R
+39.9
.0.230nm
(2) Drag cursor diagonally to bottom (or top)
corner for guard zone and press the [ENTER]
knob.
How to set a guard alarm zone
2-24
ERASE
GUARD1
2. RADAR OPERATION
The equipment then searches for targets inside the guard zone to determine guard alarm
type. If a target is found inside the guard zone, the guard zone type becomes an “Outward
guard alarm,” and any target exiting the guard zone will trigger the audio alarm. If no target
is found, the guard zone type becomes an “Inward guard alarm,” and any targets entering
the guard zone will trigger the audio alarm. The guard alarm type is shown as G1(G2) IN or
G1(G2) OUT.
Note 1: When the radar range is less than the guard zone range “G1 (G2) IN” or “G1 (G2)
OUT” changes to “G1 (G2) ***.” The guard alarm function is not available while this
indication appears.
Note 2: If the network radar is set to standby while the guard alarm is active, the guard
alarm is cancelled. The guard alarm is redisplayed when the radar is set to transmit again.
2.22.2 When the alarm is violated…
Any radar target violating the guard zone will flash, the audio alarm sounds, and the alarm
icon appears in red. Additionally the message “TARGET ENTERED INTO
GUARD1(GUARD2)” or “TARGET LEFT FROM GUARD1(GUARD2)” is displayed at the
bottom of the screen. Press the CLEAR key to silence the alarm.
2.22.3 Cancelling the guard alarm
1. Press the ALARM key to show the ALARM menu.
2. Press the ERASE GUARD1 or ERASE GUARD2 soft key as appropriate.
3. Press the RETURN soft key to finish.
2.23 Watchman
2.23.1 How watchman works
The watchman function periodically transmits radar pulses for one minute to check for
targets in a guard zone. If a target is found in the zone, watchman is cancelled, the audio
alarm sounds and the radar continues transmitting. If no target is found the radar goes into
standby for the number of minutes specified on the RADAR DISPLAY SETUP menu. This
feature is useful when you do not need the radar’s function continuously but want to be
alerted to radar targets in a specific area. “WTCH” appears at the top left corner when
Watchman is active.
Tx
1 min
Watchman
starts
ST-BY
5,10
or
20 min
*
Tx
1 min
ST-BY
*
5,10
or
20 min
* Beeps emitted just before radar transmits.
How watchman works
2-25
2. RADAR OPERATION
2.23.2 Turning on/off watchman
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Set a guard zone. (See the paragraph 2.22.)
If not displayed, press the HIDE/SHOW key to display the radar soft keys.
Press the NAV FUNC soft key.
Press the W. MAN ON/OFF soft key to select ON or OFF as appropriate.
Press the RETURN soft key to finish.
Note: When the watchman is activated and no guard zone is active, the message “PLEASE
SET GUARD ZONE. PUSH ANY KEY TO CONTINUE.” appears. Press any key and then
set a guard zone.
2.23.3 Setting watchman stand-by interval
The watchman standby interval, that is, the number of minutes the radar is in standby, can
be set to 5, 10 or 20 minutes as follows:
1. Press the MENU key.
2. Press the RADAR DISPLAY SETUP soft key.
3. Select WATCHMAN TIME, then press the EDIT soft key.
WATCHMAN TIME
¤
¡
¡
5 minutes
10 minutes
20 minutes
Watchman time window
4. Select time desired, then press the ENTER soft key.
5. Press the MENU key to close the menu.
2-26
2. RADAR OPERATION
2.24 Waypoint Marker
A waypoint marker, showing the location of the destination waypoint set on the plotter, may
be inscribed on the radar display.
.250/SP.125nm
H-UP
Waypoint
marker
319.9°M
NAV
+
W. MAN
ON/OFF
FUNC
WPT MK
ON /OFF
RETURN
359.9°R
0.24nm
+
Waypoint marker
1.
2.
3.
4.
If not already shown, press the HIDE/SHOW key to display the radar soft keys.
Press the NAV FUNC soft key.
Press the WPT MK ON/OFF soft key to select ON or OFF as appropriate.
Press the RETURN soft key to finish.
2-27
2. RADAR OPERATION
2.25 ARP, TTM Operation
When the radar source is an ARP-equipped Model 18x4/19x4 series network radar, you can
manually and automatically acquire and track ten targets. Once a target is acquired
automatically or manually it is automatically tracked within 0.1 to 32 nm. If the FURUNO
heading sensor PG-1000 is used, the data sentence “RMC” is necessary.
Alternatively, you can display the tracks of other ships by receiving the data sentence TTM
(Tracked Target Message) via the NETWORK or NMEA port on the display unit. However,
targets cannot be acquired.
Note: When using your unit as remote display, you cannot change the range of the main
radar at the remote display. For the target acquisition, set the range individually.
Usage precautions for ARP
CAUTION
No one navigational aid should be relied
upon for the safety of vessel and crew.
The navigator has the responsibility to
check all aids available to confirm
position. Electronic aids are not
a substitute for basic navigational
principles and common sense.
• This auto plotter automatically tracks an
automatically or manually acquired radar
target and calculates its course and
speed, indicating them by a vector. Since
the data generated by the auto plotter
are based on what radar targets are
selected, the radar must always be
optimally tuned for use with the auto
plotter, to ensure required targets will not
be lost or unwanted targets such as sea
returns and noise will not be acquired
and tracked.
• A target does not always mean a landmass, reef, ships or other surface vessels
but can imply returns from sea surface
and clutter. As the level of clutter changes
with environment, the operator should
properly adjust the A/C SEA, A/C RAIN
and GAIN controls to be sure target
echoes are not eliminated from the
radar screen.
2-28
CAUTION
The plotting accuracy and response of
this auto plotter meets IMO standards.
Tracking accuracy is affected by the
following:
• Tracking accuracy is affected by course
change. One to two minutes is required to
restore vectors to full accuracy after an
abrupt course change. (The actual
amount depends on gyrocompass
specifications.)
• The amount of tracking delay is inversely
proportional to the relative speed of the
target. Delay is on the order of 15-30
seconds for high relative speed; 30-60
seconds for low relative speed.
Display accuracy is affected by the
following:
• Echo intensity
• Radar transmission pulsewidth
• Radar bearing error
• Gyrocompass error
• Course change (own ship or target)
2. RADAR OPERATION
2.25.1 Activating/deactivating ARP, TTM
1. Press the MENU key followed by the ARP SETUP soft key to show the ARP SETUP
menu.
ARP TARGET INFO
INTERNAL ARP
CANCEL ALL TARGETS
ON
ARP VECTOR MODE
RELATIVE
ARP VECTOR TIME
30 minutes
HISTORY INTERVAL
OFF
CPA
OFF
TCPA
30 seconds
AUTO ACQUISITION AREA
OFF
TARGET ID NUMBER
OFF
ARP
SETUP
EDIT
RETURN
ARP setup menu
2. Select ARP TARGET INFO, then press the EDIT soft key to show the ARP TARGET
INFO window.
ARP TARGET INFO
▲
¤ INTERNAL ARP
EXTERNAL ARP
OFF
▼
¡
¡
ARP TARGET INFO window
3. Select INTERNAL ARP, EXTERNAL ARP or OFF as appropriate.
EXTERNAL ARP: Receive TTM data sentence via NMEA or NETWORK port. Target
tracks are shown but targets cannot be acquired.
OFF: Turns off the ARP or TTM display.
4. Press the ENTER soft key.
5. Press the MENU key to close the menu.
2.25.2 Acquiring and tracking targets (ARP)
Ten targets may be acquired and tracked manually and automatically. When you attempt to
acquire an 11th target, the message “ARP FULL – ALREADY TRACKING 10 TARGETS!”
appears for five seconds. To acquire another target, terminate tracking of an unnecessary
target as shown in the paragraph “2.25.4 Terminating tracking of ARP targets.”
Manual acquisition
When the automatic acquisition (AUTO ACQ. AREA) is set to on, up to five targets may be
acquired manually. If you attempt to acquire a sixth target, the alert message appears.
1. If not already shown, press the HIDE/SHOW key to show the radar soft keys.
2-29
2. RADAR OPERATION
2.
3.
4.
5.
Press the TARGET soft key.
Place the cursor on the target to acquire.
Press the ACQ soft key.
Press the RETURN soft key to finish.
The plot symbol changes over time as below. A vector appears about one minute after
acquisition, indicating the target’s motion trend.
Vector
01*
01*
1 min. after
3 min. after
acquisition
acquisition
* = Target number shown when TARGET ID NUMBER is
turned on in the ARP SETUP menu.
01*
At acquisition
Target Number
ARP plot symbols
Note: In case of the acquisition by an external ARP, the acquisition circle mark appears one
minute after acquisition.
Automatic acquisition
The ARP can acquire up to ten targets
automatically by setting an automatic
acquisition area. When automatic acquisition is
selected after acquiring targets manually, only
the remaining capacity for targets may be
automatically acquired. For example, if seven
targets have been manually acquired, three
targets may be automatically acquired.
Automatic acquisition area
45° port
2.0 - 2.5 nm
45° starboard
Automatic acquisition area
1. Press the MENU key to show the main
menu.
2. Press the ARP SETUP soft key to show the ARP SETUP menu.
3. Operate the Cursor pad to select AUTO ACQUISITION AREA.
4. Press the EDIT soft key to show the automatic acquisition area window.
AUTO ACQ. AREA
▲
¡ ON
¤ OFF
▼
Automatic acquisition area window
5. Select ON, then press the ENTER soft key.
6. Press the MENU key to close the menu. An acquisition area of 2.0 to 2.5 miles in range
and ±45º on either side of the heading line in bearing appears.
Note: Targets being tracked in automatic acquisition are continuously tracked when
switching to manual acquisition.
2-30
2. RADAR OPERATION
2.25.3 Displaying target number (ARP, TTM)
Target number can be shown for ARP and TTM targets as below.
.250/SP.125nm
H-UP
319.9°T
TARGET
TRAIL
TLL
OUTPUT
01
ACQ
ARP
Target
Number
TARGET
INFO
RETURN
359.9°R
0.240nm
+
ARP target number
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Press the MENU key.
Press the ARP SETUP soft key.
Select TARGET ID NUMBER.
Press the EDIT soft key.
Select ON or OFF as appropriate.
Press the ENTER soft key.
Press the MENU key to close the menu.
2.25.4 Terminating tracking of ARP targets
When ten targets have been acquired, no more acquisition occurs unless targets are
cancelled. If you need to acquire additional targets, you must first cancel one or more
individual targets, or all targets, using one of the procedures below.
Terminating tracking of selected targets
1. Place the cursor on the target to terminate tracking.
2. Press the CLEAR key to terminate tracking and erase the target.
Terminating tracking of all targets
CANCEL ALL TARGETS
1. Press the MENU key followed by the ARP SETUP
▲
¡ YES
soft key.
¤ NO
2. Select CANCEL ALL TARGETS.
▼
3. Press the EDIT soft key.
4. Select YES.
Cancel all targets window
5. Press the ENTER soft key.
6. Press the RETURN soft key followed by the MENU key to close the menu.
2-31
2. RADAR OPERATION
2.25.5 Setting vector attributes (ARP)
What is a vector?
A vector is a line extending from a tracked target which shows estimated speed and course
of the target. The vector tip shows an estimated position of the target after the selected
vector time elapses. It can be useful to extend the vector length (time) in order to evaluate
the risk of collision with any target.
Vector
Vector
Vector reference, vector time
You may reference the vectors to North (True, requires heading and speed data) or ship’s
heading (relative) as desired. Vector time can be set to 30 seconds, 1, 3, 6, 15 or 30
minutes.
1. Press the MENU key followed by the ARP SETUP soft key to show the ARP SETUP
menu.
2. Operate the Cursor pad to select ARP VECTOR MODE.
3. Press the EDIT soft key to show the ARP vector mode window.
ARP VECTOR MODE
¤
¡
RELATIVE
TRUE
ARP vector mode window
4. Select TRUE or RELATIVE as appropriate.
5. Press the ENTER soft key.
6. Select ARP VECTOR TIME, then press the EDIT soft key to show the ARP vector time
window.
ARP VECTOR TIME
▲
¤ 30 seconds
1 minute
3 minutes
6 minutes
15 minutes
30 minutes
▼
¡
¡
¡
¡
¡
ARP vector time window
7. Operate the Cursor pad to select vector time among 30 sec, 1 min, 3 min, 6 min, 15
min and 30 min.
8. Press the ENTER soft key.
9. Press the MENU key to close the menu.
2-32
2. RADAR OPERATION
2.25.6 Displaying past position (ARP)
This ARP can display time-spaced dots (maximum ten dots) marking the past positions of
any targets being tracked. You can evaluate a target’s actions by the spacing between dots.
Below are examples of dot spacing and target movement.
(a) Ship turning
(b) Ship running
straight
(c) Ship reduced
speed
(d) Ship increased
speed
Past position displays
To turn the past position display on or off:
1. Press the MENU key followed by the ARP SETUP soft key.
2. Operate the Cursor pad to select HISTORY INTERVAL.
3. Press the EDIT soft key to show the history interval window.
HISTORY INTERVAL
▲
¤ OFF
¡ 30 seconds
¡ 1 minute
¡ 3 minutes
¡ 6 minutes
▼
History interval window
4. Operate the Cursor pad to select history interval among 30 sec, 1 min, 3 min and 6 min,
or select OFF to turn off the past position display.
5. Press the ENTER soft key.
6. Press the MENU key to close the menu.
2-33
2. RADAR OPERATION
2.25.7 ARP, TTM target data
You can show motion trends (range, bearing, course, speed, CPA and TCPA) for ARP or
TTM targets.
1. Place the cursor on the target whose data you want to see.
2. If not already displayed, press the HIDE/SHOW key to show the radar soft keys.
3. Press the TARGET and TARGET INFO soft keys. The data of the selected target
appears at the bottom left-hand corner of the display. (If an EBL/VRM data box is
displayed the ARP (TTM) data box will be under it.)
4. Press the RETURN soft key to finish.
To erase ARP/TTM target data, select the corresponding target with the cursor, then press
the CLEAR key.
.250/SP.125nm
H-UP
TARGET
+
Cursor
ARP
Target
319.9°T
TRAIL
TLL
OUTPUT
ACQ
01
TARGET
INFO
RETURN
No.01 VECTOR TRUE 15min
CSE 359.9°T SPD 12.5kt
CPA 2nm TCPA 12.35
359.9°R
+
0.240nm
CPA and TCPA
Course and Speed
Target No., Vector Reference (True), Vector Time
ARP target data
2-34
2. RADAR OPERATION
2.25.8 CPA/TCPA alarm (ARP)
When the predicted CPA of any target becomes smaller than a preset CPA alarm range or
its predicted TCPA less than a preset TCPA alarm limit, an audio alarm sounds and the
speaker icon appears (in red). In addition, the target plot symbol of the offending target
changes to a triangle and flashes together with its vector. You may silence the audio alarm
with the CLEAR key. Press the ALARM key and the message “COLLISION ALARM”
appears. Press the CLEAR ALARM soft key to acknowledge the alarm. The flashing of the
triangle plot symbol continues until you intentionally terminate tracking of the target. The
ARP continuously monitors the predicted range at the Closest Point of Approach (CPA) and
predicted time to CPA (TCPA) of each track to own ship.
This feature helps alert you to targets which may be on a collision course with own ship.
However, it is important that gain, A/C SEA, A/C RAIN and other radar controls are properly
adjusted and the ARP is set up so that it can track targets effectively.
CPA/TCPA alarm ranges must be set up properly taking into consideration the size,
tonnage, speed, turning performance and other characteristics of own ship.
CAUTION
The CPA/TCPA alarm should never be
relied upon as the sole means for detecting the risk of collision. The navigator is
not relieved of the responsibility to keep
visual lookout for avoiding collisions,
whether or not the radar or other plotting
aid is in use.
Follow the steps shown below to set the CPA/TCPA alarm
range:
1. Press the MENU key followed by the ARP SETUP soft
key.
2. Operate the Cursor pad to select CPA.
3. Press the EDIT soft key to show the CPA window.
4. Select a CPA limit desired from 0.5 nm, 1 nm, 2 nm, 3
nm, 5 nm and 6 nm with the Cursor pad.
5. Press the ENTER soft key. The ARP SETUP menu
reappears.
6. Operate the Cursor pad to select TCPA.
7. Press the EDIT soft key to show the TCPA window.
8. Select a TCPA limit from 30 sec, 1 min, 2 min, 3 min, 4
min, 5 min, 6 min and 12 min.
9. Press the ENTER soft key.
10. Press the MENU key to close the menu.
CPA
▲
¤
OFF
¡ 0.5nm
¡ 1nm
¡ 2nm
¡ 3nm
¡ 5nm
¡ 6nm
▼
CPA distance
TCPA
▲
¤
30 seconds
¡ 1 minute
¡ 2 minutes
¡ 3 minutes
¡ 4 minutes
¡ 5 minutes
¡ 6 minutes
¡ 12 minutes
▼
TCPA time
2-35
2. RADAR OPERATION
2.25.9 Lost target alarm (ARP)
When the system detects a lost target, the target symbol becomes a diamond and tracking
is discontinued after one minute.
01
Lost target mark
Canceling a lost target
1. Place the cursor on the target.
2. Press the CLEAR key.
2.25.10 Showing, hiding ARP target tracks
ARP target tracks may be shown or hidden as follows.
1. With a plotter display selected, press the MENU key followed by the CHART SETUP
and TRACKS & MARKS CONTROL soft keys to open the TRACK CONTROL menu.
2. Use the Cursor pad to select TARGET TRACKS DISPLAY.
3. Press the EDIT soft key to show the target track display window.
4. Use the Cursor pad to select one of the following:
ON or OFF (no ARP or AIS): Turn on or off target tracks
ARP ONLY (ARP equipped): Show only ARP tracks.
AIS ONLY (AIS equipped): Show only AIS tracks. (for future use)
BOTH: Show both ARP and AIS tracks.
5. Press the ENTER soft key.
6. Press the MENU key to close the menu.
2-36
2. RADAR OPERATION
2.26 Interpreting the Radar Display
2.26.1 False echoes
Occasionally echo signals appear on the screen at positions where there is no target or
disappear even if there are targets. False target situations may be recognized, however, if
you understand why they are displayed. Typical false echoes are shown below.
Multiple echoes
Multiple echoes occur when a transmitted
pulse returns from a solid object like a
large ship, bridge, or breakwater. A
second, a third or more echoes may be
observed on the display at double, triple or
other multiples of the actual range of the
target as shown below. Multiple reflection
echoes can be reduced and often
removed by decreasing the gain
(sensitivity) or properly adjusting the A/C
SEA control.
True
echo
Target
Own ship
Multiple
echo
Multiple echoes
Sidelobe echoes
Every time the radar pulse is transmitted,
some radiation escapes on each side of
the beam. This stray RF is called a
“sidelobe.” If a target exists where it can
be detected by the sidelobes as well as
the main lobe, the side echoes may be
represented on both sides of the true echo
at the same range. Sidelobes show
usually only on short ranges and from
strong targets. They can be reduced
through careful reduction of the gain or
proper adjustment of the A/C SEA control.
Virtual image
A relatively large target close to your ship
may show at two positions on the screen.
One of them is the true echo directly
reflected by the target and the other is a
false echo which is caused by the mirror
effect of a large object on or close to your
ship as shown in the figure below. If your
ship comes close to a large metal bridge,
for example, such a false echo may
temporarily be seen on the screen.
Virtual image
Target A
Target B
(Spurious) Target B
(True)
Sidelobe echoes
Target ship
;
;;
;;
;;
;;
;;
;
;;
;;
;
;;
;
;
;;
;;
;;
;;
Own
ship
;
;;
;
;;
;;
;
;;
;;
;;
;
;;
;;
;
;
;;
;
True
; echo
;;
;;
;;
Mirror image
of target ship
False
echo
Virtual image
2-37
2. RADAR OPERATION
Shadow sector
Funnels, stacks, masts, or derricks in the path of the
antenna block the radar beam. If the angle subtended
at the antenna is more than a few degrees, a
non-detecting sector or blind spot may be produced.
Within this sector, targets can not be detected.
Radar
antenna
Radar
mast
2.26.2 SART (Search and Rescue Transponder)
A Search and Rescue Transponder (SART) may be triggered by any X-Band (3 cm) radar
within a range of approximately 8 nm. Each radar pulse received causes it to transmit a
response which is swept repetitively across the complete radar frequency band. When
interrogated, it first sweeps rapidly (0.4 µs) through the band before beginning a relatively
slow sweep (7.5 µs) through the band back to the starting frequency. This process is
repeated for a total of twelve complete cycles. At some point in each sweep, the SART
frequency will match that of the interrogating radar and be within the pass band of the radar
receiver. If the SART is within range, the frequency match during each of the 12 slow
sweeps will produce a response on the radar display, thus a line of 12 dots equally spaced
by about 0.64 nautical miles will be shown.
When the range to the SART is reduced to about 1 nm, the radar display may show also the
12 responses generated during the fast sweeps. These additional dot responses, which
also are equally spaced by 0.64 nm, will be interspersed with the original line of 12 dots.
They will appear slightly weaker and smaller than the original dots.
Screen B: When SART
is close
Lines of 12
dots are
displayed in
Echo from SART Radar antenna
concentric
beamwidth
Echo from
24 NM
1.5 NM
SART
Screen A: When SART
is distant
Position of
SART
Own ship
position
9500 MHz
9200 MHz
SART mark
length
Sweep time
7.5 µs
95 µs
Own ship
position
Position of
SART
Radar receiver
bandwidth
Low speed sweep signal
Sweep start
High speed sweep signal
Appearance of SART signal on the radar display
2-38
2. RADAR OPERATION
General procedure for detecting SART response
1. Use the range scale of 6 or 12 nm as the spacing between the SART responses is
about 0.6 nm (1125 m) to distinguish the SART.
2. Turn off the automatic clutter suppression (if applicable).
3. Turn off the Interference Rejector.
2.26.3 Racon (Radar Beacon)
A racon is a radar transponder which emits a characteristic signal when triggered by a
ship’s radar (usually only the 3 centimeter band). The signal may be emitted on the same
frequency as that of the triggering radar, in which case it is superimposed on the ship's
radar display automatically.
The racon signal appears on the PPI as a radial line originating at a point just beyond the
position of the radar beacon or as a Morse code signal (see figure below) displayed radially
from just beyond the beacon.
Racon
Appearance of racon signal on the radar display
2-39
INDEX
This page is intentionally left blank.
2-40
3. PLOTTER OPERATION
3.1
Plotter Displays
You may show the plotter display over the entire screen, in the overlay screen with the
radar display, or in a combination screen.
3.1.1
Full-screen plotter display
Presentation mode
Nav data window
(North-up)
(Data changes with NAV soft
key setting and cursor
Trip distance
status. For details see next page.)
34° 22. 3456'N
080° 22. 3456'E
Scale
359.9°
19.9 kt
16.0nm
M
TRIP NU
99.9 nm
MARK
ENTRY
SI
M
MODE
NTH UP
Icon (from left)
North Marker
Chart
Alarm
Track Hold
Chart Offset
Save
L/L Offset
Battery
Simulation
(See icon
table on
appendix
for details.)
NAV
POS
002WP
Functions for
soft keys
D. BOX
ON/ OFF
FISH
BRIDGE
Waypoint name
Own ship
marker
Course bar
Waypoint marker
Own ship
track
Full-screen plotter display
Note: When GPS signal error is found, the following occurs depending on the device
feeding position data:
GPS Receiver GP-310B/320B: Alarm icon ( ) appears and the aural alarm sounds. Own
ship marker blinks faster.
Other navigator: The message “NO GPS FIX” appears and is accompanied by the aural
alarm and alarm icon. If the GPS signal is missing for more than 90 seconds, the message
“NO POSITION DATA” appears.
Nav data window
The data shown in the nav data window depends on the status of the NAV soft key and the
cursor.
3-1
3. PLOTTER OPERATION
Presentation
Mode
Latitude and longitude
of cursor intersection
Latitude, Longitude
Bearing to Cursor
34°24. 3456'N
+ 124°24.
3456'W
359. 9° M
59.9nm
Cursor Mark
TRIP
99. 9nm
NU
Trip Distance
Range to
Cursor
Presentation
Mode
Waypoint data
(waypoint selected
with cursor)
Waypoint Name
Bearing to Waypoint
001WPT
Waypoint Mark
Course
359. 9° M 359. 9° M TRIP
NU
19. 9nm 19. 9kt 99. 9nm
Range to Waypoint
Speed
Trip Distance
Presentation
Mode
Own ship
position
NAV
POS
soft key
Latitude, Longitude
Course
34°24. 3456'N
124°24. 3456'W
Own Ship Mark
359. 9°M
19. 9kt
TRIP
99. 9nm
Speed
NU
Trip Distance
Time-to-Go
to Destination
Destination NAV
WPT
waypoint
data
soft key
Waypoint Name
Bearing to Waypoint
001WPT
Waypoint Mark
359. 9° M TTG4D02H23M
19. 9nm ETA1st 13:45
Range to Waypoint
NU
Presentation
Mode
Estimated Time of
Arrival
Presentation
Mode
Own ship NAV
speed and S/C
course
soft key
Turns off NAV
nav data OFF
window soft key
Course, Speed
CSE 359. 9° M
SOG 19. 9kt
Bearing to Waypoint
BRG
RNG
359. 9 ° M
99. 9nm
Range
to
Waypoint
TMP
DPT
79. 9°F
345 ft
Water Temp.*, * Requires appropriate
Depth*
sensor.
Contents of nav data window
3-2
NU
3. PLOTTER OPERATION
3.1.2
Nav graphic display
The nav graphic display shows the compass display or the wind display depending on the
setting of GRAPHIC METER in the NAV GRAPHIC DISPLAY SETUP menu. For further
details see paragraph 7.10.
Compass display
The compass display, shown in combination displays, provides steering information. The
compass rose shows two triangles: the red triangle shows own ship’s course and the black
triangle, which moves with ship’s course, shows the bearing to destination waypoint.
The water temperature and depth graphs, which require appropriate sensors, show the
latest 10 minutes of water temperature and depth data. The range of the depth graph is 50
feet and it is automatically adjusted with depth. You may adjust the update interval for these
graphs on the NAV GRAPHIC DISPLAY SETUP menu.
Destination
waypoint
Speed over ground
Range to destination waypoint
Speed through water
003WPT
Time-to-go
to destination
Destination
waypoint bearing
(black and filled
TTG
RNG 9 9 . 9 n m
SOG 10.0kt STW 10.0 kt
0D 9H 59M
ETA
BRG
3 5 9 . 9 °M
DPT
45.2ft
0
on color model,
w
hollow on monochrome model)
Depth
graph*
50
* = Requires appropriate
sensor.
Shown (in red on
color model) when
direction to steer
is "left."
Bearing scale
TMP
1 6 . 2 °F
20
N
Estimated time of
arrival at destination
Ship's course
(red and filled on
color model, filled
on monochrome model)
E
CSE
3 5 9 . 9 °M
23th23:59
Water
temperature
graph*
10
Direction to steer
(green on color model)
Own ship marker
(For color model, black when within XTE range,
yellow when over; flashes when over XTE range
on monochrome model)
XTE monitor (See next page for description.)
Compass display
3-3
3. PLOTTER OPERATION
Reading the XTE (cross-track error) monitor
The XTE monitor, located below the compass rose, shows the distance you are off course
and the direction to steer to return to course. The own ship marker moves according to
direction and distance off course. It is shown in black when the amount of cross-track error
is within the XTE monitor range and yellow when it is over. An arrow appears at the right or
left side of the XTE monitor and it shows the direction to steer to return to intended course.
It is shown in red when you should steer left, and green when you should steer right. In the
example on the previous page you would steer right to return to course. To maintain course,
steer the vessel so the own ship marker stays at the center of the XTE monitor.
Soft keys
You can show the soft keys for the compass display by pressing the HIDE/SHOW key.
EDIT XT-LMT: Sets the range for XTE monitor scale. See the procedure below for how to
set.
RESET XTE: This soft key may be operated to restart navigation, when a destination is set.
Press the EDIT XT-LMT soft key followed by the RESET XTE soft key. The following
message is displayed.
RESTART NAVGATION TO
CURRENT WPT.
ARE YOU SURE?
YES ... PUSH ENTER KNOB
NO ... PUSH CLEAR KEY
Setting the range for the XTE monitor
1. With the compass (or highway) display shown, press the EDIT XT-LMT soft key to
display the following window.
XTE LIMIT
0 .1nm
XTE range setting window
2. Use the Cursor pad to select digit to change. Note that all digits may be cleared by
pressing the CLEAR key.
3. Enter value with the ENTER knob.
4. Push the ENTER knob to set, or press the CANCEL soft key to cancel.
3-4
3. PLOTTER OPERATION
Anemometer display
The anemometer display shows mostly the same data as the compass display. The wind
meter in the center of the display shows wind speed in the bow direction, in graphic and
analog forms.
QP<01>
TTG
RNG
SOG
*D *H *M
4259nm
20.0kt
STW
20.2kt
ETA
* *: *
WIND APPARENT
DPT
TMP
45° S
123ft
WIND SPEED
12.3 °C
12.3kt
Anemometer display
3-5
3. PLOTTER OPERATION
3.1.3
Highway display
The highway display, shown in combination displays, provides a graphic presentation of
ship’s track along intended course. It is useful for monitoring ship’s progress toward a
waypoint. The own ship marker shows the relation between ship and intended course. The
XTE monitor shows the direction and amount your vessel is off course – the arrow shows
the direction to steer to return to your course and the numeric the distance you are off
course. Using the figure below as an example, you would steer right 0.009 nm to return to
course. To maintain course, steer the vessel so the own ship marker stays aligned with the
intended course line.
Destination
waypoint
RNG
WPT001
Time-to-go
to destination
TTG
Range to destination waypoint
SOG
99.9 nm
10.0kt
STW
0D 9H 59M
ETA
Speed over ground,
speed through water
10.0 kt
23th23:59
WPT001
Estimated time of
arrival at destination
Destination
waypoint
Intended course
Own ship marker
0.9 nm
0.9 nm
0.009nm
Shown (in red) when
direction to steer
is "left."
XTE range
Direction to steer
(green)
XTE monitor
Highway display
Soft keys
You can show the soft keys for the highway display by pressing the HIDE/SHOW key.
HIWAY CNTRL: On the radar/plotter/compass combination display you can switch control
to the highway display by pressing the CNTRL soft key to show HIWAY.
EDIT XT-LMT: Sets the range for XTE monitor scale. See the procedure on the previous
page for how to set.
RESET XTE: This soft key may be operated to restart navigation, when a destination is set.
Press the EDIT XT-LMT soft key followed by the RESET XTE soft key. See the previous
page for details.
3-6
3. PLOTTER OPERATION
3.1.4
Nav data display
The nav data display provides comprehensive navigation data, and it is shown in a
three-screen combination display. The user may select what data to display and where to
display it. For details see the paragraph “7.8 Nav Data Display Setup.”
Appropriate sensors are required. Bars ( - -) appear when corresponding sensor is not
connected.
Position
POSITION
34° 34. 5678' N
120° 34. 5678' W
WPT POSITION
34° 14. 5678' N
120° 14. 5678' W
SOG
STW
COURSE
10.0
kt
BEARING
10.0
101.6°
kt
M
RANGE
9.2°
M
1324.1
ft
DEPTH
0.18
nm
TEMP
18.2 °C
Water temperature
Depth
Range to
Bearing to
waypoint
Waypoint
Course
Speed through
water
Waypoint
Speed over ground
Position
Nav data displays
3-7
3. PLOTTER OPERATION
3.2
Presentation Mode
Three types of presentation modes are provided for the plotter display: north-up, course-up
and auto course-up. To change the presentation mode, press the HIDE/SHOW key followed
by the MODE soft key. Each press of the key changes the presentation mode and
presentation mode indication (top right-hand corner of the screen) cyclically in the sequence
of North-up, Course-up and Auto course-up.
For C-map model, the sequence is North-up, Perspective, Course-up and Auto course-up
when PERSPECTIVE DISPLAY is set to ON, on the CHART DETAILS menu. (See Chapter
7.)
North-up
North (zero degree) is at the top of the display and own ship is shown with a filled circle.
This mode is useful for long-range navigation.
Course-up
34° 22. 3456'N
080° 22. 3456'E
The course-up mode is useful for monitoring
ship’s progress towards a waypoint. The
destination is at the top of the screen when a
destination is set. When no destination is set,
the course or heading is at the top of the screen
at the moment the course-up mode is selected.
A filled triangle marks own ship’s position.
Note: The data sentences GGA and VTG must
be output from the NavNet display unit
connected to the GPS navigator in order to
correctly orient the own ship marker in the
course-up mode on other NavNet display units.
359.9°
19.9 kt
NU
99.9 nm
TRIP
16.0nm
MARK
ENTRY
MODE
NTH UP
NAV
POS
WP-002
FISH
D.BOX
ON/ OFF
BRIDGE
North-up
+
34° 22. 3456'N
080° 22. 3456'E
16.0nm
359.9°
19.9 kt
M
MARK
ENTRY
MODE
CSE UP
Auto course-up
The course is at the top of screen at the moment
the auto course-up mode is selected. In this
mode, the current course is kept at the top of the
screen when the change is within 22.5 degrees.
For example, if your vessel turns larger than
22.5 degrees to port or starboard, the chart
display will rotate so that your course is pointing
towards the top of the screen again. A filled
triangle marks own ship’s position.
TRIP CU
99.9 nm
WPT 001
CENTER
GO TO
CURSOR
D. BOX
ON/ OFF
Course-up
+
34° 22. 3456'N
080° 22. 3456'E
16.0 nm
359.9°
19.9 kt
CU
99.9 nm
M TRIP
MARK
ENTRY
MODE
AT CU
CENTER
Perspective (C-map only)
Chart data is projected in perspective mode, for 3D
simulation, during navigation.
3-8
GOTO
CURSOR
D. BOX
ON/ OFF
Auto course-up
3. PLOTTER OPERATION
3.3
Shifting the Display
The plotter display can be shifted as below.
1. Use the Cursor pad to locate the cursor at a screen edge. The screen shifts in the
direction opposite of cursor location.
2. To turn off the cursor, press the CENTER soft key. This also returns the own ship
marker to the screen center.
3.4
Chart Scale
Chart scale (range) may be selected with the [RANGE -] or [RANGE +] key. The [-] key
shrinks the chart range (image is expanded); the [+] key expands the cart range (image is
shrunk). The available ranges are as below.
Charts scales
nm
km
sm
0.125
0.23
0.144
0.25
0.46
0.29
0.5
0.93
0.58
1
1.85
1.15
2
3.70
2.30
4
7.41
4.60
3.5
Chart Cards
3.5.1
Chart card overview
8
14.8
9.21
Your system reads NAVIONICS GOLD or
C-MAP NT MAX charts, depending on the
type of display unit you have.
When you insert a suitable chart card in
the slot and own ship is near any
cartographic object, a chart appears. If a
wrong card is inserted or a wrong chart
scale is selected, landmasses will appear
hollow. Chart icons appear at the top of the
display to help you select a suitable chart
scale. The table below shows the chart
icons and their meanings.
16
29.6
18.4
32
59.3
36.8
Icon
64
119
73.7
128
237
147
256
474
295
512
948
589
1024
1896
1178
2048
3792
2356
Meaning
Chart scale is too large.
Operate the RANGE key to
adjust chart scale.
Suitable chart scale is
selected.
Chart icons and their meanings
3-9
3. PLOTTER OPERATION
3.5.2
Indices and chart enlargement
When the RANGE key is operated, you will see several frames appear on the chart. These
frames are called indices and they show you what parts of the chart can be enlarged in the
current range.
Sample chart (Japan), showing indices
When a chart cannot be displayed:
A chart will not be displayed in the following conditions:
•
When the chart scale is too large or too small.
•
When scrolling the chart outside the indices.
•
When this happens, select proper chart scale.
Note: Indices can be turned on or off. For further details see “Chart border line” on page
7-15 for NAVIONICS charts and page 7-19 for C-MAP charts.
3-10
3. PLOTTER OPERATION
3.5.3
Navionics charts
Data for aids to navigation
Selected Navionics charts can show buoy and lighthouse data. Simply place the cursor on
the lighthouse or buoy mark.
Lighthouse Buoy
Place the cursor on
a lighthouse or buoy mark.
Lighthouse mark
Port service icons
Selected Navionics GOLD charts show services available at ports, with icons.
1. Use the Cursor pad to place the cursor on the sailboat icon (denotes a port or harbor)
desired.
2. Push the ENTER knob.
3. Roll the Cursor pad horizontally to select icon desired at the top of the display. The
services available appear directly below the icon selected.
4. Press the RETURN soft key to finish.
Detailed information of service
selected
List of services
at the port selected
+
34° 22. 3456'N
080° 22. 3456'E
359.9°M TRIP NU
19.9 kt
99.9 nm
FIRST AID
Emergency
medical service
Fueling station
Water
supply station
Traveler's
service station
Customer
service station
Marine
equipment service
16.0nm
CANCEL
Sailboat icon (Port)
Port
Information center
Plotter display, showing port service display
3-11
3. PLOTTER OPERATION
Current (or tide) data
Some Navionics GOLD charts provide for
calculation of the current (or tide) data for any
date. Additionally it displays the time of sunrise
and sunset, moon shape (on current data.)
34 24. 3456 N 359.9
+Time:
12404:35
24. 3456 W 59.9kt
0.86
Speed (KT): 0.45ft
1. Use the Cursor pad to place the cursor on a
current icon ( T ).
2. Press the ENTER knob to show the current
window.
3. Press the DATE soft key, and then enter the
date desired.
4. Press the ENTER soft key.
NU
Current
024nm
0.74
Angle ( ): 142
0.61
21/08/02 +00
0.48
0.35
0
DATE
4 8 12 16 20 24
Max. Time Speed Aug. Slack
KT
AT
Flood 4:58 1.2
323 7:58
Ebb 23:15 1.2 323 20:15
Flood 17:15 1.1 145 15:15
Ebb 23:15 1.2 323 20:15
Moonphase: FULLY IN 1 DAY
Sunrise: 05:03 Moonrise: 14:06
Sunset: 19:10 Moonset: 02:15
RETURN
Current data display
Object information
You can see detailed information about a place selected by the cursor as below.
1. Use the Cursor pad to place the cursor on the location you desire to know more about.
2. Press the ENTER knob to show the OBJECT INFORMATION window.
34 24. 3456 N 359.9
+124
OBJECT
INFORMATION
24. 3456
W 59.9kt
BLOCK AND TACKLE
POSITION
BOATYARD
47 16.461'N
LAND AREA
122 25.153'W
DERDGED AREA
BRG. & RNG.
DEPTH AREA
NU
024nm
191 T
FIND
0.549nm
VALUE OF SOUNDING
WRECKS
62.2m
VERTICAL DATUM
MEAN SEA LEVEL
MOVE TRACKBALL <-/->)
RETURN
Object information window
When there are two or more pages, roll the Cursor pad rightward to show the next page.
FIND function
When the OBJECT INFORMATION window is shown, objects can be listed according to
their categories.
1. Press the FIND soft key with the OBJECT INFORMATION window shown.
3-12
3. PLOTTER OPERATION
34 24. 3456 N 359.9
+124
FIND ...
24. 3456
W 59.9kt
NU
024nm
ENTER
PORT LIST
PORT SERVICE
TIDE STATIONS
CURRENT STATIONS
OBSTRUCTION
ROCKS
WRECKS
CANCEL
FIND window
2. Operate the Cursor pad to choose the category to list, and then press the ENTER soft
key or ENTER knob.
Note: You can show the selected object on the plotter display by pressing the SHOW soft
key.
3-13
3. PLOTTER OPERATION
3.5.4
C-MAP charts
Cursor and data display
Besides its fundamental functions of providing position data, the cursor can also show
information about caution area, depth area, source of data, etc. on C-MAP charts. In
addition, you can display information about an icon by placing the cursor on it.
1. Move the Cursor pad to turn the cursor on.
2. Use the Cursor pad to place the cursor on the position desired.
3. Push the ENTER knob to open the Objects window.
Objects
Spot Sounding
Depth area
Exclusive economic zone
Military practice area
Restricted area
Source of data
Objects window
4. Use the Cursor pad to select the item desired.
5. Push the ENTER knob to display details for object selected.
Depth area
Depth range value1
0.00 Meters
Depth range value2
1829.00 Meters
Example of caution area window
6. Press the CANCEL soft key to close the window.
7. Press the CANCEL soft key to finish.
Icon data
You may place the cursor on any icon to find information about the selected icon.
1. For example, place the cursor on a lighthouse icon.
3-14
3. PLOTTER OPERATION
Place the cursor on a lighthouse icon.
+
34° 22. 3456'N
080° 22. 3456'E
359.9°M
TRIP NU
19.9 kt
99.9 nm
16.0nm
MARK
ENTRY
MODE
NTH UP
CENTER
GO TO
CURSOR
D. BOX
ON /OFF
Lighthouse icon
2. Push the ENTER knob to show data. For example, the following window appears for a
lighthouse.
Objects
Lighthouse
Tower
Light
Underwater Rock
Depth contour
Depth contour
Depth area
Source of data
Object windows
3. Use the Cursor pad to select the item desired.
4. Push the ENTER knob to display detailed information.
Navigation mark, fixed
Light.
Color
white
Height
7. 00 Meters
Light characteristic
occulting
XXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXX
Sample lighthouse data
5. If necessary, move the Cursor pad downward or upward to scroll the window.
6. Press the CANCEL soft key twice to finish.
3-15
3. PLOTTER OPERATION
Tide information
The C-MAP NT chart card provides for calculation of the tide heights for any date.
Additionally it displays the times of sunrise and sunset.
1. Use the Cursor pad to place the cursor on a Tide icon (
2. Push the ENTER knob to open the Objects window.
T
).
OBJECTS
Tide height
Cartographic area
Source of data
Objects window
3. Use the Cursor pad to select Tide height.
4. Push the ENTER knob to open the TIDE window.
Objects
Port area
Port/Marine
Fuel station
Water
Electricity
Showers
Pubric toilets
Pubric telephone
Horizontal
Cursor
Vertical
Cursor
34 24. 3456 N 359.9
+Time:
124 04:35
24. 3456 W 59.9kt
0.86
Height: 0.45ft
Draught: 0.65ft
28/10/98 -05
43° 32.860N
010° 18.022E
NU
TIDE
024nm
0.74
DATE
0.61
0.48
0.35
0
4 8 12 16 20 24
Port information
LIVORNO (LEGHORN)
High Water(max) 0.86ft(13:30 L)
Low Water(min) 0.35ft(21:00 L)
Sunrise 07:52L
Sunset 16:53 L
CANCEL
Tide window
5. Press the DATE soft key to open the DATE window.
6. Use the Cursor pad to position the cursor where
desired, then enter date with the ENTER knob.
Repeat to enter complete date.
7. Push the ENTER knob to show the tidal graph for
entered date.
8. Use the Cursor pad to locate the vertical cursor on
the hour desired.
9. Use the Cursor pad to shift the horizontal cursor to
select draught.
10. See the time, height and draught indications in left of the
tide graph for tide information.
11. Press the CANCEL soft key twice to close the TIDE
window.
3-16
CHANGE DATE
(DAY. MONTH. YEAR)
2 8. 03. 2005
LIMIT: 31.12.2099
C-map, port service display
3. PLOTTER OPERATION
Port service icons
Selected C-MAP shows services available at ports, with lists.
1. Use the Cursor pad to place the cursor on the sailboat
icon (denotes a port or harbor) desired.
2. Push the ENTER knob.
The services available appear.
3. Press the CANCEL soft key.
Note: When “Port/Marine” is selected, you can show a
picture of the port selected, provided such data is available
on the chart card.
Objects
Port area
Port/Marine
Fuel station
Water
Electricity
Showers
Public toilets
Public telephone
FIND function
When the Objects window is shown, objects can be listed according to their categories.
1. Press the FIND soft key with the Object window.
2. Operate the Cursor pad to choose the category to list, and then press the ENTER soft
key or ENTER knob.
A list appears.
3. Press the CANCEL key twice to finish.
3-17
3. PLOTTER OPERATION
3.6
Working with Track
Your ship’s track is plotted on the screen using navigation data fed from position-fixing
equipment. This section shows you what you can do with track, from turning it on or off to
changing its plotting interval. In the default setting, own ship’s track is turned on and is
displayed in red.
3.6.1
Displaying track
Own ship track
1. Press the MENU key followed by the CHART SETUP and TRACKS & MARKS
CONTROL soft keys to open the TRACK CONTROL menu.
OWN SHIP TRACK DISP
ON
OWN SHIP TRACK COLOR
RED
TARGET TRACK DISPLAY
OFF
TARGET TRACK COLOR
WHITE
INTERVAL
TIME
TIME INTERVAL
00m10s
DISTANCE INTERVAL
00.10nm
MEMORY(TRACK & MARK)
2000POINTS
(MARK MEMORY)
(6000)POINTS
TRACK
CONTROL
EDIT
TRACK
RESUME
ERASE
T&M
MARK
SETUP
RETURN
SHIP’S TRACK STATUS
TRACKING
TRACK: 1234/2000
MARK :
9/6000
Track control menu
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Use the Cursor pad to select OWN SHIP TRACK DISP.
Press the EDIT soft key to show the track display window.
Use the Cursor pad to select ON (default setting) or OFF as appropriate.
Press the ENTER soft key.
Press the MENU key to close the menu.
Note: The number of track and mark points used appears at the SHIP’S TRACK STATUS
window on the TRACK CONTROL menu. Using the figure above as an example, 1234
points of track and 9 marks have been recorded.
Target track
Target track, NMEA format TTM (Tracked Target Message) data sentence, may be turned
on or off as desired. The default setting is ON.
1. Press the MENU key followed by the CHART SETUP and TRACKS & MARKS
CONTROL soft keys to open the TRACK CONTROL menu.
2. Use the Cursor pad to select TARGET TRACK DISPLAY.
3. Press the EDIT soft key to show the target track display window.
3-18
3. PLOTTER OPERATION
4. Use the Cursor pad to select one of the following:
ON or OFF (no ARP or AIS): Turn on or off target tracks
ARP ONLY (ARP equipped): Show only ARP tracks.
AIS ONLY (AIS equipped): Show only AIS tracks.
BOTH: Show both ARP and AIS tracks.
5. Press the ENTER soft key.
6. Press the MENU key to close the menu.
3.6.2
Stopping, restarting plotting of own ship track
When your boat is at anchor or returning to port you probably won’t need to record its track.
You can stop recording the track, to conserve the track memory, as follows:
1. Press the MENU key followed by the CHART SETUP and TRACKS & MARKS
CONTROL soft keys to open the TRACK CONTROL menu.
TRACK
CONTROL
▲
▲
OWN SHIP TRACK DISP
ON
OWN SHIP TRACK COLOR
RED
TARGET TRACK DISPLAY
OFF
TARGET TRACK COLOR
WHITE
INTERVAL
TIME
TIME INTERVAL
00m10s
DISTANCE INTERVAL
00.10nm
MEMORY(TRACK & MARK)
2000POINTS
(MARK MEMORY)
(6000)POINTS
EDIT
TRACK
RESUME
TRACK
RESUME
ERASE
T&M
TRACK
HALT
MARK
SETUP
RETURN
OWN SHIP TRACK DISP
ON
OWN SHIP TRACK COLOR
RED
TARGET TRACK DISPLAY
OFF
TARGET TRACK COLOR
WHITE
INTERVAL
TIME
TIME INTERVAL
00m10s
DISTANCE INTERVAL
00.10nm
MEMORY(TRACK & MARK)
2000POINTS
(MARK MEMORY)
(6000)POINTS
SHIP’S TRACK STATUS
TRACKING
TRACK: 1234/2000
MARK :
9/6000
SHIP’S TRACK STATUS
NOT TRACKING
TRACK: 1234/2000
MARK :
9/6000
Track is plotted
Track not plotted
TRACK
CONTROL
EDIT
TRACK
HALT
ERASE
T&M
MARK
SETUP
RETURN
Track control menu
2. Press the TRACK RESUME soft key. The soft key now shows “TRACK HALT” and the
indication “TRACKING” in the SHIP’S TRACK STATUS window changes to “NOT
TRACKING.” In addition, the icon “H” is displayed at the top of the plotter display and
own ship marker becomes a hollow circle. To restart plotting the track, press the TRACK
HALT soft key
3. Press the MENU key to close the menu.
3.6.3
Changing track color
Track can be displayed in red (default setting), yellow, green, light-blue, purple, blue and
white. It can be useful to change track color on a regular basis to discriminate between
previous day’s track, etc.
3-19
3. PLOTTER OPERATION
Own ship’s track
1. Press the MENU key followed by the CHART SETUP and TRACKS & MARKS
CONTROL soft keys to open the TRACK CONTROL menu.
2. Use the Cursor pad to select OWN SHIP TRACK COLOR.
3. Press the EDIT soft key to display the track color window.
TRACK COLOR
▲
¤ RED
¡ YELLOW
¡ GREEN
¡ LIGHT BLUE
¡ PURPLE
¡ BLUE
¡ WHITE
▼
Own ship track color window
4. Use the Cursor pad to select the color desired.
5. Press the ENTER soft key.
6. Press the MENU key to close the menu.
Target track
Like own ship’s track, target tracks can be displayed in red, yellow, green, light-blue, purple,
blue and white (default setting).
1. Press the MENU key followed by the CHART SETUP and TRACKS & MARKS
CONTROL soft keys to open the TRACK CONTROL menu.
2. Use the Cursor pad to select TARGET TRACK COLOR.
3. Press the EDIT soft key to display the track color window.
4. Use the Cursor pad to select the color desired.
5. Press the ENTER soft key.
6. Press the MENU key to close the menu.
3.6.4
Track plotting method and interval for own ship track
In drawing the own ship track, first the ship’s position fed from position-fixing equipment is
stored into the unit’s memory at an interval of time or distance. A shorter interval provides
for better reconstruction of the track, but the storage time of the track is reduced. When the
track memory becomes full, the oldest track is erased to make room for the latest.
Track plotting method
Track may be plotted by time or distance. The default setting is “time.”
1. Press the MENU key followed by the CHART SETUP and TRACKS & MARKS
CONTROL soft keys to open the TRACK CONTROL menu.
2. Use the Cursor pad to select INTERVAL.
3. Press the EDIT soft key to display the plot window.
3-20
3. PLOTTER OPERATION
INTERVAL
▲
¤ TIME
¡ DISTANCE
▼
Interval window
4. Use the Cursor pad to select TIME or DISTANCE as appropriate. Distance is useful for
conserving track memory, since no track is recorded when the boat is stationary.
5. Press the ENTER soft key.
6. Press the MENU key to close the menu.
Track plotting interval
1. Press the MENU key followed by the CHART SETUP and TRACKS & MARKS
CONTROL soft keys to open the TRACK CONTROL menu.
2. Use the Cursor pad to select TIME INTERVAL or DISTANCE INTERVAL as
appropriate.
3. Press the EDIT soft key to display the time or distance interval window, depending on
what you selected at step 2.
TIME INTERVAL
Setting range: 0 min 1 sec (continuous) - 99 min 59 sec
Default setting: 10 sec
00m10s
(When selecting TIME INTERVAL.)
DISTANCE INTERVAL
Setting range: 0.00 nm (continuous) - 99.99 nm (km, sm)
Default setting: 0.1 nm
00.10nm
(When selecting DISTANCE INTERVAL.)
Interval windows
4. Use the Cursor pad to select digit and enter value with the ENTER knob. The CLEAR
soft key functions to clear an entire line of data.
5. Push the ENTER knob or ENTER soft key.
6. Press the MENU key to close the menu.
3.6.5
Changing own ship track/mark distribution setting
The equipment stores a total of 8000 points of track and marks. This amount may be
distributed as desired, and the default setting is 2000 points of track and 6000 points for
marks.
When you change the track memory setting, all tracks and marks in the memory are erased.
If necessary save the data to a memory card. For further details see the paragraph “6.1.2
Saving data to a memory card.”
1. Press the MENU key followed by the CHART SETUP and TRACKS & MARKS
CONTROL soft keys to open the TRACK CONTROL menu.
2. Use the Cursor pad to select MEMORY (TRACK & MARK).
3-21
3. PLOTTER OPERATION
3. Press the EDIT soft key to display the track memory window.
TRACK MEMORY
2000/8000 POINTS
Track memory window
4. Use the Cursor pad to select digit and use the ENTER knob to enter value.
5. Push the ENTER soft key or the ENTER knob. You are asked if you are sure to change
the track memory capacity.
6. Push the ENTER knob.
7. Press the MENU key to close the menu.
3.6.6
Erasing track
This paragraph shows you how to erase own ship’s track and target tracks. You can erase
ship’s track three ways: collectively, by color and by area.
Erasing own ship track by area
You can erase own ship’s track by area as below. This feature is not available when the
overlay mode is in use.
1. Press the MENU key followed by the CHART SETUP, TRACKS & MARKS CONTROL
and ERASE T & M soft keys to show the ERASE menu.
ERASE ALL TRACKS
ERASE TRACKS BY AREA
ERASE
EDIT
ERASE TRACKS BY COLOR
ERASE TARGET TRACKS
ERASE ALL MARKS/LINES
ERASE MARKS BY AREA
RETURN
SHIP’S TRACK STATUS
TRACKING
TRACK: 1234/2000
MARK :
9/6000
Erase menu
2. Use the Cursor pad to select ERASE TRACKS BY AREA, then press the EDIT soft key.
The menu is erased and the plotter display appears.
3. Use the Cursor pad to place the cursor at the top left-hand corner of the area which you
want to ease track from.
4. Press the START soft key or the ENTER knob.
3-22
3. PLOTTER OPERATION
5. Move the cursor to the bottom right-hand corner of the area which you want to ease
track from.
6. Press the END soft key or the ENTER knob. You are asked if you are sure to delete the
track.
7. Push the ENTER knob to delete the track selected.
8. Press the MENU key twice to close the menu.
Erasing own ship track by color
You may erase own ship’s track by color as follows:
1. Press the MENU key followed by the CHART SETUP, TRACKS & MARKS CONTROL
and ERASE T & M soft keys to show the ERASE menu.
2. Use the Cursor pad to select ERASE TRACKS BY COLOR, then press the EDIT soft
key.
ERASE TRK BY COLOR
▲
¤ RED
¡ YELLOW
¡ GREEN
¡ LIGHT BLUE
¡ PURPLE
¡ BLUE
¡ WHITE
▼
Erase track by color window
3. Use the Cursor pad to select the color you want to erase, then push the ENTER knob.
4. Push the ENTER knob to erase the track color selected.
Press the MENU key twice to close the menu.
Erasing all own ship track
1. Press the MENU key followed by the CHART SETUP, TRACKS & MARKS CONTROL
and ERASE T & M soft keys to show the ERASE menu.
2. Use the Cursor pad to select ERASE ALL TRACKS, then press the EDIT soft key.
3. Push the ENTER knob to erase all own ship track.
Press the MENU key twice to close the menu.
Erasing all target tracks
1. Press the MENU key followed by the CHART SETUP, TRACKS & MARKS CONTROL
and ERASE T & M soft keys to show the ERASE menu.
2. Use the Cursor pad to select ERASE TARGET TRACKS, then press the EDIT soft key.
3. Push the ENTER knob to erase all target tracks.
4. Press the MENU key twice to close the menu.
3-23
3. PLOTTER OPERATION
3.7
Marks, Lines
Marks are useful for denoting important points such as a good fishing spot. Marks can be
inscribed in seven shapes and seven colors: Red, yellow, green, light-blue, purple, blue and
white.
¡
3.7.1
✕
Entering a mark, line
1. Place the cursor where you want a mark to appear.
2. Press the SHOW/HIDE key (if necessary) followed by the MARK ENTRY soft key.
The mark is inscribed in the size, color and shape selected on the mark & line menu. The
default mark attributes are size, large; color, yellow, and shape, hollow circle (○).
3.7.2
Changing mark attributes
You can select the shape, size and color for marks on the MARKS & LINES menu.
1. Press the MENU key to show the menu.
2. Press the CHART SETUP, TRACKS & MARKS CONTROL and MARK SETUP soft keys
to show the MARKS & LINES menu.
MARKS/LINES COLOR
YELLOW
MARKS SHAPE
¡
LINES STYLE
.
MARKS &
LINES
EDIT
MARKS SIZE
LARGE
SHIP’S TRACK STATUS
TRACKING
TRACK: 1234/2000
MARK :
9/6000
RETURN
Marks & lines menu
3.
4.
5.
6.
Select MARKS/LINES COLOR, then press the EDIT soft key.
Use the Cursor pad to choose color desired (default setting: yellow).
Press the ENTER soft key.
Select MARKS SHAPE, then press the EDIT soft key.
3-24
3. PLOTTER OPERATION
MARKS SHAPE
▲
¤ ¡
¡
¡
¡ ✕
¡
¡
¡
▼
Marks shape window
7. Use the Cursor pad to select mark shape desired, then press the ENTER soft key.
8. Select MARKS SIZE, then press the EDIT soft key.
9. Use the Cursor pad to select LARGE (default setting) or SMALL as appropriate.
10. Press the ENTER soft key.
11. Press the MENU key twice to close the menu.
3.7.3
Selecting line type
You may inscribe lines to denote good fishing spots, areas of special interest, etc. You can
even construct simple charts.
1. Press the MENU key followed by the CHART SETUP, TRACKS & MARKS CONTROL
and MARK SETUP soft keys to show the MARKS & LINES menu.
MARKS/LINES COLOR
YELLOW
MARKS SHAPE
¡
LINES STYLE
.
MARKS &
LINES
EDIT
MARKS SIZE
LARGE
SHIP’S TRACK STATUS
TRACKING
TRACK: 1234/2000
MARK :
9/6000
RETURN
Marks & lines menu
2. Select LINES STYLE, then press the EDIT soft key.
LINES STYLE
▲
¤
¡
¡
¡
- - - -
▼
Lines style window
3-25
3. PLOTTER OPERATION
3. Use the Cursor pad to select line style desired, then press the ENTER soft key. The
line style “dot” disables line drawing. Edge of lines is determined by mark shape. For
example, selecting the circle shape will join lines with a circle.
4. Press the MENU key twice to close the menu.
3.7.4
Erasing marks, lines
Erasing an individual mark
1. Operate the Cursor pad to place the cursor on the mark you want to erase.
2. Press the CLEAR key to erase the mark.
Erasing an individual line
Place the cursor on an end of the line to erase, then press the CLEAR key. Placing the
cursor at the intersecting point of two line segments will erase both line segments.
Erasing marks, lines by area
This feature is not available when the overlay mode is in use.
1. Press the MENU key followed by the CHART SETUP, TRACKS & MARKS CONTROL
and ERASE T & M soft keys to show the ERASE menu.
2. Use the Cursor pad to select ERASE MARKS BY AREA, then press the EDIT soft key.
The menu is erased and the plotter display appears.
3. Use the Cursor pad to place the cursor at the top left-hand corner of the area which you
want to erase marks and lines from.
4. Press the START soft key or the ENTER knob.
5. Move the cursor to the bottom right-hand corner of the area which you want to erase
marks and lines from.
6. Press the END soft key or the ENTER knob. You are asked if you are sure to delete the
marks/lines selected. Press the ENTER knob to delete.
7. Press the MENU key twice to close the menu.
Erasing all marks, lines
You can erase all marks and lines collectively. Be absolutely sure you want to erase all
marks and lines - erased marks and lines cannot be restored.
1. Press the MENU key followed by the CHART SETUP, TRACKS & MARKS CONTROL
and ERASE T & M soft keys to show the ERASE menu.
2. Use the Cursor pad to select ERASE ALL MARKS/LINES, then press the EDIT soft
key.
3. Push the ENTER knob to erase all marks and lines.
4. Press the MENU key twice to close the menu.
3-26
3. PLOTTER OPERATION
3.8
Waypoints
In navigation terminology, a waypoint is a particular location on a voyage whether it be a
starting, intermediate or destination point. A waypoint is the simplest piece of information
your equipment requires to get you to a destination, in the shortest distance possible.
This unit has 999 waypoints into which you can enter position information. You may enter a
waypoint five ways: at own ship position, at MOB position (see page 1-13 for details), by
cursor, by range and bearing, and through the waypoint list (manual input of latitude and
longitude).
3.8.1
Entering waypoints
Entering a waypoint at own ship position
Press the SAVE/MOB key momentarily to store your position as a waypoint. This new
waypoint is saved to the waypoint list, under the youngest empty waypoint number.
Entering a waypoint with the cursor
1. Press the MENU key to open the menu.
2. Press the WAYPOINTS/ROUTES, WAYPOINTS and WAYPOINT BY CURSOR soft
keys. The plotter display appears.
3. Operate the Cursor pad to place the cursor where you want to enter a waypoint.
4. Press the NEW WPT soft key. The waypoint window appears and it shows waypoint
mark shape, waypoint name, comment (default: time and date), position of waypoint and
proximity alarm radius.
NEW
WPT
MARK NAME
▲
0 0 1 W 359.9°
PT
34°44.000'N
135°21.000'W
0.00nm
COMMENT
SELECT
MARK
002WPT
02:36 01JAN01
COORD
TYPE
POSITION
34°44.000'N
L135°21.000'W
AT
N < - -> S
E < - -> W
00:00 01JAN00
LON
359.9°
0.00nm
34° 12. 134'N
003WPT
00:00 01JAN00
134° 12. 345'W
34°44.000'N
135°21.000'W
SAVE
359.9°
0.00nm
RETURN
PROXIMITY ALARM RADIUS
0. 00nm
Waypoint window
5. If you do not need to change the waypoint data, press the SAVE soft key to register
the waypoint. The steps which follow show you how to change waypoint data.
6. Press the SELECT MARK soft key.
7. Press the MARK SHAPE soft key to open the mark shape selection window.
3-27
3. PLOTTER OPERATION
SELECT MARK
Waypoint mark shape selection window
8. Operate the Cursor pad to select shape desired.
9. Press the ENTER soft key.
10. Press the SELECT MARK and MARK COLOR soft keys in that order to open the
waypoint mark color selection window. Select the color desired, then press the ENTER
soft key.
SELECT COLOR
▲
¤ RED
¡ YELLOW
¡ GREEN
¡ LIGHT BLUE
¡ PURPLE
¡ BLUE
¡ WHITE
▼
Waypoint mark color selection window
Note: You cannot change the shape and color of a waypoint when the proximity alarm
radius for it is other than “zero.” To change shape or color, enter all zeroes as the
proximity alarm radius.
11. You can change the name (6 characters), comment (13 characters), L/L position and the
proximity alarm radius for a waypoint as follows:
Use the Cursor pad to select the NAME, COMMENT, position box or PROXIMITY ALARM
RADIUS field. (“Proximity alarm radius” provides for audio and visual alarms when your
boat nears a waypoint by the distance specified. The proximity alarm must be turned on
in the ALARM menu to use this feature. For details see the paragraph 3.11.6.)
Use the Cursor pad to select location.
Enter appropriate alphanumeric character with the ENTER knob.
12. Press the SAVE soft key to register the waypoint.
13. Enter another waypoint, or press the MENU key to close the menu.
3-28
3. PLOTTER OPERATION
Entering a waypoint by range and bearing
This method is useful when you want to enter a waypoint using range and bearing to a
target found on a radar.
1. Press the MENU key to open the menu.
2. Press the WAYPOINTS/ROUTES, WAYPOINTS and WAYPOINT BY RNG & BRG soft
keys.
3. A red “X” appears at own ship position, and it is the origin point for range and bearing.
Operate the Cursor pad to place the cursor on the location desired. Range and bearing
from own ship to the cursor appear at the top of the display.
Note: The origin point of range and bearing can be shifted to the location desired.
Operate the Cursor pad to select location, then press the START POINT soft key.
4. Press the NEW WPT soft key. The waypoint window appears and it shows mark shape,
waypoint name, comment (default: date and time), position of waypoint and proximity
alarm radius.
NEW
WPT
MARK NAME
▲
0 0 1 W 359.9°
PT
34°44.000'N
135°21.000'W
0.00nm
COMMENT
SELECT
MARK
002WPT
02:36 01JAN01
COORD
TYPE
POSITION
34°44.000'N
L135°21.000'W
AT
N < - -> S
E < - -> W
00:00 01JAN00
LON
359.9°
0.00nm
34° 12. 134'N
003WPT
00:00 01JAN00
134° 12. 345'W
34°44.000'N
135°21.000'W
SAVE
359.9°
0.00nm
RETURN
PROXIMITY ALARM RADIUS
0. 00nm
Waypoint window
5. If necessary, change waypoint data following the instructions from step 6 through 11 in
“Entering a waypoint with the cursor” on page 3-28.
6. Press the SAVE soft key to register the waypoint.
7. Enter another waypoint as above, or press the MENU key to finish.
Entering a waypoint from the waypoint list
You can manually enter waypoint position from the waypoint list as follows:
1. Press the MENU key to open the menu.
2. Press the WAYPOINTS/ROUTES and WAYPOINTS soft keys.
3. Press the LOCAL LIST (lists waypoints in order from nearest to furthest, maximum 32
points) or ALPHANUMERIC LIST (lists waypoints in ALPHANUMERIC order) soft key.
3-29
3. PLOTTER OPERATION
WPT
ALPHA
35°47.010'N
135°21.000'W
350.9°
3.80 nm
CRAB
00:00 01JAN01
34°42.000'N
135°21.050'W
050.9°
1.98 nm
065.9°
1.83 nm
LOBSTER
00:00 01JAN01
38°44.300'N
135°21.010'W
GOTO
NEW
WPT
FISH
00:00 01JAN01
34°41.000'N
135°21.030'W
WPT
LOCAL
▲
▲
▲
ABALONE
00:00 01JAN01
144.9°
4.93nm
EDIT
WPT
ERASE
WPT
RETURN
FISH
00:00 01JAN01
34°41.000'N
135°21.030'W
065.9°
1.83 nm
CRAB
00:00 01JAN01
34°42.000'N
135°21.050'W
050.9°
1.98 nm
ABALONE
00:00 01JAN01
35°47.010'N
135°21.000'W
350.9°
3.80 nm
LOBSTER
00:00 01JAN01
38°44.300'N
135°21.010'W
144.9°
4.93nm
GOTO
NEW
WPT
EDIT
WPT
ERASE
WPT
RETURN
PUSH ENTER KNOB TO
SEARCH FOR
---
Alphanumeric waypoint list
Local waypoint list
Alphanumeric and local waypoint lists
4. Press the NEW WPT soft key to show the waypoint window (see the figure on the
previous page). Own ship position is shown in the position box.
5. Select the position box and enter position desired.
6. If desired, change waypoint data following the instructions from step 6 in “Entering a
waypoint with the cursor” on page 3-28.
7. Press the SAVE soft key to register the waypoint.
8. Press the MENU key to close the menu.
3.8.2
Editing waypoint data
Waypoint data may be edited from the waypoint list or directly from the plotter display.
Editing waypoint data from the waypoint list
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Press the MENU key to open the menu.
Press the WAYPOINTS/ROUTES and WAYPOINTS soft keys.
Press the LOCAL LIST or ALPHANUMERIC LIST soft key as appropriate.
Use the Cursor pad to select the waypoint you want to edit.
Press the EDIT WPT soft key.
Edit data as appropriate.
Press the SAVE soft key.
Press the MENU key to close the menu.
3-30
3. PLOTTER OPERATION
Editing a waypoint from the plotter display
You may edit waypoints from the plotter display as follows:
1. Press the MENU key followed by the WAYPOINTS/ROUTES and WAYPOINTS soft key
to open the waypoint menu.
2. Press the WAYPOINT BY CURSOR soft key.
3. Operate the Cursor pad to place the cursor on the waypoint which you want to change.
A flashing diamond mark appears on the waypoint when it is correctly selected.
4. Press the EDIT/MOVE soft key. Three soft keys replace the EDIT/MOVE soft key:
EDIT WPT: Edit from the waypoint entry window.
MOVE WPT: Move waypoint to new position with the cursor.
ERASE WPT: Erase waypoint. See paragraph 3.8.3.
5. Press the appropriate soft key. For the “EDIT WPT,” the waypoint entry window
appears; edit data as appropriate. For “MOVE WPT,” do the following:
a) Operate the Cursor pad to place the cursor on the location desired for the waypoint. A
line connects previous position and new position.
b) Push the ENTER knob. The waypoint moves to the cursor position and its position is
changed on the waypoint list. If the waypoint is set as destination or is part of a route,
you are asked if you are sure to move the waypoint. In this case, push the ENTER
knob to move the waypoint, or press the CLEAR key to cancel.
6. Press the MENU key to finish.
Range and bearing from
own ship to cursor
+
34° 22. 3456'N
080° 22. 3456'E
359.9°M TRIP NU
59.9 nm
99.9 nm
16.0nm
(1) Select waypoint to move,
then press EDIT/MOVE
and MOVE WPT soft keys.
Press to alternately display
range/bearing from own ship
to cursor, range/bearing from
original waypoint position to
cursor position.
Below is an example of the
range/bearing from original
waypoint position to cursor
position.
RNG
BRG
FISH
(2) Drag cursor to new position,
then push the [ENTER] knob.
CANCEL
BRIDGE
WP-002
+
34° 22. 3456’N
080° 22. 3456’E
FROM
FISH
5.3°
1.45 nm
Plotter display
3-31
3. PLOTTER OPERATION
3.8.3
Erasing waypoints
Erasing a waypoint directly from the plotter display
1. Operate the Cursor pad to place the cursor on the waypoint you want to erase. A
flashing diamond mark appears over the waypoint when the waypoint is correctly
selected.
2. Press the CLEAR key. You are asked if you are sure to erase the waypoint.
3. Push the ENTER knob. The waypoint is erased from the plotter screen and the waypoint
list.
Erasing a waypoint from the menu
1. Press the MENU key followed by the WAYPOINTS/ROUTES and WAYPOINTS soft key
to open the waypoint menu.
2. Press the WAYPOINT BY CURSOR soft key.
3. Operate the Cursor pad to place the cursor on the waypoint which you want to erase. A
flashing diamond mark appears on the waypoint when it is correctly selected.
4. Press the EDIT/MOVE soft key followed by the ERASE WPT soft key. You are asked if
you are sure to erase the waypoint.
5. Push the ENTER knob to erase the waypoint.
6. Press the MENU key to close the menu. The waypoint is erased from the plotter screen
and the waypoint list.
Erasing a waypoint from the waypoint list
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Press the MENU key to open the menu.
Press the WAYPOINTS/ROUTES and WAYPOINTS soft keys.
Press the LOCAL LIST or ALPHANUMERIC LIST soft key.
Use the Cursor pad to select the waypoint you want to erase.
Press the ERASE WPT soft key. You are asked if you are sure to erase the waypoint.
Push the ENTER knob. The waypoint is erased from both the waypoint list and the
plotter screen (if it is currently displayed).
7. Press the MENU key to close the menu.
3-32
3. PLOTTER OPERATION
3.8.4
Changing waypoint mark size (Navionics GOLD)
You may change the size of all waypoint marks to small or large (default), or you may turn
them off.
1. Press the MENU key to open the menu.
2. Press the CHART SETUP and CHART DETAILS soft keys.
LAT LON GRID
GREEN
TEXT INFORMATION
ON
WAYPOINTS
LARGE
WAYPOINT NAMES
ON
CHART BORDER LINES
ON
LANDMASS*
BRT YELLOW
NAVAIDS*
ON
LIGHT SECTOR INFO
ON
OTHER SYMBOLS*
WHITE
CHART
DETAILS
EDIT
CNTOUR
LINE
NEXT
PAGE
RETURN
*: Not used.
Chart details menu
3. Use the Cursor pad to select WAYPOINTS.
4. Press the EDIT soft key.
5. Use the Cursor pad to select LARGE, SMALL or OFF.
LARGE: Shows mark in actual shape.
SMALL: Displays all waypoints with an “X” regardless of mark shape selected.
OFF: Turns off all waypoints and their names. Waypoints currently used in navigation
are shown regardless of this setting.
6. Press the ENTER soft key.
7. Press the MENU key to close the menu.
3-33
3. PLOTTER OPERATION
3.8.5
Searching waypoints
You can search for a waypoint through the alphanumeric waypoint list as follows:
1. Press the MENU key.
2. Press the WAYPOINTS/ROUTES, WAYPOINTS and ALPHANUMERIC LIST soft keys
to show the alphanumeric list.
▲
▲
ABALONE
00:00 01JAN01
35°47.010'N
135°21.000'W
350.9°
3.80 nm
CRAB
00:00 01JAN01
34°42.000'N
135°21.050'W
050.9°
1.98 nm
FISH
00:00 01JAN01
34°41.000'N
135°21.030'W
065.9°
1.83 nm
LOBSTER
00:00 01JAN01
38°44.300'N
135°21.010'W
144.9°
4.93nm
WPT
ALPHA
GOTO
NEW
WPT
EDIT
WPT
ERASE
WPT
RETURN
PUSH ENTER KNOB TO
SEARCH FOR
---
Search window
Alphanumeric list
3. Use the Cursor pad and the ENTER knob to enter up to three alphanumeric characters
in the search window. Then, the waypoint searched appears at the top of the screen.
4. Press the MENU key to close the menu.
3-34
3. PLOTTER OPERATION
3.9
Routes
Often a trip from one place to another involves several course changes, requiring a series
of route points (waypoints) which you navigate to, one after another. The sequence of
waypoints leading to the ultimate destination is called a route. Your unit can automatically
advance to the next waypoint on a route, so you do not have to change the destination
waypoint repeatedly.
You can store up to 200 routes, and a route may have 35 waypoints.
3.9.1
Creating routes
Entering a route with existing waypoints
This method constructs routes by using existing waypoints.
1. Press the MENU key.
2. Press the WAYPOINTS/ROUTES soft key.
3. Press the ROUTES soft key to open the ROUTE menu. (No data will be shown if there
are no routes entered.)
Route name
▲
Total length of route
001
ROUTE
LENGTH
WAYPOINTS
35
25.6 nm
GOTO
002
LENGTH
WAYPOINTS
2
56.7 nm
003
NEW
ROUTE
EDIT
ROUTE
LENGTH
WAYPOINTS
3
21.1 nm
ERASE
ROUTE
004
LENGTH
WAYPOINTS
3
21.1 nm
Number of waypoints
in route
RETURN
PUSH ENTER KNOB TO
SEARCH FOR
---
Route menu
4. Press the NEW ROUTE soft key to open the new route entry screen.
ROUTE NAME
001
NEW
ROUTE
PLOT
COMMENT
LOCAL
LIST
ALPHA
LIST
CONECT
CANCEL
New route entry screen
3-35
3. PLOTTER OPERATION
5. If desired you can change the route name shown and/or add a comment. A route name
may consist of six characters; comment, 13 characters.
6. Press the LOCAL LIST or ALPHA LIST soft key to open the waypoint list.
7. Use the Cursor pad to select a waypoint, then press the ADD WPT soft key to add it to
the route.
8. Repeat step 7 to complete the route.
Note: To clear last-entered waypoint, press the ERASE LST WP soft key. Each press of
this key deletes the last waypoint entered.
9. Press the SAVE soft key to register the route.
10. Press the MENU key to close the menu.
Entering a route with the cursor
This method allows you to construct a route directly from the plotter display, using existing
waypoints or new positions. Any new position will be saved as a waypoint, under the
youngest empty waypoint number.
1. Follow steps 1-5 in “Entering a route from the route list” on the previous page.
2. Press the PLOT soft key to show the plotter display.
3. Operate the Cursor pad to place the cursor on an existing waypoint (ADD WP soft key
appears) or new location (ADD NEW WP soft key appears).
4. Press the ADD WP soft key (or ADD NEW WP soft key).
5. Repeat steps 3 and 4 to complete the route.
6. Push the ENTER knob to register the route.
Creating voyage-based routes
You can create routes based on your ship’s track. The route can be created automatically
by time or distance, or manually. This feature is useful when you wish to retrace previous
track.
The “SAVE” icon (SAVE) appears at the top of the screen when a voyage-based route is
being created.
1. Press the MENU key to open the menu.
2. Press the WAYPOINTS/ROUTES soft key.
3. Press the CREATE VOYAGE-BASED ROUTE soft key.
3-36
3. PLOTTER OPERATION
SAVE
ROUTE
▲
001
LENGTH
WAYPOINTS
35
25.6 nm
NEW
002
SELECT
ROUTE
LENGTH
WAYPOINTS
2
56.7 nm
003
LENGTH
WAYPOINTS
3
21.1 nm
004
LENGTH
WAYPOINTS
3
21.1 nm
RETURN
PUSH ENTER KNOB TO
SEARCH FOR
---
Save route menu
4. Press the NEW soft key to show the new route window.
Note: If you want to tack voyage-based points onto the end of an existing route, select
the route with the Cursor pad, then press the SELECT ROUTE soft key instead of the
NEW soft key. Then, go to step 6.
ROUTE NAME
Next consecutive route number
006
SAVE
ROUTE
BCKTRK
TIME
COMMENT
BCKTRK
DIST
USE FURUNO BACK TRACK FUNCTION
TO AUTOMATICALLY CREATE ROUTE
BY TIME OR DISTANCE.
MANUAL
CANCEL
Save route window
5. If required, you may change the route name and enter a comment.
6. Choose how to record points for your route, by time, by range or manual entry, by
pressing BCKTRK TIME, BCKTRK RANGE or MANUAL soft key as appropriate. For
manual entry, go to step 8. For BCKTRK TIME, BCKTRK DIST one of the following
displays appears.
TIME INTERVAL
00h01m
(When selecting BCKTRK TIME.)
DISTANCE INTERVAL
00.1nm
(When selecting BCKTRK DIST.)
Displays for entry of time, distance interval
3-37
3. PLOTTER OPERATION
7. Enter interval desired with the Cursor pad and the ENTER knob. Press the START
LOG and RETURN soft keys followed by the MENU key to close the menu. At this
moment, a voyage-based route will be created.
8. For manual entry of waypoints, do the following:
a) Press the SAVE/MOB key momentarily to enter a waypoint mark at own ship position. A
new waypoint is created under the youngest empty waypoint number and added to the
route. (At this time you may close the SAVE ROUTE screen by pressing the RETURN
soft key followed by the MENU key.)
b) Repeat step a) as necessary. 35 waypoints may be entered.
To stop recording waypoints and save the route
You can stop recording waypoints and save the route as shown in the procedure below.
When 35 waypoints have been entered the message “Total 35 WPTS have been already
registered in the route. Stop creating voyage-based route.” is displayed. In this case,
automatically creating voyage-based route stops.
1. Press the MENU key followed by the WAYPOINTS/ROUTES and CREATE
VOYAGE-BASED ROUTE soft keys.
2. Press the FINISH LOG soft key to stop recording waypoints and save the route.
3. Press the MENU key to close the menu.
3.9.2
Connecting routes
Two routes which you have created can be connected as follows to form a new route.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Press the MENU key to open the menu.
Press the WAYPOINTS/ROUTES soft key.
Press the ROUTES soft key.
Press the NEW ROUTE soft key.
If desired enter route name and comment.
Press the CONECT soft key.
Use the Cursor pad and the ENTER knob to enter the route name for the first route,
beneath FIRST in the connect route window.
ROUTE NAME
NEW
ROUTE
001
F < -- > R
COMMENT
CONNECT ROUTE
FIRST
SECOND
______
______
FORWARD
FORWARD
SAVE
CANCEL
Connect route window
3-38
3. PLOTTER OPERATION
8. Press the F<− −>R soft key to select direction to follow the waypoints of the route,
forward or reverse.
9. Enter the route name of the second route as you did for the first route.
10. Press the SAVE soft key.
11. Press the MENU key to close the menu.
Note: The maximum number of waypoints in a route is 35. If this number is exceeded an
error message appears. In this case, delete waypoints in one or both routes so the total
number of waypoints does not exceed 35.
3.9.3
Inserting waypoints
Waypoints can be inserted in a route as follows:
Inserting a waypoint from the route list
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Press the MENU key to open the menu.
Press the WAYPOINTS/ROUTES soft key.
Press the ROUTES soft key.
Use the Cursor pad to select a route.
Press the EDIT ROUTE soft key. The route name screen appears.
Press the LOCAL LIST soft key.
EDIT
ROUTE
ROUTE NAME: 001
COMMENT:
01
▲
001WPT
02
003WPT
03
002WPT
04
005WPT
05
008WPT
34°44.111'N
135°21.134'W
34°43.432'N
135°41.456'W
34°14.124'N
135°21.567'W
34°44.569'N
135°21.152'W
34°54.124'N
135°21.888'W
INSERT
WPT
LEG
29.9°
12.0nm
159.9°
6.00nm
50.5°
29.8nm
359.9°
3.0nm
REMOVE
WPT
CHANGE
WPT
COORD
TYPE
RETURN
LOCAL LIST
7. Use the Cursor pad to place the cursor at the location
where you want to insert a waypoint.
8. Press the INSERT WPT or CHANGE WPT soft key as
appropriate. The local waypoint list appears.
9. Use the Cursor pad to select the waypoint you want to
insert. (You can switch between the local list and
alphanumeric list by using the LOCAL LIST and ALPHA
LIST soft keys.)
10. Press the SELECT WPT or CHANGE WPT soft key,
whichever is displayed.
11. Press the MENU key to close the menu.
▲
Edit route menu
001
001WPT
34°44.111'N
135°21.134'W
002
002WPT
34°43.432'N
135°41.456'W
003
003WPT
34°14.124'N
135°21.567'W
004
004WPT
34°34.490'N
135°51.387'W
Waypoint list for editing a
route (local list)
3-39
3. PLOTTER OPERATION
Inserting a waypoint from the plotter display
Inserting a waypoint before first waypoint or after last waypoint in a route
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Press the MENU key to open the menu.
Press the WAYPOINTS/ROUTES soft key.
Press the ROUTES soft key.
Use the Cursor pad to select a route.
Press the EDIT ROUTE soft key.
Press the PLOT soft key to show the plotter screen.
Operate the Cursor pad to place the cursor on the first (or last) waypoint of the route. A
flashing diamond appears over the waypoint when it is correctly selected.
8. Press the ADD TO START soft key or the ADD TO END soft key depending on the
waypoint you selected at step 7.
9. Operate the Cursor pad to place the cursor on an existing waypoint (ADD WPT soft key
appears) or new location (ADD NEW WP soft key appears).
10. Press the ADD WPT soft key (ADD NEW WP soft key).
11. Press the MENU key to close the menu.
Inserting a waypoint in an intermediate location on a route
1. Follow steps 1 through 6 in “Inserting a waypoint before the first or last waypoint in a
route.”
2. Operate the Cursor pad to place the cursor on a line connecting waypoints. The SPLIT
LEG soft key appears and the line flashes when it is correctly selected.
3. Press the SPLIT LEG soft key.
4. Move the cursor to a new location or select an existing waypoint, in which case the
INSERT WPT soft key replaces the INSERT NEW WP soft key.
5. Press the INSERT WPT soft key (INSERT NEW WP soft key).
6. Press the MENU key to close the menu.
3.9.4
Removing waypoints from a route
Removing a waypoint from the route list
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Press the MENU key to open the menu.
Press the WAYPOINTS/ROUTES soft key.
Press the ROUTES soft key.
Select a route.
Press the EDIT ROUTE and LOCAL LIST soft keys.
Select the waypoint you want to remove.
Press the REMOVE WPT soft key.
Press the MENU key to close the menu.
Removing a waypoint from the plotter display
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Press the MENU key to open the menu.
Press the WAYPOINTS/ROUTES soft key.
Press the ROUTES soft key.
Select a route.
Press the EDIT ROUTE soft key.
Press the PLOT soft key to show the plot screen.
3-40
3. PLOTTER OPERATION
7. Operate the Cursor pad to place the cursor on the waypoint you want to remove from
the route.
8. Press the REMOVE WPT soft key. The route is redrawn, eliminating the waypoint
removed.
9. Press the MENU key to close the menu.
3.9.5
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Erasing routes
Press the MENU key to open the menu.
Press the WAYPOINTS/ROUTES soft key.
Press the ROUTES soft key.
Use the Cursor pad to select a route.
Press the ERASE ROUTE soft key. You are asked if you are sure to erase the route.
Push the ENTER knob to erase the route, or the CLEAR key to escape.
Press the MENU key to close the menu.
3.10 Navigation
This section shows you how to get to a desired destination by “quick points,” waypoints,
port services and routes.
Note: Reciprocal setting and canceling of destination is available by outputting the data
sentence ZDA from the NavNet unit connected to the navigator.
3.10.1 Navigating to a “quick point”
The “quick point” feature allows you to navigate to point(s) without retaining the data
indefinitely in your unit’s memory.
Selecting quick point entry method
You need to tell your unit how to set the quick point: 1 POINT, 35 POINTS (up to 35 points)
or 35PTS/FIND. (For how to navigate to points/port services see “3.10.3 Navigating to ports,
port services” on page 3-43.)
1. Press the MENU key.
2. Press the PLOTTER SETUP soft key.
For C-MAP, press the PLOTTER SETUP, PROTTER SETTINGS soft keys in that order.
3. Use the Cursor pad to select SET GOTO METHOD, then press the EDIT soft key.
GOTO METHOD
GOTO METHOD
¤ 1 POINT
¡ 35 POINTS
¡ 35PTS/FIND
¤ 1 POINT
¡ 35 POINTS
¡ 35PTS/PORT SVC
C-MAP
NavChart
Go to method window
4. Use the Cursor pad to select a method.
5. Press the ENTER soft key.
6. Press the MENU key to close the menu.
3-41
3. PLOTTER OPERATION
Navigating to a single quick point
1. Place the cursor on an existing waypoint (GOTO WPT soft key appears) or a new
location (GOTO CURSOR soft key appears).
2. Select “1 POINT” following the procedure in the above paragraph.
3. Depending on the selection you made at step 1, press the GOTO CURSOR or GOTO
WPT soft key.
A solid blue line with arrows connects between own ship and destination, which is marked
as “<QP01>” for cursor-selected location or waypoint name in case of waypoint. This line
shows the shortest course to the destination. Arrows on the line show the direction to follow
to get to the quick point. Range and bearing from own ship to the destination appear at the
top of screen. The quick point location is saved to the waypoint list as waypoint “QP01.”
Navigating to multiple quick points
1. Select “35 POINTS” following the procedure in “Selecting quick point entry method” on
the previous page.
2. Press the GOTO soft key.
3. Place the cursor on an existing waypoint (SELECT WPT soft key appears) or a new
location (ADD QP soft key appears).
4. Depending on the action taken at step 3, press the SELECT WPT or ADD QP soft key.
“QP<01>” appears at the cursor location if a quick point is selected. To erase
last-entered quick point (waypoint), press the ERASE LST QP (ERASE LST WP) soft
key.
5. Repeat steps 3 and 4 to complete the route.
6. Push the ENTER knob to finish.
A solid light-blue line with arrows connects between own ship and the first point and all
other points are connected with a green dashed line with arrows. Arrows on the line show
the direction to follow to get to your destination. Quick points are numbered in sequential
order from QP<01> and are saved to the waypoint list. Range and bearing from own ship to
the first destination appear at the top of screen. The quick points are saved as a route,
under the name “Q>RTE” (Quick Route).
3.10.2 Navigating to waypoints
Selecting a waypoint from the plotter display
1. Operate the Cursor pad to select a waypoint.
2. Press the GOTO WPT soft key.
Note: GOTO method should be selected to “1 POINT” on the PLOTTER SETUP menu.
Selecting a waypoint from the waypoint list
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Press the MENU key to open the menu.
Press the WAYPOINTS/ROUTES soft key.
Press the WAYPOINTS soft key to open the waypoint menu.
Press the LOCAL LIST or ALPHANUMERIC LIST soft key as desired.
Use the Cursor pad to select a waypoint.
3-42
3. PLOTTER OPERATION
6. Press the GOTO soft key, and the plotter display appears.
For either of the above methods, a solid light-blue line with arrows runs between waypoint
selected and own ship’s position. Arrows on the line show the direction to follow to get to
the waypoint. Waypoint data appears at the top of screen.
Selecting an external waypoint
You can select a waypoint (or route) entered at an external plotter connected with NMEA
cable. This function requires RMB sentence.
1. Press the MENU key, PLOTTER SETUP soft key to show the PLOTTER SETUP menu.
2. Use the Cursor pad to select QP.
3. Press the ENTER soft key or ENTER knob to show the QP window.
QP
¡ EXT WPT (RMB)
¤ INTERNAL
QP window
4. Select EXT WPT (RMB).
5. On a connected external plotter, set a waypoint (or route) as the destination.
Selected waypoint (route) appears on the NavNet plotter screen. (on radar screen, a lollipop
appears to show the waypoint.)
3.10.3 Navigating to ports, port services
The port service list shows services available at ports or harbors. (See page 3-12 and 17.)
You can use the list to set your destination as follows:
1. Select “35 PTS/PORT SVC” following the procedure in “Selecting quick point entry
method” on page 3-41.
This procedure is necessary for NEAR SERVICE function.
2. Place the cursor on the location desired, then press the ENTER knob to show the
OBJECT INFORMATION window.
3. Press the FIND soft key to show the FIND window.
4. Operate the Cursor pad to choose PORT LIST or PORT SERVICE, and then press the
ENTER knob or ENTER soft key to show the list.
5. Operate the Cursor pad to choose the port (service), and then press the ENTER knob
and GOTO PORT soft key in order.
3-43
3. PLOTTER OPERATION
SELECT SERVICE
FUEL
WATER
OTHER UTILITIES
ON THE PIER
SELECT PORTS
ACCIAROLI
ACQUAMORTA
REPAIR SERVICES
AGNONE S. NICOLA
POSITION
xx xx.xxx'N
xxx xx.xxx'W
BRG. & RNG.
xxxT x.xxxnm
AGROPOLI
AMALFI
GENERAL
BAIA
GENERAL SERVICE
XXXXXXX
XXXXXXX
XXXXXXX
CAPRI
FIRST AID
CASA MICCIOLA-ISCHIA
TM
OTHER INFORMATION
Port list (NavChart , Italy)
TM
Port services (NavChart )
Port services and sample port list (Ex. NavChart)
6. (NavChart) If you selected PORT (Navionics only) at step 4, use the Cursor pad to
select a port, then press the GOTO soft key. Make a route using the soft keys, then push
the ENTER knob. (If you want to go directly to that port, simply press the ADD QP soft
key followed by the ENTER knob.)
(C-MAP) If you selected PORT LIST at step 4, use the Cursor pad to select a port, and
then press the ENTER knob or ENTER soft key. Press the CANCEL soft key several
times to close windows, and then do the follows.
a) Operate the Cursor pad to select the sailboat icon at the center of the screen.
b) Press the GO TO soft key.
c) Press QUICK ROUTE soft key.
d) Press the SELECT WPT soft key.
e) Press the ENTER knob.
If you selected SERVICE at step 4, select service mark desired with the Cursor pad
and then push the ENTER soft key or the ENTER knob. Then, the display shows the
locations of those services nearest you. Use the Cursor pad to place the “hand cursor”
on the port service icon desired, then press the ENTER soft key. Make a route using the
soft keys, then push the ENTER knob. (If you want to go directly to location selected,
simply press the ADD QP soft key followed by pushing the ENTER knob.) For C-MAP,
press the CANCEL soft key several times to show the plotter display with the port having
the selected service at the center of the display. Select the port with cursor, and then set
it as destination referring to step a) through e) shown above.
3-44
3. PLOTTER OPERATION
3.10.4 Following a route
Selecting the route to follow
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Press the MENU key to open the menu.
Press the WAYPOINTS/ROUTES soft key.
Press the ROUTES soft key to open the route list.
Select a route.
Press the GOTO soft key to show the plotter display. The cursor is on the waypoint
nearest own ship.
WPT
FROM
OS
FISH
GOTO
1.3 nm
208.5°M ROUTE
16.0 nm
WP-002
GOTO
WPT
FISH
RVRSE
ROUTE
WP-001
RETURN
CRAB
Plotter display, route selected as destination
6. Operate the Cursor pad to place the cursor on the waypoint or leg in the route from
where to start navigating the route.
7. Press the GOTO WPT or FOLLOW LEG soft key, depending on the action taken at step
A solid blue line runs between own ship and first waypoint. Green dashed lines connect all
other waypoints. The arrows on the lines show the direction to traverse the route.
Navigating waypoints in reverse order
Press the RVRSE ROUTE soft key followed by the ENTER knob to navigate waypoints in
reverse order. The arrows on the route line point in the direction selected.
3-45
3. PLOTTER OPERATION
Restarting navigation
When you steer to avoid an obstacle or the vessel drifts, you may go off your intended
course, as in Line 1 in the figure below. Also, if you don’t need to return to the original
course, you can go directly to the next waypoint, as in Line 2 in the figure below. In these
cases, use the restart navigation function to restart navigation.
Line 2
Obstacle
Line 1
Original course
Example of when to restart navigation
1. Press the MENU key to open the menu.
2. Press the WAYPOINTS/ROUTES soft key.
3. Press the LOG soft key.
Destination waypoint (Waypoint name in reverse video)
Passed waypoint (gray characters)
Estimated Time of Arrival at destination
LOG
ETA 23:59 11.FEB
01
001WPT
02
▲
003WPT
03
002WPT
Replaces triangle
when selecting a
route leg.
04
005WPT
05
008WPT
34°44.111'N
135°21.134'W
34°43.432'N
135°41.456'W
34°14.124'N
135°21.567'W
34°44.569'N
135°21.152'W
34°54.124'N
135°21.888'W
LEG
RESTART
29.9°
12.0nm
STOP
159.9°
6.00nm
50.5°
29.8nm
359.9°
3.0nm
Replaced by
"FOLLOW LEG"
when selecting
a route leg.
RVRSE
SPEED
COORD
TYPE
Log display
4. Use the Cursor pad to select a waypoint or a route leg. When a route leg is selected
the single arrow cursor is replaced by double arrows.
5. Press the RESTART soft key or FOLLOW LEG soft key in case of route leg.
RESTART: Line2 in the figure above
FOLLOW LEG: Line 1 in the figure above
6. Press the MENU key to close the menu.
3-46
3. PLOTTER OPERATION
Setting speed for ETA calculation
Speed, which may be input manually or automatically, is required to calculate ETA
(Estimated Time of Arrival) to a destination.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Press the MENU key to open the menu.
Press the WAYPOINTS/ROUTES soft key.
Press the LOG soft key.
Press the SPEED soft key.
SPEED FOR ETA
▲
¤ SPD 010.0kt
¡ GPS AVG. SPEED
▼
Select speed for ETA window
5. Enter speed manually in the SPD field, or use GPS speed data (if applicable) by
selecting GPS AVG. SPEED.
6. Press the ENTER soft key or the ENTER knob to register your selection.
7. Press the MENU key to close the menu.
Switching waypoints
When you arrive to a waypoint on a route, you can switch to the next waypoint by one of the
three methods below.
PERPENDICULAR: Automatically switches the destination waypoint when the boat comes
passes an imaginary perpendicular line passing through the center of the destination
waypoint or the boat comes within the arrival alarm range.
ARRVL ALM CRCL: Destination waypoint is automatically switched when the boat comes
within the arrival alarm range. For how to set the arrival alarm, see the paragraph 3.11.2
Arrival alarm.
MANUAL: The destination waypoint may be manually switched by using the RESTART soft
key. This function is operative when “1 POINT” is selected as the GOTO method.
WPT 2
WPT 2
Waypoint switched
at this point.
WPT 1
Perpendicular
Waypoint switched
at this point.
WPT 1
Arrival Alarm Circle
Automatic waypoint switching methods
3-47
3. PLOTTER OPERATION
To select waypoint switching method do the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Press the MENU key.
Press the PLOTTER SETUP soft key.
Use the Cursor pad to select WAYPOINT SWITCHING.
Press the EDIT soft key to show the waypoint switching window.
Use the Cursor pad to select appropriate waypoint switching method;
PERPENDICULAR, ARRVL ALM CRCL (default setting), or MANUAL.
6. Press the ENTER soft key.
7. Press the MENU key to close the menu.
3.10.5 Canceling route navigation
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Press the MENU key to open the menu.
Press the WAYPOINTS/ROUTES soft key.
Press the LOG soft key.
Press the STOP soft key.
Push the ENTER knob.
Press the RELEASE soft key.
Push the ENTER knob.
3-48
3. PLOTTER OPERATION
3.11 Alarms
The plotter section has eight conditions which generate both audio and visual alarms:
arrival alarm, anchor watch alarm, XTE (Cross Track Error) alarm, proximity alarm, speed
alarm, trip alarm, water temperature alarm and bottom alarm. (The bottom and water
temperature alarms, which require depth and water temperature data, may also be set on
the sounder alarm menu. For these alarms see Chapter 4.)
You may set up the plotter alarms on the ALARM menu, which may be displayed by
pressing the ALARM key.
AUDIO ALARM
INTERNAL BUZZ
ARRIVAL ALARM
OFF 0.010nm
ANCHOR WATCH ALARM
OFF 0.010nm
PROXIMITY ALARM
OFF
XTE ALARM
OFF 0.050nm
SPEED ALARM
OFF
TRIP ALARM
OFF 0000.0nm
BOTTOM ALARM
OFF
TEMPERATURE ALARM
OFF
ALARM1
EDIT
NEXT
PAGE
CLEAR
ALARM
NEXT
PAGE
ALARM2
EDIT
GROUNDING ALARM*
00.0 ft
GROUNDING ALARM RANGE*
0.050nm
PREV.
PAGE
CLEAR
ALARM
PREV..
PAGE
RETURN
ALARM INFOMATION
NO ALARM
ALARM INFOMATION
NO ALARM
Page 1
Page 2
*C-MAP only
Plotter alarm menu
3.11.1 Audio alarm on/off
Audio and visual alarms are released whenever an alarm setting is violated. You can
enable or disable the audio alarm as follows:
AUDIO ALARM
1.
2.
3.
4.
Press the ALARM key to show the alarm menu.
¡ INT & EXT BUZZ
Use the Cursor pad to select AUDIO ALARM.
¤ INTERNAL BUZZ
¡ OFF
Press the EDIT soft key to show the audio alarm window.
Use the Cursor pad to select INT & EXT BUZZ (Internal
+ External alarm), INTERNAL BUZZ (Internal alarm) or OFF as appropriate. This turns
on or off the audio alarm globally for all alarms, including radar.
5. Press the ENTER soft key.
6. Press the ALARM key to finish.
3-49
3. PLOTTER OPERATION
3.11.2 Arrival alarm
The arrival alarm informs you that your boat is approaching a destination waypoint. The
area that defines an arrival zone is that of a circle which you approach from the outside of
the circle. The alarm will be released if your boat enters the circle. When the arrival alarm is
active a red dashed circle marks the arrival alarm area. Note that the arrival alarm and
anchor watch alarm can be turned on together.
Alarm
range
Own ship
: Alarm area
Destination
waypoint
How the arrival alarm works
1. Press the ALARM key to open the alarm menu.
2. Use the Cursor pad to select ARRIVAL ALARM.
3. Press the EDIT soft key to show the arrival alarm window.
ARRIVAL ALARM
▲
¡ ON 0.010nm
¤ OFF
▼
Arrival alarm window
4. Use the Cursor pad to select ON.
5. Use the Cursor pad and the ENTER knob to enter alarm setting: Operate the Cursor
pad to select digit; use the ENTER knob to enter value. The available arrival alarm
setting is 0.001 to 9.999 miles.
6. Press the ENTER soft key or push the ENTER knob to register setting.
7. Press the ALARM key to finish.
3-50
3. PLOTTER OPERATION
3.11.3 Anchor watch alarm
The anchor watch alarm informs you that your boat is moving when it should be at rest.
When the anchor watch is active, a red dashed circle with an “X” at its center marks the
anchor watch area.
Alarm
setting
Your ship's position where
you start the anchor watch
alarm.
: Alarm
area
How the anchor watch alarm works
1. Press the ALARM key to open the alarm menu.
2. Use the Cursor pad to select ANCHOR WATCH ALARM.
3. Press the EDIT soft key to open the anchor alarm window.
ANCHOR WATCH ALARM
▲
¡ ON 0.010nm
¤ OFF
▼
Anchor watch alarm window
4. Use the Cursor pad to select ON.
5. Use the Cursor pad and the ENTER knob to enter alarm setting: Operate the Cursor
pad to select digit; use the ENTER knob to enter value. The available anchor watch
setting is 0.001 to 9.999 miles.
6. Press the ENTER soft key or push the ENTER knob to register setting.
7. Press the ALARM key to finish.
Note: If the arrival alarm range is changed, turn off the anchor watch alarm and then turn it
on again to give priority to the anchor watch alarm.
3-51
3. PLOTTER OPERATION
3.11.4 XTE (Cross-Track Error) alarm
The XTE alarm warns you when your boat is off its intended course. When the XTE alarm is
active two red dashed lines mark the XTE alarm area.
Own ship
position
Alarm
setting
Destination
waypoint
Intended
course
: Alarm
How the XTE alarm works
1. Press the ALARM key to open the alarm menu.
2. Use the Cursor pad to select XTE ALARM.
3. Press the EDIT soft key to open the XTE alarm window.
XTE ALARM
▲
¡ ON 0.050nm
¤ OFF
▼
XTE alarm window
4. Use the Cursor pad and the ENTER knob to enter alarm setting: Operate the Cursor
pad to select digit; use the ENTER knob to enter value. The available XTE alarm setting
is 0.001 to 9.999 miles.
5. Press the ENTER soft key or push the ENTER knob to register setting.
6. Press the ALARM key to finish.
3.11.5 Speed alarm
The speed alarm warns when your boat’s speed is within or
under/over the speed range set.
SPEED ALARM
▲
1. Press the ALARM key to open the alarm menu.
¡ WITHIN
2. Use the Cursor pad to select SPEED ALARM.
000.0 ~ 000.0 kt
¡ UNDER/OVER
3. Press the EDIT soft key to display the speed alarm
000.0 ~ 000.0 kt
window.
¤ OFF
▼
4. Use the Cursor pad to select WITHIN, UNDER/OVER, or
OFF as appropriate
5. For WITHIN and UNDER/OVER use the Cursor pad and
the ENTER knob to enter alarm range: Operate the
Cursor pad to select digit; use the ENTER knob to enter value.
6. Press the ENTER soft key or push the ENTER knob to register setting.
7. Press the ALARM key to finish.
3-52
3. PLOTTER OPERATION
3.11.6 Proximity alarm
The proximity alarm alerts you when own ship nears a waypoint, which is marked with the
proximity mark, by the proximity alarm radius set for that waypoint on the waypoint list.
When own ship is within a waypoint’s proximity alarm radius, the alarm sounds. The
proximity mark remains on the screen until the waypoint is erased.
Radius in proportion to
proximity alarm radius,
which is set on waypoint list
001WPT
Proximity mark
1. Press the ALARM key to open the alarm menu.
2. Use the Cursor pad to select PROXIMITY ALARM.
3. Press the EDIT soft key to show the proximity alarm
window.
4. Use the Cursor pad to select ON or OFF as
appropriate, then press the ENTER soft key.
5. Press the ALARM key to finish.
PROXIMITY ALARM
▲
¡
¤
▼
ON
OFF
Proximity alarm window
3.11.7 Trip alarm
The trip alarm informs you when you have traveled a certain distance.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Press the ALARM key to open the alarm menu.
Use the Cursor pad to select TRIP ALARM.
Press the EDIT soft key to show the trip alarm window.
Select ON.
Use the Cursor pad and the ENTER knob to enter alarm
setting: Operate the Cursor pad to select digit; use the
ENTER knob to enter value.
6. Press the ENTER soft key or push the ENTER knob to
register setting.
7. Press the ALARM key to finish.
TRIP ALARM
▲
¡ ON 0000.0nm
¤ OFF
▼
Trip alarm window
3-53
3. PLOTTER OPERATION
3.11.8 Grounding alarm (C-MAP specification)
The grounding alarm feature continuously scans the electronic chart data in front of the boat
to detect charted rocks, shoals, obstructions and land areas that could pose a threat if the
vessel were to continue along its current course. The area searched is user-definable and is
identified by a red triangle on the screen.
Note: This function only checks objects that appear on the chart and is therefore limited by
the accuracy of the original source material from which the electronic charts where
produced.
1. Press the ALARM key to open the alarm menu.
2. Choose GROUNDING ALARM from page 2 of the ALARM menu.
3. Press the EDIT soft key to show the grounding alarm window.
GROUNDING ALARM
▲
¡ ON 0.500 ft
¤ OFF
▼
Grounding alarm window
4. Select ON.
5. Use the Cursor pad and the ENTER knob to enter alarm setting: Operate the Cursor
pad to select digit; use the ENTER knob to enter value. The setting range is 0-9999.9, in
increments of 0.001 nm (km)
6. Press the ENTER soft key or push the ENTER knob to register setting.
7. Press the ALARM key to finish.
3-54
3. PLOTTER OPERATION
3.11.9 Alarm information
When an alarm setting has been violated, the buzzer sounds and the speaker icon appears
and is red. Press the CLEAR key to silence the alarm. You can see which alarm has been
violated on the ALARM menu. In the example below the arrival alarm has been violated.
1. Press the ALARM key. The name of the offending alarm appears in the alarm
information window.
AUDIO ALARM
INT & EXT BUZZ
ARRIVAL ALARM
ON 0.010nm
ANCHOR WATCH ALARM
OFF 0.010nm
PROXIMITY ALARM
OFF
XTE ALARM
OFF 0.050nm
SPEED ALARM
OFF
TRIP ALARM
OFF 0000.0nm
ALARM1
EDIT
NEXT
INFO
CLEAR
ALARM
NEXT
PAGE
RETURN
ALARM INFOMATION
Alarm information
window
ARRIVED
AT WAYPOINT.
CONTINUE
Speaker icon
Means multiple alarms
have been violated.
Plotter alarm menu, page 1
2. Press the CLEAR ALARM soft key to acknowledge the alarm (and silence the buzzer if
it was not done with the CLEAR key). The color of the speaker icon changes from red to
background color. The icon remains on the screen until the cause of the alarm is
eliminated or the alarm is disabled. If more than one alarm has been violated the
message CONTINUE appears at the bottom of the alarm information window. In this
case, press the NEXT INFO soft key to see which other alarms have been violated.
3. Press the ALARM key to finish.
Note: The alarm icon is red when an alarm setting is violated, and changes to background
color when the CLEAR key or CLEAR ALARM soft key is pressed. The color does not
change regardless of how many other alarms are violated.
3-55
3. PLOTTER OPERATION
Alarm messages
The table below shows the plotter alarm messages and their meanings.
Plotter alarm messages and their meanings.
Message
ARRIVED AT WAYPOINT XXX! (XXX = waypoint name)
ENTERED INTO AVOIDANCE AREA!
EXCEEDED ANCHOR WATCH LIMIT!
EXCEEDED XTE LIMIT!
SPEED ALARM!
TEMPERATURE ALARM!
TRIP ALARM! MILEAGE EXCEEDED
GROUNDING ALARM
GUARDIAN ALARM (DEPTH AREA)
GUARDIAN ALARM (LAND AREA)
GUARDIAN ALARM (INTERTIDAL AREA)
GUARDIAN ALARM (ROCK)
GUARDIAN ALARM (SHORELINE CONSTRUCT)
GUARDIAN ALARM (OBSTRUCTION)
GUARDIAN ALARM (NO DATA AVAILABLE)
3-56
Meaning
Arrival alarm violated.
Proximity alarm violated.
Anchor watch alarm violated.
XTE alarm violated.
Speed alarm violated.
Water temperature alarm violated.
Trip alarm violated.
Grounding alarm (C=MAP
specification) violated. See next
paragraph.
Depth area (C=MAP specification)
violated. See next paragraph.
Land area (C=MAP specification)
violated. See next paragraph.
Intertidal area (C=MAP specification)
violated. See next paragraph.
Rock alarm (C=MAP specification)
violated. See next paragraph.
Shoreline construct (C=MAP
specification) violated. See next
paragraph.
Obstruction (C=MAP specification)
violated. See next paragraph.
No data alarm (C=MAP specification)
violated. See next paragraph.
3. PLOTTER OPERATION
3.12 Resetting Trip Distance
Trip distance is shown on the navigation data display. You can reset the trip distance to
zero as follows:
1. Press the MENU key.
2. Press the SYSTEM CONFIGURATION and GENERAL SETUP soft keys in that order to
show the GENERAL SETUP menu.
▲
KEY BEEP
ON
LANGUAGE
ENGLISH
RANGE UNIT
nm, kt
TEMPERATURE UNIT
F
DEPTH UNIT
ft
WIND UNIT
kt
WIND DATA
APPARENT
SPEED AVERAGING
0060 second (s)
LOCAL TIME OFFSET
+00:00
RESET TRIP LOG
NO
TIMEOUT DISPLAY SETTING
15sec
SAVE MOB KEY FUNCTION
SAVE SHIP
POSITION & MOB
WALLPAPER
DEFAULT
GENERAL
SETUP1
EDIT
NEXT
PAGE
RETURN
General setup menu, page 1
Note: AIS OPTION soft key is currently inoperative.
3. Use the Cursor pad to select RESET TRIP LOG, then press the EDIT soft key.
4. Use the Cursor pad to select YES, then press the ENTER soft key.
5. Press the MENU key to close the menu.
3-57
3. PLOTTER OPERATION
This page intentionally left blank.
3-58
4. VIDEO SOUNDER OPERATION
With connection of the optional Network Sounder ETR-6/10N/30N you can show video
sounder images on the display.
4.1
Sounder Displays
4.1.1
Selecting a sounder display
There are seven display modes from which to choose: dual frequency, single frequency,
marker zoom, bottom zoom, bottom lock, bottom discrimination, and A-scope.
To select a display;
1. Press the DISP key and then select sounder display desired.
2. If not already displayed, press the HIDE/SHOW key to show the sounder soft keys.
3. Press the DISPLY MODE soft key to show the display mode window.
DISPLAY MODE
¤ DUAL FREQ
¡ SINGLE FREQ
¡ MARKER ZOOM
¡ BOTTOM ZOOM
¡ BOTTOM LOCK
¡ BOTTOM DSCRM
HF: 200.0 kHz
LF: 50.0 kHz
Display mode window
4. Use the Cursor pad or the ENTER knob to select a display.
5. Press the RETURN soft key to close the window.
Note: On menus which show the RETURN soft key you may use it or the ENTER knob to
register setting and close the window.
4-1
4. VIDEO SOUNDER OPERATION
4.1.2
Description of sounder displays
Single-frequency display
Display mode
Variable Range Marker (white)
Depth scale
Minute marker
Soft keys
Time
0
0'30"
Zero line
Icons
(alarm, battery,
simulation)
S
I
M
F
SHIFT
50
Color bar
40
Temp.
scale
(orange)
52
Fish
echo
50
Cross-hair
cursor
100
30
AUTO/
D. BOX
FREQ
LF /HF
DISPLY
MODE
Water
temp.
graph
Water
temp.
display
SOUNDER
SINGLE
150
114
200
LF
Tx frequency
Bottom echo
Depth
Indications on the single frequency display
Note: The water temperature display requires an appropriate water temperature sensor. It
can be turned on or off with TEMPERATURE GRAPH on the SOUNDER MENU.
Selecting transmission frequency
The single frequency display shows either the LF (low frequency) picture or HF (high
frequency) picture. To select transmission frequency, press the FREQ LF/HF soft key. “LF”
or “HF” is highlighted on its key label with each press of the key.
0.0
Dual-frequency display
The dual-frequency display provides both
LF and HF pictures. This display is useful
for comparing the same picture with two
different sounding frequencies.
LF picture
The sounder uses ultrasonic pulses to
detect bottom conditions. The lower the
frequency of the pulse, the wider the
detection area. Therefore, the low
4-2
LF
HF
Dual-frequency display
4. VIDEO SOUNDER OPERATION
frequency is useful for general detection and judging bottom condition.
HF picture
The higher the frequency of the ultrasonic pulse the better the resolution. Therefore, the
high frequency is ideal for detailed observation of fish school.
low frequency
high frequency
Sounding area and transmission frequency
Marker-zoom display
The marker-zoom display expands a selected area of the normal sounder picture to full
vertical size of the screen on the left-half window. You may specify the portion to expand by
operating the VRM (Variable Range Marker), which you can shift with the ENTER knob.
The area between the VRM and zoom marker is expanded. The length of the segment is
equal to one division of the depth scale.
Note: The VRM is set independently from other displays in case of multiple displays.
Fish school
0'20"
0
42
-
Fish
school
44
42.0
-
50
46
48
50
80
100
-
MARKER-ZOOM
DISPLAY
HF
-
VRM
(White on color model)
This part
is zoomed.
Zoom marker
NORMAL
DISPLAY
Marker-zoom display plus normal sounder display
4-3
4. VIDEO SOUNDER OPERATION
Bottom-zoom display
The bottom-zoom display expands bottom and bottom fish echoes by the zoom range
selected on the SOUNDER RANGE SETUP menu (see paragraph 7.9.3), and is useful for
determining bottom hardness. A bottom displayed with a short echo tail usually means it is
a soft, sandy bottom. A long echo tail means a hard bottom.
0
-
--10
--20
--30
Bottom
80
BOTTOM-ZOOM
DISPLAY
0
20.0
50
100
HF
-
Zoom marker
NORMAL DISPLAY
Bottom-zoom display plus normal sounder display
Bottom-lock display
The bottom-lock display provides a compressed normal picture on the right half of the
screen and a 10 or 20 feet (3 or 6 meter) wide layer in contact with the bottom is expanded
onto the left half of the screen. This mode is useful for discriminating bottom fish from the
bottom echo. You may select the bottom lock range from the SOUNDER RANGE SETUP
menu. For details, see paragraph 7.9.3.
10
8
Fish
school
6
4
102
80
0
BOTTOM-LOCK
DISPLAY
0
------
50
100
HF
-
Zoom marker
This part
is zoomed.
NORMAL DISPLAY
Bottom-lock display plus normal sounder display
4-4
4. VIDEO SOUNDER OPERATION
Bottom discrimination display
The bottom discrimination mode displays the bottom echo to help you determine bottom
hardness. A bottom displayed with a short echo tail usually means it is a soft, sandy bottom.
A long echo tail means a hard bottom.
4
2
-
Bottom tail
Long tail = Hard bottom
Short tail = Soft bottom
0
20.0
50
-
Zoom marker
0
80
50
-
100
HF
-
BOTTOM
NORMAL DISPLAY
DISCRIMINATION
DISPLAY
Bottom discrimination display
A-scope display (display only)
The A-scope display, available in all modes, shows echoes at each transmission with
amplitudes and tone proportional to their intensities, on the right 1/10 of the screen. It is
useful for estimating fish species and bottom composition. To turn on the A-scope display,
press the DISPLAY MODE soft key, select display mode desired, then press the A-SCPE
soft key to show “ON” on its label. For modes other than SINGLE FREQ the screen must be
split horizontally to show the A-scope display.
0
50
100
84
HF
-
SINGLE FREQ DISPLAY
A-scope display
No response
Weak echo (fish)
Strong echo (bottom)
A-SCOPE
DISPLAY
A-scope display
4-5
4. VIDEO SOUNDER OPERATION
4.1.3
Selecting screen split method in combination displays
On combination sounder displays you can split the screen vertically or
horizontally, using the SPLIT soft key as below.
0.0
0.0
SPLIT
/
HF
SPLIT
/
LF
HF
LF
How to use the SPLIT soft key (example: dual frequency display)
4.2
Automatic Sounder Operation
Automatic sounder operation is useful when you are preoccupied with other tasks and do
not have the time to adjust the display.
4.2.1
How the automatic sounder works
The automatic sounder function automatically selects the proper gain, range scale and
clutter suppression level according to the depth. It works as follows:
The range changes automatically to locate the bottom on the lower half of the screen. The
range jumps to one step shallower range when the bottom echoes reach a half way point
of the full scale from the top and to one step deeper range when they come to the lower
edge of the scale.
The gain is automatically adjusted to display the bottom echo in reddish brown (default
color arrangement).
Clutter, which suppresses low level noise, is automatically adjusted.
4.2.2
Types of automatic sounder modes
Two types of automatic sounder modes are available: CRUISING and FISHING. CRUISING
is for tracking the bottom, and FISHING is for searching fish schools. CRUISING uses a
higher clutter rejection setting than FISHING therefore it is not recommended for fish
detection - weak fish echoes may be erased by the clutter suppression circuit.
4-6
4. VIDEO SOUNDER OPERATION
4.2.3
How to enable automatic sounder operation
1. If not displayed, press the HIDE/SHOW key to show the sounder soft keys.
2. Press the AUTO/D. BOX soft key.
AUTO MODE
▲
¤ CRUISING
¡ FISHING
¡ OFF (MANUAL)
▼
Mode/frequency window
3. Use the Cursor pad or the ENTER knob to select CRUISING or FISHING as
appropriate.
4. Press the RETURN soft key.
4.3
Manual Sounder Operation
Manual operation is useful for observing fish schools and bottom using a fixed gain setting.
The gain, range and range shift functions used together give you the means to select the
depth you can see on the screen. The basic range can be thought of as providing a
“window” into the water column and range shifting as moving the “window” to the desired
depth.
4.3.1
1.
2.
3.
4.
Selecting the manual mode
If not displayed, press the HIDE/SHOW key to show the sounder soft keys.
Press the AUTO/D. BOX soft key to show the mode/frequency window.
Select OFF (MANUAL).
Press the RETURN soft key.
4.3.2
Selecting display range
Press the [RANGE +] or [RANGE -] key to select a range. The default ranges in feet, meters,
fathoms and passi/braza are as below. Note that the range cannot be changed in the
automatic sounder mode.
Default sounder ranges
Range 1
Range 2
Range 3
Range 4
Range 5
Range 6
Range 7
Range 8
ETR-6/10N
ETR-30N
15 ft
30 ft
60 ft
120 ft
200 ft
400 ft
1000 ft
4000 ft
4500 ft
5m
10 m
20 m
40 m
80 m
150 m
300 m
1200 m
1500 m
3 fa
5 fa
10 fa
20 fa
40 fa
80 fa
150 fa
650 fa
900 fa
3 P/B
5 P/B
10 P/B
30 P/B
50 P/B
100 P/B
200 P/B
700 P/B
900 P/B
4-7
4. VIDEO SOUNDER OPERATION
4.3.3
Adjusting the gain
Normally, set the gain to the point where excessive noise does not appear on the screen.
Use a higher gain setting for greater depths and a lower setting for shallow waters.
Gain too high
Gain proper
Gain too low
Examples of proper and improper gain
Press the GAIN key to show the gain window, and adjust the ENTER knob or Cursor pad.
Current level is shown on the bar, and the setting range is 0-100(%). Press the RETURN
soft key to finish.
GAIN - LF
▲
57
HIGH
LOW
▼
Gain window
Note 1: On the dual-frequency display, the gain can be independently set for LF and HF.
Use the FREQ LF/HF soft key to select the frequency for which to adjust gain.
Note 2: Gain cannot be adjusted in the automatic sounder mode. The message
“SOUNDER GAIN CANNOT BE CHANGED IN AUTO MODE” is displayed when you
attempt to do so.
4.3.4
Shifting the range
The basic range may be shifted up or down as desired by pressing the SHIFT soft key
followed by adjusting the ENTER knob. Press the RETURN soft key to finish.
Shift
Shift concept
4-8
4. VIDEO SOUNDER OPERATION
4.4
Measuring Depth, Time
The VRM measures the depth and the cross-hair cursor, time.
1. Rotate the ENTER knob to shift the VRM; counterclockwise to shift it downward,
clockwise to shift it upward. You may also use the Cursor pad to shift the VRM.
2. Roll the Cursor pad horizontally to adjust the cross-hair cursor to measure time.
Depth to VRM
Time for a scan line to travel
from the right edge of the
display to the cross-hair cursor
0
0'33"
VRM (white)
40.0
50
Cross-hair
cursor
100
150
97
200
LF
How to measure depth and time
Note: If, when the range setting is over 1000 ft (m, fa, p/b), the VRM indication and depth
scale may overlap one another, shift the cross-hair cursor slightly to show them completely.
Further, when the display is shifted, the depth scale may obscure the time indication.
4.5
Reducing Interference
Interference from other acoustic equipment operating nearby or other electronic equipment
on your boat may show itself on the display as shown below.
Interference from
other sounder
Electrical inteference
Types of interference
To reduce interference, do the following:
4-9
4. VIDEO SOUNDER OPERATION
1. Press the MENU key.
2. Press the SOUNDER MENU soft key.
3. Select NOISE LIMITER, then press the EDIT soft key to show the noise limiter window.
NOISE LIMITER
▲
¤ OFF
¡ LOW
¡ MEDIUM
¡ HIGH
▼
Noise limiter window
4. Use the Cursor pad to select the degree of suppression desired (LOW, MEDIUM,
HIGH), or turn the noise limiter off.
5. Press the RETURN soft key followed by the MENU key to close the menu.
Turn the noise limiter circuit off when no interference exists, otherwise weak echoes may be
missed.
4.6
Reducing Low Level Noise
Light-blue dots may appear over most of the screen. This is mainly due to sediment in the
water, or noise. This noise can be suppressed by adjusting CLUTTER on the SOUNDER
menu.
Appearance of clutter
When the automatic sounder mode is used, clutter is automatically adjusted. To reduce low
level noise in manual sounder operation do the following:
1. Press the MENU key.
2. Press the SOUNDER MENU soft key.
3. Select CLUTTER, then press the EDIT soft key to show the clutter window.
CLUTTER
▲
09
▼
Clutter window
4. Adjust the Cursor pad upward or downward to select clutter rejection level desired; 0
4-10
4. VIDEO SOUNDER OPERATION
(OFF) through 16. The higher the number the higher the degree of suppression. Note
that the clutter suppressor may erase weak echoes. Therefore, turn off the clutter when
its use is not required.
5. Press the RETURN soft key followed by the MENU key to close the menu.
Note: Unlike the signal level feature, clutter does not reduce display colors. However, if you
do not wish to change the relation between weak and strong echoes, use signal level
instead.
4.7
Erasing Weak Echoes
Sediments in the water or reflections from plankton may be painted on the display in green
or light blue. These weak echoes may be erased as below.
Weak
echoes
Appearance of weak echoes
1. Press the MENU key.
2. Press the SOUNDER MENU soft key.
3. Select SIGNAL LEVEL, and press the EDIT soft key to show the signal level window.
SIGNAL LEVEL
▲
¤ OFF
¡ SL1
¡ SL2
¡ SL3
¡ SL4
¡ SL5
¡ SL6
▼
SIGNAL LEVEL
▲
¤ OFF
¡ SL1
¡ SL2
¡ SL3
▼
16-color display
8-color display
Signal level window
4. Use the Cursor pad to select level of erasure or OFF as appropriate. The higher the
number the stronger the echo that will be erased.
5. Press the RETURN soft key followed by the MENU key to close the menu.
Note: Unlike “clutter,” signal level reduces display colors. Therefore, if you do not wish to
reduce colors, use clutter instead.
4-11
4. VIDEO SOUNDER OPERATION
4.8
White Marker
The white marker functions to display a particular echo color in white. For example, you
may want to display the bottom echo in white to discriminate fish echoes near the bottom.
1. Press the MENU key.
2. Press the SOUNDER MENU soft key.
3. Select WHITE MARKER, then press the EDIT soft key to open the white marker
window.
WHITE MARKER
▲
OFF
▼
White marker window
4. Use the Cursor pad to select the color to display in white. As you use the Cursor pad,
the number in the white marker window changes, the white marker on the echo strength
bar shifts and the selected echo color is displayed in white.
White marker shows
← color currently
displayed in white.
Color bar (16 color) when white marker function is active
5. Press the RETURN soft key followed by the MENU key to close the menu.
To turn the white marker function off, display “OFF” in the white marker window.
4.9
Picture Advance Speed
The picture advance speed determines how quickly the vertical scan lines run across the
screen. When selecting a picture advance speed, keep in mind that a fast advance speed
will expand the size of the fish school horizontally on the screen and a slow advance speed
will contract it.
The advancement speed may be set independent of or synchronized with ship’s speed.
4.9.1
Advancement independent of ship’s speed
1. Press the MENU key.
2. Press the SOUNDER MENU soft key.
3. Select PICTURE ADVANCE, and press the EDIT soft key to open the picture advance
window.
4-12
4. VIDEO SOUNDER OPERATION
PICTURE ADVANCE
▲
¤ 2/1
¡ 1/1
¡ 1/2
¡ 1/4
¡ 1/8
¡ 1/16
¡ STOP
▼
Picture advance window
4. Use the Cursor pad to select speed desired. The fractions in the window denote the
number of scan lines produced per transmission. For example, 1/8 means one scan line
is produced every eight transmissions. STOP freezes the display and it is convenient for
observing an echo.
5. Press the RETURN soft key followed by the MENU key to close the menu.
Note: When using the plotter/sounder combination display, advancement of the sounder
picture may be temporarily interrupted while the plotter display is being shifted or its display
range is being changed.
4.9.2
Advancement synchronized with ship’s speed
With speed data provided by a speed-measuring device, picture advance speed may be set
according to ship’s speed, the ship’s speed dependent mode. As shown in the figure below
the horizontal scale of the display is not influenced by the change of ship’s speed, thus the
speed-dependent picture advance permits judgment of fish school size and abundance at
any speed. The choice “SPD SENSING PRR” means the ship’s speed dependent mode,
where the PRR changes automatically with ship’s speed.
Fish school shrinks as speed
is increased; expanded
as speed is decreased.
Normal Mode
Same size
fish schools
Speed
FULL
SPEED
HALF
SPEED
Actual Movement
Fish schools are shown
same size regardless
of ship’s speed.
Speed-Dependent Picture Advance Mode
How the speed-dependent picture advance mode works
4-13
4. VIDEO SOUNDER OPERATION
Activating/deactivating the speed-dependent picture advance mode
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Press the MENU key followed by the SOUNDER MENU soft key.
Select PRR LEVEL.
Press the EDIT soft key to open the setting window.
Use the Cursor pad to select SPD SENSING PRR.
Press the RETURN soft key followed by the MENU key to close the menu.
Note: Use the same speed data sentence (STG or STW) throughout the network for
smooth advancement of the sounder picture. See the paragraph 6.5 for how to output data
through the network.
4.10 Display Colors
You can select the number of colors and background color to display as follows:
1. Press the MENU key.
2. Press the SOUNDER MENU soft key.
3. Select HUE, then press the EDIT soft key to show the hue window.
HUE
▲
1
▼
Hue window
4. Use the Cursor pad to select hue number, referring to the table below. (You can see
the result of your selection on the display.)
Hue no. and background and echo colors
Hue No.
Echo Color
Background Color
1
16 color
Blue
2
8 color
Blue
3
16 color
Dark blue
4
8 color
Dark blue
5
16 color
White
6
8 color
White
7
16 color
Black
8
8 color
Black
9
Monochrome yellow, eight intensities
5. Press the RETURN soft key followed by the MENU key to close the menu.
4-14
4. VIDEO SOUNDER OPERATION
4.11 Alarms
The sounder section has five conditions which generate audio and visual alarms: bottom
alarm, fish alarm (bottom lock), fish alarm (normal) and water temperature alarm
(temperature sensor required).
You may set up the sounder alarms on the SOUNDER ALARM menu, which may be
displayed by pressing the ALARM key.
AUDIO ALARM
INTERNAL BUZZ
BOTTOM ALARM
OFF
TEMPERATURE ALARM
OFF
FISH ALARM
OFF
FISH ALARM (B/L)
OFF
SOUNDER
ALARM
EDIT
CLEAR
ALARM
RETURN
ALARM INFOMATION
NO ALARM
Sounder alarm menu
4.11.1 Audio alarm on/off
The audio alarm sounds whenever an alarm setting is violated. You can enable or disable
the audio alarm as follows:
1. Press the ALARM key to show the ALARM menu.
2. Use the Cursor pad to select ALARM AUDIO.
3. Press the EDIT soft key to show the audio alarm window.
AUDIO ALARM
¡ INT & EXT BUZZ
¤ INTERNAL BUZZ
¡ OFF
Alarm audio window
4. Use the Cursor pad to select INT & EXT BUZZ (Internal + External alarm), INTERNAL
BUZZ (Internal alarm) or OFF. External buzzer required to select “INT+EXT BUZZ.” OFF
globally turns the audio alarm on or off for all modes, including radar.
5. Press the ENTER soft key.
6. Press the ALARM key to close the menu.
4-15
4. VIDEO SOUNDER OPERATION
4.11.2 Bottom alarm
The bottom alarm sounds when the bottom echo is within the alarm range set. To activate
the bottom alarm, the depth must be displayed. Note that the bottom alarm is turned on or
off reciprocally with the bottom alarm on the plotter alarm menu.
1. Press the ALARM key to show the ALARM menu.
2. Use the Cursor pad to select BOTTOM ALARM.
3. Press the EDIT soft key to show the bottom alarm window.
BOTTOM ALARM
▲
¡
ON
0000.0-0000.0 ft
¤ OFF
▼
Bottom alarm window
4. Use the Cursor pad to select ON or OFF as appropriate. For ON, enter alarm range
with the Cursor pad and numeric keys: Adjust the Cursor pad to select digit; hit
appropriate numeric key to enter value.
5. Press the ENTER soft key or push the ENTER knob to register setting.
6. Press the ALARM key to close the menu.
4.11.3 Fish alarm
The fish alarm sounds when a fish echo is within the preset alarm range. Note that the
sensitivity of the fish alarm can be set on the SOUNDER SYSTEM SETUP menu.
1. Press the ALARM key to show the ALARM menu.
2. Use the Cursor pad to select FISH ALARM.
3. Press the EDIT soft key to show the fish alarm window.
FISH ALARM
▲
¡ ON
0000.0-0000.0 ft
¤ OFF
▼
Fish alarm window
4. Use the Cursor pad to select ON or OFF as appropriate. For ON, use the Cursor pad
and numeric keys to enter range: Adjust the Cursor pad to select digit; hit the
appropriate numeric key to enter value.
5. Press the ENTER soft key or push the ENTER knob to register setting.
6. Press the ALARM key to close the menu.
4-16
4. VIDEO SOUNDER OPERATION
4.11.4 Fish alarm (B/L)
The bottom-lock fish alarm sounds when a fish echo is within a predetermined distance
from the bottom. Note that the sensitivity of the fish alarm can be set on the SOUNDER
SYSTEM SETUP menu.
1. Press the ALARM key to show the ALARM menu.
2. Use the Cursor pad to select FISH ALARM (B/L).
3. Press the EDIT soft key to show the fish alarm (B/L) window.
FISH ALARM (B/L)
▲
¡ ON
0000.0-0000.0 ft
¤ OFF
▼
Fish alarm (B/L) window
4. Use the Cursor pad to select ON or OFF as appropriate. For ON, use the Cursor pad
and numeric keys to enter range: Adjust the Cursor pad to select digit; hit appropriate
numeric key to enter value.
5. Press the ENTER soft key or push the ENTER knob to register setting.
6. Press the ALARM key to close the menu.
4.11.5 Water temperature alarm
There are two types of water temperature alarms: WITHIN RANGE and OUT OF RANGE.
The WITHIN RANGE alarm sounds when the water temperature is within the range set, and
the OUT OF RANGE alarm sounds when the water temperature is higher or lower than the
range set. Note that the water temperature alarm is turned on or off reciprocally with the
water temperature alarm on the plotter menu.
1. Press the ALARM key to show the ALARM menu.
2. Use the Cursor pad to select TEMPERATURE ALARM.
3. Press the EDIT soft key to show the temperature alarm window.
TEMPERATURE ALARM
▲
¡ WITHIN RANGE
+000.0 - +000.0°F
¡ OUT OF RANGE
+000.0 - +000.0°F
¤ OFF
▼
Water temperature alarm window
4. Use the Cursor pad to select WITHIN RANGE, OUT OF RANGE or OFF as numeric
key to enter alarm range: Adjust the Cursor pad to select digit; hit appropriate numeric
key to enter value. To switch between plus and minus and vice versa use the +< - ->soft key.
5. Press the ENTER soft key or push the ENTER knob to register setting.
6. Press the ALARM key to close the menu.
4-17
4. VIDEO SOUNDER OPERATION
4.11.6 When an alarm setting is violated...
When an alarm setting has been violated the buzzer sounds and the speaker icon appears
in red. Press the CLEAR key to silence the alarm. At this time the color of the speaker icon
changes from red to background color. You can see which alarm has been violated on the
alarm menu display. In the example below the bottom alarm has been violated.
To see which alarm(s) has been violated:
1. Press the ALARM key. The name of the offending alarm is shown in the ALARM
INFORMATION window.
AUDIO ALARM
INTERNAL BUZZ
BOTTOM ALARM
OFF
TEMPERATURE ALARM
OFF
FISH ALARM
0020.0-0030.0ft
FISH ALARM (B/L)
OFF
SOUNDER
ALARM
EDIT
CLEAR
ALARM
RETURN
Alarm information
window
ALARM INFOMATION
FISH ALARM!
Speaker icon
Sounder alarm menu
2. Press the CLEAR ALARM soft key to acknowledge the alarm (and silence the buzzer if
it has not already been done with the CLEAR key). The color of the speaker icon
changes from red to background color. The icon remains on the screen until the reason
for the alarm is eliminated or the alarm is disabled. If more than one alarm has been
violated, the message CONTINUE appears at the bottom of the alarm information
window. In this case, press the NEXT INFO soft key to see which other alarms have
been violated.
Note: The alarm icon is red when an alarm setting is violated, and changes to
background color when the CLEAR key or CLEAR ALARM soft key is pressed. The
color remains the same regardless of how many times another alarm is violated.
3. Press the ALARM key to close the menu.
4-18
4. VIDEO SOUNDER OPERATION
Alarm messages
The table below shows the sounder alarm messages and their meanings.
Sounder alarm messages and their meanings
Message
DEPTH ALARM!
FISH ALARM!
TEMPERATURE ALARM!
Meaning
Bottom alarm violated.
Fish alarm violated.
Water temperature alarm violated.
4.12 Water Temperature Graph
The water temperature graph (appropriate sensor required) plots water temperature on the
sounder display. (See the figure on page 4-2.) It can be turned on or off as below.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Press the MENU key to open the menu.
Press the SOUNDER MENU soft key.
Select TEMPERATURE GRAPH and press the EDIT soft key.
Select OFF (default setting) or ON as appropriate.
Press the ENTER soft key.
Press the MENU key to close the menu.
4.13 Changing Pulse Repetition Rate
Pulse repetition rate can be changed. Normally, the highest rate (20) is used. When in
shallow waters, second reflection echoes may appear between surface and actual bottom
echo. In this case lower the PRR level. The option “SPD SENSING PRR” means the ship’s
speed dependent mode, where the PRR changes automatically with ship’s speed (required
speed input.) For further information about the ship’s speed dependent mode, see page
4-13.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Press the MENU key to open the menu.
Press the SOUNDER MENU soft key.
Select PRR LEVEL.
Press the EDIT soft key to open the setting window.
Use the Cursor pad to select the rate for repetition.
Press the ENTER soft key followed by the MENU key to close the menu.
Too small setting reduces the number of pulse repetition. This may cause a problem to
search fish schools. Select “20” unless multistage reflections appear on the display.
4-19
4. VIDEO SOUNDER OPERATION
4.14 Saving Sounder Picture to an SD Card
You may save the current sounder picture to an SD card, using a function key programmed
to save the sounder picture.
1. Program a function key in order to save the sounder picture. See paragraph 7.9.4 for the
procedure.
2. Hit the SHOW/HIDE key to show the function keys if they are not currently shown.
3. Press the function key programmed to save the sounder picture.
The sounder picture stops advancing and the message “NOW SAVING SOUNDER
PICTURE TO CARD” appears on the display while the picture is being saved. If no card is
inserted, the message “PLEASE INSERT THE CARD. PUSH ENTER KNOB TO
CONTINUE.” appears. If there is not sufficient memory remaining in the card the message
“THERE IS NO MEMORY TO SAVE PICTURE. PUSH ANY KEY TO CONTINUE.” appears.
After the picture has been recorded, normal sounder operation is restored.
4.15 Interpreting the Sounder Display
4.15.1 Zero line
The zero line (sometimes referred to as the transmission line) represents the transducer’s
position, and moves off the screen when a deep phased range is used.
Zero line
Shift
Zero line
4-20
4. VIDEO SOUNDER OPERATION
4.15.2 Bottom echo
Echoes from the bottom are normally the strongest and are displayed in reddish-brown, but
the color and width will vary with bottom composition, water depth, frequency, sensitivity,
etc.
In a comparatively shallow depth, a high gain setting will cause a second or sometimes a
third or a fourth echo to be displayed at the same interval between them below the first
echo trace. This is because the echo travels between the bottom and the surface twice or
more in shallow depths.
The color of the bottom echo can be used to help determine the density of the bottom
materials (soft or hard). The harder the bottom, the wider the trace. If the gain is set to show
only a single bottom echo on mud, a rocky bottom will show a second or third bottom return.
The range should be chosen so the first and second bottom echoes are displayed when
bottom hardness is being determined.
Intensity difference
in water depth
Rock base
Mud and sand
Second bottom
echo
Bottom echoes
4-21
4. VIDEO SOUNDER OPERATION
4.15.3 Fish school echoes
Fish school echoes will generally be plotted between the zero line and the bottom. Usually
the fish school/fish echo is weaker than the bottom echo because its reflection property is
much smaller compared to the bottom. The size of the fish school can be ascertained from
the density of the display.
Size of
fish school
Small
school
Large
school
Fish school echoes
4.15.4 Surface noise/Aeration
When the waters are rough or the boat passes over a wake, surface noise may appear near
the zero line. As surface turbulence is acoustically equivalent to running into a brick wall,
the bottom echo will be displayed intermittently. Similar noise sometimes appears when a
water temperature difference (thermocline) exists. Different species of fish tend to prefer
different temperature zones, so the thermocline may be useful to help identify target fish.
200 kHz tends to show shallow thermoclines better than 50 kHz.
In rough waters the display is occasionally interrupted due to below-the-ship air bubbles
obstructing the sound path. This also occurs when the boat makes a quick turn or reverses
movement. Lowering the picture advance speed may reduce the interruption. However,
reconsideration of the transducer installation may be necessary if the interruption occurs
frequently.
Surface noise
Caused by aerated
water
Thermocline
Surface noise/aeration
4-22
5.
This chapter intentionally left blank.
5-1
5. CHAPTER 5
This page intentionally left blank.
5-2
6. DATA TRANSFER
6. DATA TRANSFER
This chapter provides information for saving and replaying data to and from memory cards,
uploading and downloading data, loading waypoint data from Yeoman, and outputting data
through the network.
6.1
Memory Card Operations
The memory cards store these data: marks, lines, waypoints, routes, track, position, water
temperature and setting data (plotter only). The following memory cards may be used:
Kingstone: SD-M64B1 (64 MB), SD-M128B1 (128 MB)
Viking: SD-M32B1 (32 MB), SD-M64B1 (64 MB)
EP Memory: 32 MB, 64 MB
SANDISK: SDSDB-64-J60 (64 MB), SDSDB-128-J60 (128 MB)
Panasonic: RP-SD064BL1A (64 MB), RP-SD128BL1A (128 MB)
Toshiba: SD-NA064MT (64 MB), 128 SD-NA128MT (128 MB)
6.1.1
Deleting all data from memory cards (other than chart data)
Follow the procedure below to delete all data other than chart data from a memory card.
1. Insert a blank memory card into the card slot.
2. Press the MENU key followed by the SYSTEM CONFIGURATION, DATA TRANSFER,
UPLOAD/DOWNLOAD DATA and SAVE DATA TO MEMORY CARD soft keys to show
the SAVE DATA menu.
▲
TRACKS
OFF
MARKS & LINES
OFF
WAYPOINTS & ROUTES
OFF
SETTING DATA*
OFF
SAVE
DATA
EDIT
SAVE
FORMAT
RETURN
* = Plotter data only
Save data menu
3. Press the DELETE soft key. You are asked if you are ready to delete the memory card.
4. Push the ENTER knob to delete (or press the CLEAR key to escape). Do not remove
the card while its contents are being deleted. When the deleting is completed,
“COMPLETED DELETING USER DATA. PUSH ENTER KNOB TO CONTINUE.”
appears.
5. Push the ENTER knob to continue.
6-1
6. DATA TRANSFER
Note: If the memory card was not inserted correctly, the message “FAILED TO FORMAT
MEMORY CARD.” appears.
6.1.2
Saving data to a memory card
1. Insert a formatted memory card into the slot.
2. Press the MENU key followed by the CONFIGURATION, DATA TRANSFER,
UPLOAD/DOWNLOAD DATA and SAVE DATA TO MEMORY CARD soft keys to show
the SAVE DATA menu.
3. Use the Cursor pad to select item to save.
4. Press the EDIT soft key.
5. Use the Cursor pad to select ON.
6. Press the ENTER soft key.
7. Repeat steps 3 to 6 to choose other data to save if desired.
8. Press the SAVE soft key, then press the ENTER knob. The message “NOW SAVING
DATA TO MEMORY CARD. DO NOT TURN OFF DISPLAY UNIT UNTIL
COMPLETED.” appears.
When saving is completed, “COMPLETED SAVING DATA. PUSH ENTER KNOB TO
CONTINUE.” appears. Push the ENTER knob to continue.
Memory card messages
Various memory card messages appear to alert you to memory card-related error. These
are tabulated below.
Memory card messages
Message
Memory card is not
inserted. Please insert
memory card. Push
ENTER knob to continue.
Overwrite data?
(Track)
(Mark)
(WPT)
(Config)
Failed to save data. Push
ENTER knob to continue.
6-2
Reason
Memory card not
inserted.
Remedy
Push the ENTER knob to return to the
SAVE DATA display and then insert card.
Data type to be
recorded exists on
memory card. (Two or
more of same type of
data cannot be
recorded.)
Could not save data.
Push the ENTER knob to overwrite same
data type on the card, or press the CLEAR
key to escape.
Push the ENTER knob to continue.
6. DATA TRANSFER
6.1.3
Playing back data from a memory card
Data (track, marks, lines, waypoints, routes and setting data) can be loaded from a memory
card and displayed on the screen. This feature is useful for observing past data and setting
up the equipment for a specific purpose with “setting data.”
1. Press the MENU key followed by the SYSTEM CONFIGURATION and DATA
TRANSFER soft keys.
2. Press the UPLOAD/DOWNLOAD DATA soft key.
3. Press the LOAD DATA IN MEMORY CARD soft key to show the LOAD DATA menu.
▲
TRACKS
OFF
MARKS & LINES
OFF
WAYPOINTS & ROUTES
OFF
SETTING DATA*
OFF
WALLPAPER
OFF
LOAD
DATA
EDIT
LOAD
RETURN
* = Plotter data only
Load data menu
4. Use the cursor pad to select item to load.
5. Press the EDIT soft key. (The EDIT soft key is inoperative when no memory card is
inserted or there is no data in the memory card.)
6. Use the cursor pad to select ON. (Select OFF not to load selected data.) Press the
ENTER soft key. If the memory card does not contain the item selected, the unit beeps
and ON cannot be selected.
7. After selecting all items desired, press the LOAD soft key, then press the ENTER knob.
The message “NOW LOADING FROM MEMORY CARD.” appears.
8. After loading is completed, the message “COMPLETED LOADING DATA. PUSH
ENTER KNOB TO CONTINUE.” appears. Push the ENTER knob to continue.
Notes on loading data
Tracks: Since loaded track data is added to internal track, oldest track will be erased when
the track memory capacity is exceeded.
Waypoints & routes: The loaded data replaces like stored data.
Marks & lines: The loaded data is added to internal data. When the mark/line memory
becomes full no marks may be entered.
Setting data: The loaded data replaces current configuration settings. If the memory card
contents could not be loaded, push the ENTER knob to restart with default settings. Note
that track memory capacity is not saved or loaded. To use loaded setting data, turn the
power off and on again.
Wallpaper: Load desired wallpaper.
6-3
6. DATA TRANSFER
6.2
Uploading, Downloading Data
You can upload/download waypoints, routes, marks and lines from/to a PC, through the
DATA 4 port at the rear of the display unit. Note that radar and sounder data cannot be
uploaded or downloaded.
6.2.1
Setting communication software on the PC
The communication format (RS-232C) with the PC is as follows:
Baud Rate:
4800 bps
Character Length: 8 bits
Stop bit:
1 bit
Parity:
None
X Control:
XON/XOFF (fixed)
The following data can be downloaded/uploaded between a PC and this equipment:
Waypoint data (In alphanumeric order)
Route data (In order of route number)
End of sentence
Note 1: There are two kinds of data for route data: route data and route comment data.
Note 2: DGPS position fix is not available when uploading or downloading data.
Note 3: Wiring information appears on the UPLOAD or DOWNLOAD menu.
6.2.2
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Uploading or downloading data
Connect the PC to the equipment.
Press the MENU key to show the main menu.
Press the SYSTEM CONFIGURATION soft key.
Press the DATA TRANSFER soft key.
Press the UPLOAD/DOWNLOAD DATA soft key.
Press the DOWNLOAD WPT/ROUTE TO PC or UPLOAD WPT/ROUTE FROM PC soft
key.
UPLOAD
RS232C SETTINGS
· 4800BPS,
· 8BIT,
·1STOP BIT,
· PARITY NONE,
· CONTROL Xon/Xoff
EDIT
UPLOAD
WIRING INFORMATION
DISPLAY UNIT PC: DSUB9
TxD >1>-WHITE-<2<RD
RxD >2>-BLUE-<3<SD
RD-A
>3>-YELLOW
RD-B
>4>-GREEN
+12V
>5>-RED
EXT BUZZ>6>-BLACK
GND
>7>-SHIELD-<5<SG
SELECT
BPS
RETURN
▲
▲
WAYPOINT & ROUTES
OFF
MARKS & LINES
OFF
WAYPOINT & ROUTES
OFF
MARKS & LINES
OFF
DOWNLOAD
RS232C SETTINGS
· 4800BPS,
· 8BIT,
·1STOP BIT,
· PARITY NONE,
· CONTROL Xon/Xoff
EDIT
WIRING INFORMATION
DISPLAY UNIT PC: DSUB9
TxD >1>-WHITE-<2<RD
RxD >2>-BLUE-<3<SD
RD-A
>3>-YELLOW
RD-B
>4>-GREEN
+12V
>5>-RED
EXT BUZZ>6>-BLACK
GND
>7>-SHIELD-<5<SG
Upload and download menus
7. To change the baud rate, press the SELECT BPS soft key.
6-4
DWLOAD
SELECT
BPS
RETURN
6. DATA TRANSFER
BAUD RATE
▲
¤
¡
¡
4800 bps
9600 bps
19200 bps
▼
Baud rate window
8. Select baud rate, then press the ENTER soft key.
9. Press the DWLOAD or UPLOAD soft key. You are asked if you are ready to download
or upload waypoints and routes.
10. Push the ENTER knob to download (upload).
Waypoint data format
PFEC, GPwpl, llll.llll, a, yyyyy.yyy, a, c----c, c, c----c, a <CR><LF>
1 2
3
4
5
6 7
8
Waypoint data format
1: Waypoint latitude
2: N/S
3: Waypoint longitude
4: E/W
5: Waypoint name (Number of characters is fixed to 6 and space code is placed when the
number of characters are less than 6.)
6: Waypoint color
7: Waypoint comment (1 byte for mark code + 13 characters of comment.)
1st byte of mark code: Fixed to “@”.
2nd byte of mark code: Internal mark code. See Note 1.
8. Information of marking waypoint. Always set to “A”.
“A”: Displayed
“V”: Not displayed
Note 1: The following characters can be used for comments:
_ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ0123456789&'#
=9
=>
=B
=F
=;
=:
=?
=<
=@
=D
=C
=G
==
=A
=E
=H
Characters available for comment
6-5
6. DATA TRANSFER
Route data menu
$GPRTE, x, x, a, ccc, c----c, c----c, ... , c----c <CR><LF>
5
1 2 3
4
6
12
Route data format
1: Number of sentences required for one complete route data (1 to 4). See Note 2.
2: Number of sentences currently used (1 to 4)
3: Message mode (Always set to C)
4: Route No. (001 to 300, 3 digits required)
5 through 12: Waypoint name (Max. 8 names, length of each waypoint name is fixed to 7
byte)
Note : A route can may contain 35 waypoints, and the GPRTE sentence for one route data
may exceed 80 byte limitation. In this case, route data is divided into several GPRTE
sentences (Max. 4 sentences). This value shows the number of sentences the route data
has been divided.
Route comment data format
$PFEC, GPrtc,
xx, c----c <CR><LF>
1
2
Route comment format
1: Route No. (01 to 200, 3 digits required)
2: Route comment (Max. 16 characters, variable length)
The same characters of the comment for waypoint comment can be used.
End of sentence
$PFEC, GPxfr,
CTL, E <CR><LF>
End of sentence
6-6
6. DATA TRANSFER
6.3
Loading Waypoint Data from Yeoman
Waypoint data can be loaded from a Yeoman to this equipment. Connect the Yeoman to a
DATA port on this equipment and then follow the procedure below.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Press the MENU key.
Press the SYSTEM CONFIGURATION key.
Press the DATA TRANSFER soft key.
Press the RECEIVE YEOMAN DATA soft key.
You are asked if you are sure to receive waypoint data from Yeoman equipment. Push
the ENTER knob to receive the data. The message “NOW RECEIVING YEOMAN DATA.
PUSH SOFT KEY ‘STOP’ TO STOP RECEIVING.” Is displayed. If waypoint capacity is
reached the message “WAYPOINTS FULL. NO MORE WAYPOINT CAN BE
RECEIVED. PUSH ANY KEY TO STOP.” appears. To stop receiving, press the STOP
soft key.
After waypoints have been received, press the MENU key.
6-7
6. DATA TRANSFER
6.4
Receiving Data Via Network Equipment
1. You can receive waypoints, routes, marks and lines from NavNet equipment.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Press the MENU key.
Press the SYSTEM CONFIGURATION soft key.
Press the DATA TRANSFER soft key.
Press the RECEIVE DATA VIA NETWORK soft key.
HOST NAME
PLOT - - - MARKS & LINES
OFF
WAYPOINTS & ROUTES
OFF
RECEIVE
DATA
EDIT
RCV
RETURN
Receive data menu
6. Select HOST NAME, then press the EDIT soft key.
HOST NAME
▲
¤
¡
¡
¡
▼
1 (NAVNET1)
2 (NAVNET2)
3 (NAVNET3)
4 (NAVNET4)
Host name window
7. Use the cursor pad to choose host name from which to receive data, then push the
ENTER knob.
8. Select the data you wish to receive, then press the EDIT soft key. For example, select
MARKS & LINES.
MARKS & LINES
▲
¡ ON
¤ OFF
▼
Marks & lines window
9. Select ON or OFF as appropriate, then press the ENTER soft key.
10. Turn WAYPOINTS & ROUTES on or off as appropriate.
11. Press the RCV soft key followed by the ENTER knob. The message “NOW RECEIVING
DATA.” is displayed. If no data could be found, the message “(HOST NAME)’ IS NOT
FOUND.” appears. When the transfer is completed, the message “DATA TRANSFER
COMPLETED. PUSH ENTER KNOB TO CONTINUE.” appears. Push the ENTER knob
to finish.
12. Press the MENU key to close the menu.
6-8
6. DATA TRANSFER
6.5
Outputting Data Through the Network
Follow the procedure below to output data through the network. To prevent trouble, do not
output the same data from multiple sources.
1. Press the MENU key to open the menu.
2. Press the SYSTEM CONFIGURATION, SYSTEM SETUP, PORT SETUP and OUTPUT
THROUGH NETWORK soft keys.
SELECT SENTENCE
AAM
APB
BOD
BWR
DPT
GGA
GLL
GTD
MTW
RMA
RMB
RMC
VHW
VTG
WPL
XTE
ZDA
HDT
HDG
MWV
ZTG
----------------------
SELECT
SNTNC
ON/OFF
RETURN
Select sentence menu
3.
4.
5.
6.
Select sentence with the cursor pad.
Press the ON/OFF soft key to turn sentence on or off.
Press the RETURN soft key.
Press the MENU key to close the menu.
AAM: Waypoint arrival alarm
APB: Autopilot sentence B
BOD: Bearing origin to destination
BWR: Bearing and distance to waypoint - rhumb line
DPT: Depth
GGA: Global positioning system(GPS) fix data
GLL: Geographic position - latutude/longitude
GTD: Own ship information-TD
MTW: Water temperature
RMA: Recommended minimum specific LORAN-C data
RMB: Recommended minimum navigation information
RMC: Recommended minimum specific GPS/TRANSIT data
VHW: Water speed and heading
VTG: Course over ground and ground speed
WPL: Waypoint location
XTE: Cross-track error, measured
ZDA: Time and date
HDT: Heading true,
HDG: Heading, deviation and variation
MWV: Wind speed and angle
ZTG: Time to go
6-9
6. DATA TRANSFER
This page intentionally left blank.
6-10
7. CUSTOMIZING YOUR UNIT
This chapter describes the various options which allow you to set up your unit to suit your
needs. For mode-specific menus, e.g. radar, plotter and sounder, make sure that you select
the appropriate display when making changes or viewing menu options.
7.1
General Setup
This paragraph shows you how to set up functions common to the plotter, radar and
sounder displays. This is done on the GENERAL SETUP menu, which you may display
from any mode. These items include language, key beep, units of measurement, data
sources, etc.
1. Press the MENU key to display the main menu.
2. Press the SYSTEM CONFIGURATION soft key.
3. Press the GENERAL SETUP soft key.
ON
LANGUAGE
ENGLISH
RANGE UNIT
nm, kt
TEMPERATURE UNIT
°C
DEPTH UNIT
ft
WIND UNIT
kt
SPEED AVERAGING
0060second (s)
LOCAL TIME OFFSET
+00:00
RESET TRIP LOG
NO
TIMEOUT DISPLAY SETTING
15sec
SAVE MOB KEY FUNCTION
SAVE SHIP
POSITION & MOB
WALLPAPER
DEFAULT
GENERAL
SETUP 1
EDIT
NEXT
PAGE
RETURN
▲
▲
KEY BEEP
LAT/LON DISPLAY
DD° MM.MMM'
TD DISPLAY
LORAN C
SPEED
SOG
POSITION DISPLAY
LAT/LON
TIME DISPLAY
24 HOURS
INFRARED REMOTE MODE
A
RANGE & BEARING MODE
RHUMB LINE
BEARING READOUT
MAGNETIC
MAGNETIC VARIATION
AUTO 7.0° W
GENERAL
SETUP 2
EDIT
PREV.
PAGE
Page 2
Page 1
General setup menu
Note: AIS OPTION soft key is currently inoperative.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Press the NEXT PAGE or PREV. PAGE soft key to switch pages if necessary.
Use the Cursor pad to select item.
Press the EDIT soft key.
Use the Cursor pad to select option desired, then press the ENTER soft key.
Press the MENU key to close the menu.
7-1
7. CUSTOMIZING YOUR UNIT
Contents of general setup menu
Item
Key Beep
Language
Description
Turns key beep on/off.
Chooses menu language.
Range Unit
Chooses unit of range and speed
measurement.
Chooses unit of water temperature
measurement.
Chooses unit of depth measurement.
Chooses unit of wind measurement.
Chooses how to display wind data.
Temperature
Unit
Depth Unit
Wind Unit
Wind Data
Speed
Averaging
Local Time
Offset
Reset Trip Log
Timeout
Display
Setting
Save MOB
Key Function
Wallpaper
Lat/Lon
Display
Calculation of ETA is based on average
ship’s speed over a given period. If the
period is too long or too short,
calculation error will result. Change this
setting if calculation error occurs. The
default setting is suitable for most
conditions.
Enter time difference between local
time and UTC time to use local time.
Resets trip log.
Sets number of seconds to show a
window (for example, BRILL, GAIN)
before it is erased from the screen.
Defines the function of the SAVE/MOB
key.
Chooses what to display in menu
background.
Requirements for user wallpaper
Size: 252 KB or less, 480(H)x640(V)
Name: wallpaperv.png
No. of Colors: 256
Compression Level: None
Interlace: None
Permeation Color: None
Chooses how many digits (or seconds)
to display after decimal point in latitude
and longitude position.
Settings
On, Off
English, French, German, Italian, Portuguese,
Spanish, Danish, Swedish, Norwegian
nm, kt; km, km/h; sm, mph; nm & yd, kt; nm &
m, kt; km & m, km/h; sm & yd, mph
°C,°F
m, ft, fa, P/B (Passi/Braza)
Kt, km/h, MPH, m/s
Apparent: The wind felt aboard a moving
vessel. It is the combination of the true wind
and the boat wind. True: The true speed and
direction of the wind, not modified by the
effects of the boat's movement.
0-9999 seconds
-13:30 to +13:30
Yes, No
15 s, 30 s, 60 s, Continue (no timeout)
Save Ship Position & MOB: Short press to
save ship position, long press to save MOB.
MOB Without Confirmation: Position saved
as MOB position without confirmation. This
setting is only effective with automatic range
selection and with waypoint marker displayed
on radar display.
Quick Point Function: Position saved as
quick point.
Default: Default wallpaper
User: User wallpaper. To use your own
wallpaper, save Microsoft Photo Editor or
Adobe Photoshop created png image (see
conditions at left) to SD card, load file to
equipment (see Chapter 6) and then choose
this User option.
DD°MM.MM’, DD°MM.MMM’,
DD°MM.MMMM’, DD°MM’SS.S”
(Con’t on next page)
7-2
7. CUSTOMIZING YOUR UNIT
Contents of general setup menu (con’t from previous page)
Item
Description
Settings
TD Display
Chooses type of TD to display.
Loran C, Decca
Speed
Chooses speed format to display.
SOG (Speed over ground), STW (Speed
through water)
Position
Display
Chooses how to display position.
Latitude, Longitude; Loran or Decca TDs,
or MGRS (Military Grid Reference
System).
What is MGRS?
For convenience, the world is generally
divided into 6° by 8° geographic areas,
each of which is given a unique
identification, called the Grid Zone
Designation. These areas are covered by
a pattern of 100,000-meter squares.
Each square is identified by two letters
called tie 100,000-meter square
identification. This identification is unique
within the area covered by the Grid Zone
Designation. Exceptions to this general
rule have been made in the post to
preserve the 100,000-meter
identifications on mapping that already
exists.
A reference keyed to a gridded map of
any scale is made by giving the 100,000meter square identification together with
the numerical location. Numerical
references within the 100,000-mater
square are given to the desired accuracy
in terms of the easting (E) and northing
(N) grid coordinates for the point. The
Grid Zone Designation usually is prefixed
to the identification when references are
made in more than one grid zone
designation area.
Examples of MGRS indications:
18S: Locating a point within the Grid
Zone Designation
18SUU: Locating a point within a
100,000-meter square
18SUU80: Locating a point within a
10,000-meter square
18SUU8401: Locating a point within a
1,000-meter square
18SUU836014: Locating a point within
a 100-meter square
Time Display
Chooses time notation.
12 hours, 24 hours
Infrared
Remote
Mode
A remote controller can be set
exclusively for use with a specific
display unit, in the case of multiple
NavNet display units. For further details
see the Installation Manual.
A, B, C, D
(Con’t on next page)
7-3
7. CUSTOMIZING YOUR UNIT
Contents of general setup menu (con’t from previous page)
Item
Description
Settings
Range &
Bearing
Mode
Chooses how to calculate range and
bearing.
Great Circle: Shortest course between
two points on the surface of the earth.
Rhumb Line: Straight line drawn
between two points on a nautical chart.
Bearing
Readout
Chooses bearing display format for
course, course over ground and cursor
bearing.
True, Magnetic
Magnetic
Variation
The magnetic variations for all areas of
the earth are preprogrammed into this
unit. The preprogrammed variation is
accurate for most instances, however
you may wish to manually enter a
variation. For manual input, select
Auto, Manual
Manual, hit the EDIT soft key, enter
value, then hit the ENTER soft key to
set. “AUTO” requires position data.
7.2
Radar Setup
This paragraph explains how to customize the radar display to suit your operational needs.
7.2.1
Radar display setup
The radar display may be set up from the RADAR DISPLAY SETUP menu, which contains
items such as EBL reference and cursor position format.
1. Press the MENU key to show the main menu.
2. Press the RADAR DISPLAY SETUP soft key.
▲
EBL REFERENCE
RELATIVE
CURSOR POSITION
RNG & BRG-REL
TUNING
AUTO
TX SECTOR BLANKING
OFF 000° 001°
NOISE REJECTION
ON
BACKGROUND COLOR
BLACK/GREEN
ECHO COLOR
GREEN
WATCHMAN TIME
5 minutes
RANGE UNIT
nm
DISPLAY
SETUP
EDIT
D. BOX
RETURN
Radar display setup menu
7-4
7. CUSTOMIZING YOUR UNIT
Contents of radar display setup menu
Item
Description
Settings
EBL
Reference
References EBL bearing, shown in the
EBL data box, to North (True) or
heading (Relative). Relative with no
heading input. True only in course-up,
north-up and true motion.
True, Relative
Cursor
Position
Chooses how to display cursor position.
LAT/LON: Lat/Long position of cursor
TD: Loran C or Decca TDs
RNG & BRG-REL: Range and bearing
in relative bearing.
RNG & BRG-TRUE: Range and
bearing in true bearing.
MGRS: MGRS format position
Note: “RNG & BRG-TRUE” requires
heading data, true bearing. Reverts to
relative bearing when heading data is
lost.
Tuning
Selects receiver tuning method. For
further details see the paragraph “2.3
Tuning.”
Auto, Manual
TX Sector
Blanking
Turns on/off dead sector graphic, which
shows area where no echoes are
received. To set sector, select ON, then
enter range. Max. sector is 135°.
Dashed lines mark the dead sector.
Note that noise may occasionally
appear in the TX sector when the echo
trail feature is turned on.
On, Off
Dead sector
Noise
Rejection
Electrical noise, appearing on the
screen as “speckles,” may be
suppressed with the noise rejector.
Note that some forms of interference
cannot be suppressed.
Off, Low, High
(Con’t on next page)
7-5
7. CUSTOMIZING YOUR UNIT
Contents of radar display setup menu (con’t from previous page)
Item
Description
Settings
Background
Color
Chooses colors of background,
range rings and characters.
Effective when HUE soft key is set
for MANUAL SET.
Black/Green
Background: Black
Rings: Green
Characters: Green
Black/Red
Background: Black
Rings: Green
Characters: Red
Blue/White
Background: Blue
Rings: White
Characters: White
DK Blue/White
Background: Dark Blue
Rings: Green
Characters: Red
White/Green
Background: White
Rings: Green
Characters: Green
Echo Color
Chooses echo color.
Yellow, Green,
Multi-color. (Multi-color shows echoes
in red, yellow or green in order of
descending strength.)
Watchman
Time
Sets watchman stand-by period.
For further details see the
paragraph “ 2.23 Watchman.”
5, 10, 20 minutes
Range Unit
Select unit of range measurement.
nm, km, sm
7-6
7. CUSTOMIZING YOUR UNIT
7.2.2
Radar range setup
You may choose the radar ranges you wish to use, from the RADAR RANGE SETUP menu.
After choosing the ranges desired, change the range with the RANGE key to activate range
settings. Available ranges depends on the radar used.
At least two ranges must be turned on. When less than two ranges are turned on you
cannot escape from the RADAR RANGE SETUP menu.
Note that this function is not available with the GD-1720C.
1. Press the MENU key to show the main menu.
2. Press the RADAR RANGE SETUP soft key to show the RADAR RANGE SETUP menu.
RANGE
SETUP
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON/OFF
▲
▲
0.125nm
0.25nm
0.5nm
0.75nm
1nm
1.5nm
2nm
3nm
4nm
6nm
8nm
12nm
16nm
24nm
36nm
48nm
64nm
72nm
RETURN
0.25km
0.5km
0.75km
1km
1.5km
2km
3km
4km
6km
8km
12km
16km
24km
36km
48km
64km
72km
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
RANGE
SETUP
ON/OFF
RETURN
MAXIMUM RANGE XXkm*
MAXIMUM RANGE XXnm*
* = Max. range depends on network radar used and is set on the network radar at installation.
Range unit: nm
Range unit: km
Radar range setup menu
3.
4.
5.
6.
Use the Cursor pad to select the range which you want to turn on or off.
Press the ON/OFF soft key to turn a range on or off as appropriate.
Press the RETURN soft key to register settings.
Press the MENU key to close the menu.
Model
1824C, 1724C, 1734C
1834C
1934C
1944C
1954C
Maximum Range
24 nm, km, sm
36 nm, km, sm
48 nm, km, sm
64 nm, km, sm
72 nm, km, sm
7-7
7. CUSTOMIZING YOUR UNIT
7.2.3
Function key setup
The function keys provide one-touch execution of a desired function. The default radar
function key settings are as shown in the table below.
Function Key
Default Function
Function Key Label
1
Turn heading line off.
HL
2
Turn range rings on/off.
RNG
3
Turn echo trail on/off.
TRL
4
Turn display offcenter on/off.
OFC
5
STBY/TX
TX
If the above settings are not to your liking you may change them as follows:
1. Press the MENU key.
2. Press the FUNCTION KEY SETUP soft key.
▲
Function key
setting
Function
key label
FUNC
KEY
SOFT KEY 1
HL: HDG LINE OFF
EDIT
H
SOFT KEY 2
RNG: RINGS ON/OFF
SOFT KEY 3
TRL: ECHO TRAIL
SOFT KEY 4
OFC: OFFCENTER
SOFT KEY 5
TX: STBY/TX
L
R
N
G
T
R
L
O
F
C
RETURN
T
X
Radar function key menu
3. Select the function key you want to program, then press the EDIT soft key.
SOF TKEY 1
▲
Scroll
down
ALM: GUARD ALARM
EBL: EBL
VRM: VRM
TTM: TTM ON/OFF
WMK: WPT ON/OFF
WTM: WATCHMAN
ACQ: ACQUISITION
TX : STBY/TX
RSR: RADAR SOURCE
DBX: D. BOX ON/OFF
CHG: CHANGE CNTRL
QP : QUICK POINT
▲
OFF
HL: HDG LINE OFF
MOD: MODE
GAI: GAIN
SEA: A/C SEA
RAI: A/C RAIN
FTC: FTC
ES: ECHO STRETCH
PLS: PULSE LENGTH
ZOM: ZOOM
OFC: OFFCENTER
TRL: ECHO TRAIL
RNG: RINGS ON/OFF
TLL: TLL OUTPUT
SOFT KEY 1
Radar function key options
7-8
7. CUSTOMIZING YOUR UNIT
4. Select function desired with the Cursor pad, then press the ENTER soft key or ENTER
knob to register your selection.
5. Press the MENU key to close the menu.
Radar function keys
Menu Item
Function
Function Key
Label
OFF
Assigns no function.
—
HL: HDG LINE OFF
Turns heading line off.
HL
MOD: MODE
Selects presentation mode.
MOD
GAI: GAIN
Shows gain sensitivity adjustment window.
GAI
SEA: A/C SEA
Shows A/C SEA adjustment window.
SEA
RAI: A/C RAIN
Shows A/C RAIN adjustment window.
RAI
FTC: FTC
Displays FTC window. Available with Model 1700
series radar. Inoperative otherwise.
FTC
ES: ECHO STRETCH
Turns echo stretch on/off.
ES
PLS: PULSE LENGTH
Sets pulselength (long or short).
PLS
ZOM: ZOOM
Turns zoom on/off.
ZOM
OFC: OFFCENTER
Press to shift display center to cursor location.
Press again to turn shift off and return cursor to
display center.
OFC
TRL: ECHO TRAIL
Starts/stops echo trails.
TRL
RNG: RINGS ON/OFF
Turns range rings on/off.
RNG
TLL: TLL OUTPUT
Outputs cursor position, in NMEA format, to
navigator.
TLL
ALM: GUARD ALARM
Displays alarm soft keys.
ALM
EBL: EBL
Switches control between EBL1 and EBL2 with
each press.
EBL
VRM: VRM
Switches control between VRM1 and VRM2 with
each press.
VRM
TTM: TTM ON/OFF
Turns TTM (Tracked Target Message) display
on/off.
TTM
WMK: WPT ON/OFF
Turns waypoint marker on/off.
WMK
WTM: WATCHMAN
Turns watchman on/off.
WTM
ACQ: ACQUISITION
Acquires and tracks cursor-selected target.
(Requires ARP-equipped Model 18x4/19x4 series
network radar.)
ACQ
TX: STBY/TX
Toggles between standby and transmit
TX
RSR: RADAR SOURCE
Selects source for radar picture.
RSR
DBX: D. BOX ON/OFF
Turns data boxes on/off.
DBX
CHG: CHANGE CNTRL
Changes display control in combination display.
CHG
QP: QUICK POINT
Quick point function
QP
Note: To use CHANGE CNTRL set it on all displays, with the same soft key number.
7-9
7. CUSTOMIZING YOUR UNIT
7.3
Plotter Setup
This paragraph provides the information necessary for setting up the plotter display.
7.3.1
Navigation options
Navigation options, for example, waypoint switching method, may be set on the PLOTTER
SETUP menu. For C-MAP specification, this menu is followed by the PLOTTER SETTINGS
menu.
1. Show the plotter display, then press the MENU key open the main menu.
2. Press the PLOTTER SETUP soft key.
WAYPOINT SWITCHING
ARRVL ALM CRCL
COURSE VECTOR
LINE
SET GOTO METHOD
1POINT
QP
INTERNAL
SAFE ROUTE CHECK*
OFF
PLOTTER
SETUP
EDIT
D. BOX
RETURN
*: C-MAP only.
Plotter setup menu
Contents of plotter setup menu
Item
Waypoint
Switching
Course
Vector
Set GOTO
Method
QP
Safe Route
Check
(C-MAP only)
D. BOX
(soft key)
7-10
Description
Chooses waypoint switching method. See
“switching waypoints” on page 3-45.
You may extend a line from the own ship position to
show ship’s course. It may be a vector (length
depends on ship’s speed) or a simple line (course
bar).
Sets the method by which to navigate to a quick
point. See “3.10.1 Navigating to a quick point.”
Set “EXT WPT (RMB)” when a destination waypoint
is displayed from a external navigation equipment.
The safe route check feature checks for interfering
objects (such as wrecks) within a route when
creating or editing a route.
Sets up data boxes. See paragraph 7.5.
Settings
Perpendicular, Arrvl Alm
Crcl, Manual
Vector, Line, Off
1 Point, 35 Points,
35 Pts/Port Service
EXT WPT (RMB),
Internal
On, Off
7. CUSTOMIZING YOUR UNIT
7.3.2
Function key setup
The function keys provide one-touch execution of a desired function. The default plotter
function key settings are as shown in the table below.
Function
Key
1
2
3
4
5
Function Key Label
Default Function
Start/stop recording/plotting own ship’s track.
Edit mark/line.
Ruler (measure range and bearing between two points).
Add new waypoint.
Alphanumeric waypoint list.
TRK
EML
RUL
ADD
ALP
If the above settings are not to your liking you may change them as follows:
1. Press the MENU key.
2. Press the FUNCTION KEY SETUP soft key.
FUNC
KEY
▲
Function key
setting
Function
key label
SOFT KEY 1
TRK: TRACK ON/OFF
SOFT KEY 2
EML: EDIT MK/LINE
SOFT KEY 3
RUL: RULER
SOFT KEY 4
ADD: ADD NEW WPT
SOFT KEY 5
ALP: ALPHA LIST
EDIT
T
R
K
E
M
L
R
U
L
A
D
D
RETURN
A
L
P
Plotter function key menu
3. Select the soft key you want to program, then press the EDIT soft key. A menu shows
the functions available and the current selection is highlighted.
7-11
7. CUSTOMIZING YOUR UNIT
Scroll
OFF
ADD: ADD NEW WPT
MWP: MOVE WPT
RUL: RULER
GWP: GOTO WPT
GRT: GOTO ROUTE
EML: EDIT MK/LINE
TRK: TRACK ON/OFF
TTM: TTM ON/OFF
DTT: DEL TGT TRK
ALP: ALPHA LIST
LCL: LOCAL LIST
RTE: ROUTE LIST
▲
SOF TKEY 1
DBX: D. BOX ON/OFF
CHG: CHANGE CNTRL
QP : QUICK POINT
Plotter function key options
4. Select function desired with the Cursor pad, then press the ENTER soft key or ENTER
knob to register your selection.
5. Press the MENU key to close the menu.
7-12
7. CUSTOMIZING YOUR UNIT
Plotter function keys
Menu Item
Function
Function Key
Label
OFF
Assigns no function.
—
ADD: ADD NEW WPT
Registers waypoint at cursor position. Place cursor
for waypoint location, then press function key.
ADD
MWP: MOVE WPT
Moves selected waypoint to different position.
Select waypoint, press function key, select new
position, then press the ENTER knob.
MWP
RUL: RULER
Measures range and bearing between two points.
Press START POINT soft key to change starting
point if necessary. Range and bearing between two
points appears at the top of the screen.
RUL
GWP: GOTO WPT
Specify waypoint to set as destination. Enter
waypoint name in window, then press the ENTER
soft key.
GWP
GRT: GOTO ROUTE
Specify route to follow. Enter route name in window,
then press the ENTER soft key.
GRT
EML: EDIT MK/LINE
Displays mark & line menu. Press appropriate soft
key to access menu item.
EML
TRK: TRACK ON/OFF
Each press starts or stops recording/plotting own
ship’s track.
TRK
TTM: TTM ON/OFF
Turns TTM (target track) display on/off.
TTM
DTT: DEL TGT TRACK
Erases all TTM track.
DTT
ALP: ALPHA LIST
Displays waypoint alphanumeric list.
ALP
LCL: LOCAL LIST
Displays waypoint local list.
LCL
RTE: ROUTE LIST
Displays route list.
RTE
DBX: D. BOX ON/OFF
Shows/hides data boxes.
DBX
CHG: CHANGE CNTRL
Changes control in combination screen.
CHG
QP: QUICK POINT
Quick point function
QP
Note: To use CHANGE CNTRL set it on all displays, with the same soft key number.
7-13
7. CUSTOMIZING YOUR UNIT
7.4
Chart Setup
This paragraph shows you how to setup digital charts, from offsetting chart position to
turning chart attributes on or off.
7.4.1
Chart offset
In some instances position may be off by a few seconds. For example, the position of the
ship is shown to be at sea while it is in fact moored at a pier. You can compensate for this
error by offsetting chart position as shown in the procedure below.
1. Show the plotter display, then press the MENU key followed by the CHART SETUP and
CHART OFFSET soft keys.
34 24. 3456 N 359.9°M
+124
24. 3456 W 59.9kt
CHART
OFFSET
SET
OFFSET
RESET
OFFSET
RETURN
Plotter display, chart offset selected
2. Use the Cursor pad to place the cursor at the correct latitude and longitude position of
own ship.
3. Press the SET OFFSET soft key.
4. Press the MENU key to close the menu. The “chart offset icon” ( ) appears at the top of
the display.
To cancel chart offset, press the RESET OFFSET soft key at step 3 in the above
procedure.
7-14
7. CUSTOMIZING YOUR UNIT
7.4.2
Navionics GOLD chart attributes
Navionics GOLD chart attributes may be turned on or off from the CHART DETAILS menu,
which you may display as follows:
1. Press the MENU key.
2. Press the CHART SETUP and CHART DETAILS soft keys.
Page 1
CHART
DETAILS
▲
▲
LAT/LON GRID
GREEN
TEXT INFORMATION
ON
WAYPOINTS
LARGE
WAYPOINT NAMES
ON
CHART BORDER LINES
ON
LANDMASS*
BRT YELLOW
NAVAIDS*
ON
LIGHT SECTOR INFO
ON
OTHER SYMBOLS*
WHITE
EDIT
CNTOUR
LINE
NEXT
PAGE
OBJECT INFORMATION
ALL ON
CHART DISPLAY
DETAILED
NAVAIDS SYMBOL
INERNATIONAL
CAUTION & ROUTING DATA
ON
MARINE FEATURES
ON
LAND FEATURES
ON
CHART
DETAILS
EDIT
PREV.
PAGE
RETURN
*: Not used.
Page 2
Chart details menu (Navionics GOLD)
Contents of chart details menu (Navionics GOLD)
Item
Lat/Lon Grid
Description
Latitude and longitude grids
Text Information
Waypoints
Waypoint Names
Chart Border Lines
Light Sector Info
Object Information
Geographic place, name
Waypoint size
Waypoint name
Border lines (indices)
Lighthouse viewing sector
Map data
Chart Display
Navaids Symbol
Choose level of detail for map
Choose what kind of navaids
symbols to display.
Turn caution and routing data on
or off.
Caution & Routing
Data
Settings
Red, yellow, green, light-blue,
purple, blue, white, Off
On, Off
Large, Small, Off
On, Off
On, Off
On, Off
Off, All On (display area data for
cursor-selected object), Points
On (display only point data for
cursor-selected object)
Detailed, Simple
International, US
On, Off
(Con’t on next page)
7-15
7. CUSTOMIZING YOUR UNIT
Contents of chart details menu (Navionics GOLD) (con’t from previous page)
Item
Description
Marine Features
Turn marine features on or off.
Land Features
Turn land features on or off.
CONTOUR LINE Soft key
Spot Soundings
Turn water depth display on or off.
Safety Contour
Paint areas in dark blue (default
color) which are shallower than
depth value set.
Depth Contour
7.4.3
Display depth contours.
Settings
On, Off
On, Off
On, Off
2m (or equivalent ft, fa or PB)
5 m (or equivalent ft, fa or PB)
10 m (or equivalent ft, fa or PB)
20 m or equivalent ft, fa or PB)
ALL: Display all depth contours
5 m: Display only 5 m* depth
contours
10 m: Display only 10 m* depth
contours.
20 m: Display only 20 m* depth
contours
OFF: Turn off depth contours.
* Or equivalent ft, fa or PB.
C-MAP chart attributes
Displaying the CHART DETAILS menu
C-MAP chart attributes may be turned on or off from the CHART DETAILS menu:
1. Press the MENU key.
2. Press the CHART SETUP and CHART DETAILS soft keys.
CHART
DETAILS
PERSPECTIVE
ON
DE-CLUTTER
ON
CHART DISPLAY MODE
FULL
SAFETY STATUS
PLOTTER/OVERLAY
WAYPOINT
PLOTTER/OVERLAY
WAYPOINT NAME
PLOTTER/OVERLAY
NAMES
PLOTTER/OVERLAY
BUOYS NAME
PLOTTER/OVERLAY
NAV-AIDS
US
LIGHT SECTORS
PLOTTER/OVERLAY
PLOTTER/OVERLAY
EDIT
UNDERWATER OBJECTS
DEPTH
INFO
PLOTTER/OVERLAY
RIVERS & LAKES
DEPTH
INFO
PLOTTER/OVERLAY
NATURAL FEATURES
PLOTTER/OVERLAY
CULTURAL FEATURE
NEXT
PAGE
PLOTTER/OVERLAY
LANDMARK
PLOTTER/OVERLAY
RETURN
LAT/LON GRID
PLOTTER/OVERLAY
CHART BOUNDARIES
AUTO PLOTTER/OVERLAY
MIXING
OFF
CHART LEVEL
UNLOCK
Page 1
Page 2
Chart details menu (C-MAP)
7-16
CHART
DETAILS
PORTS & SERVICE
EDIT
FLASHING PLOTTER/OVERLAY
ATTENTION AREAS
PLOTTER/OVERLAY
TIDES CURRENTS
PLOTTER/OVERLAY
SEABED TYPE
PREV.
PAGE
7. CUSTOMIZING YOUR UNIT
CHART DETAILS menu description
CHART DETAILS menu description
Object
PERSPECTIVE
DE-CLUTTER
CHART
DISPLAY MODE
Content
Perspective
display on/off
Overlapping
object on/off
PLOT
Description
Turns perspective display on.
Turns perspective display off.
Removes overlapping objects from
display.
Displays overlapping objects.
All chart attributes are displayed.
Some attributes such as SEABED
TYPE, TRACKS and ROUTES are
displayed.
Setting for use in fishing.
Only NAV AIDS and water depth are
shown.
User chooses which chart attributes to
turn on or off.
Safety status ON (See Safety Status
Indication on page 7-18 for
description.)
Safety status OFF
Shown on plotter and overlay
displays.
Shown on plotter display.
Waypoint markers and waypoint
names are turned off. Waypoint
names are not displayed regardless if
WAYPOINT NAME (below) is set to
ON.
Shown on plotter and overlay
displays.
Shown on plotter display.
Waypoint names are turned off.
Shown on plotter and overlay
displays.
Shown on plotter display.
OFF
Names are turned off.
Name of buoys
PLOT/OVERLAY
Lighthouses,
buoys, etc.
PLOT
OFF
US
US SIMPLE
Shown on plotter and overlay
displays.
Shown on plotter display.
Buoy names are turned off.
NOAA symbols are shown.
Complex object shown with single
icon.
International symbols are shown.
Complex object shown with single
icon.
Shown on plotter and overlay
displays.
Shown on plotter display.
Navaids are turned off.
Light sectors displayed.
Light sectors displayed and flashing.
(Con’t on next page.)
Choose chart
display mode
Settings
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
FULL
SIMPLE
FISHING
LOW
CUSTOM
SAFETY
STATUS*1
WAYPOINT
WAYPOINT
NAME
NAMES
BUOYS NAME
NAV-AIDS
Safety status
indication
Waypoints marks
and waypoint
names
Waypoint names
Text for land and
sea areas
ON
OFF
PLOT/OVERLAY
PLOT
OFF
PLOT/OVERLAY
PLOT
OFF
PLOT/OVERLAY
INT
INT SIMPLE
PLOT/OVERLAY
LIGHT
SECTORS
Light sector
PLOT
OFF
ON
FLASHING
7-17
7. CUSTOMIZING YOUR UNIT
CHART DETAILS menu description (con’t from previous page)
Object
ATTENTION
AREAS
TIDES &
CURRENTS
Content
Attention areas
PLOT
Description
Shown on plotter and overlay
displays.
Shown on plotter display.
Attention areas are turned off.
Shown on plotter and overlay
displays.
Shown on plotter display.
Tidal station and current station are
not shown. Tidal graph is also turned
off.
Shown on plotter and overlay
displays.
Shown on plotter display.
Tidal station and current station are
not shown. Tidal graph is also turned
off.
Shown on plotter and overlay
displays.
Shown on plotter display.
Ports and services are not shown.
Near Service also not shown.
Shown on plotter and overlay
displays.
Shown on plotter display.
Tracks and routes are turned off.
Shown on plotter and overlay
displays.
Shown on plotter display.
OFF
Underwater objects are turned off.
Rivers and lakes
PLOT/OVERLAY
Natural features
PLOT
OFF
PLOT/OVERLAY
Cultural features
PLOT
OFF
PLOT/OVERLAY
Landmarks
PLOT
OFF
PLOT/OVERLAY
Shown on plotter and overlay
displays.
Shown on plotter display.
Rivers and lakes are turned off.
Shown on plotter and overlay
displays.
Shown on plotter display.
Natural features are turned off.
Shown on plotter and overlay
displays.
Shown on plotter display.
Cultural features are turned off.
Shown on plotter and overlay
displays.
Shown on plotter display.
Landmarks are turned off.
Shown on plotter and overlay
displays.
Shown on plotter display.
Latitude and longitude grids are
turned off.
(Con’t on next page.)
Tidal station and
current station
Setting
PLOT/OVERLAY
PLOT
OFF
PLOT/OVERLAY
PLOT
OFF
SEABED TYPE
Seabed type
PLOT/OVERLAY
PLOT
OFF
PORTS &
SERVICES
Ports and
services
PLOT/OVERLAY
PLOT
OFF
TRACKS &
ROUTES
UNDERWATER
OBJECTS
RIVERS &
LAKES
NATURAL
FEATURES*2
CULTURAL
FEATURES*3
LANDMARKS*4
LAT/LON GRID
Tracks and routes
Below-surface
obstructions such
as wrecks
Latitude and
longitude grids
PLOT/OVERLAY
PLOT
OFF
PLOT/OVERLAY
PLOT
OFF
PLOT/OVERLAY
PLOT
OFF
7-18
7. CUSTOMIZING YOUR UNIT
CHART DETAILS menu description (con’t from previous page)
Object
CHART
BOUNDARIES
Content
Chart boundary
lines
Setting
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
Description
Shown on plotter and overlay
displays.
Chart border lines are shown for the
last four charts in a chart card on the
plotter and overlay displays
Chart border lines show on plotter and
overlay displays.
Chart border lines show on plotter
display.
Chart boundaries are turned off.
Mixing is active.
Mixing is disabled.
LOCK
UNLOCK
Keeps current chart scale.
Chart scale may chosen freely.
AUTO
PLOT/OVERLAY
PLOT
MIXING
CHART LEVEL
Changes chart
scale to fit whole
chart on display
Maintains current
chart scale
regardless of
zoom setting
*1 SAFETY STATUS INDICATION
The following indications are shown beneath the range indication to denote safety status:
SAFETY STATUS indication
NORMAL
BEST MAP
DATA OFF
DE-CLUTTER
DANGER
ZOOM indications:
NORMAL: Chart is displayed at compilation scale.
U.ZOOM: Red when chart is under-zoomed more
than twice compilation scale, gray otherwise.
O.ZOOM: Red when chart is over-zoomed more
than twice compilation scale, gray otherwise.
CHART LOC: Red when chart is zoomed more
than twice compilation scale, gray otherwise.
BEST MAP: Red when a more detailed chart is
beneath cursor position.
DATA OFF: Red when the below-mentioned
objects or a layer within a layer is not displayed
by the user. Objects: DEPTH/SOUNDINGS,
WRECKS/OBSTRUCTIONS, TRACKS/ROUTES,
ATTENTION AREAS, NAVAIDS
DE-CLUTTER: Appears when the de-clutter
function is active.
DANGERS: Red when grounding alarm is
violated.
CAUTIONS: Red if vessel enters prohibited area
when grounding alarm is active.
7-19
7. CUSTOMIZING YOUR UNIT
*2 NATURAL FEATURES: Any topographic features formed by the action of natural
process.
*3 CULTURAL FEATURES: Any man made topographic feature; built-up areas, roads.
*4 LANDMARK: Any prominent objects such as monument, building, silo, tower etc. on land
which can be used in determining a location or a direction.)
DEPTH INFO soft key
1. Press the MENU key.
2. Press the CHART SETUP and CHART DETAILS soft keys.
3. Press the DEPTH INFO soft key.
DEPTH
DEPTH AREA
INFO
PLOTTER
DEPTH AREAS LIMIT
EDIT
00002-00009 m
DEPTH LINES & SOUNDINGS
PLOTTER/OVERLAY
DEPTH LINES & SOUNDINGS LIMIT
00000-000305 m
ROCKS DEPTH LIMIT
00000 - 00009 m
RETURN
DEPTH INFO menu
DEPTH INFO menu description
DEPTH AREAS: Choose the display where to fill in color the depths selected at DEPTH
AREAS LIMIT.
Setting
Description
PLOT/OVERLAY Turns on depth area display on
plotter and overlay displays.
PLOTTER
Turns on depth area display on
plotter display.
OFF
Turns off depth area display.
7-20
Default Setting
PLOTTER
7. CUSTOMIZING YOUR UNIT
DEPTH AREAS LIMIT: Choose the shallow, medium and deep depths to color according to
depth.
Setting
Setting Range
Default Setting
DEPTH AREAS LIMIT-SHALLOW
0-15000 m
0-49212 ft
0-8202 fa
0-9090 pb
2 m, 5 ft, 1 fa, 1 pb
DEPTH AREAS LIMIT-MEDIUM
DEPTH AREAS LIMIT-DEEP
9 m, 30 ft, 5 fa, 6 pb
18 m, 60 ft, 10 fa, 11 pb
DEPTH LINES & SOUNDINGS: Choose where to display depth contours, depth data, etc.
Setting
Description
Default Setting
PLOT/OVERLAY
Shows depth lines and soundings on the plotter and
overlay displays.
PLOT/OVERLAY
PLOTTER
Shows depth lines and soundings on the plotter display.
OFF
Turns off depth lines and soundings.
DEPTH LINES & SOUNDINGS LIMIT: Chooses the depth range at which to show depth
lines and soundings (depth contours, depth data, etc.)
Setting
Setting Range
Default Setting
DEPTH LINES AND SOUNDINGS LIMIT-SHALLOW
0-15000 m
0-49212 ft
0-8202 fa
0-9090 pb
0 m, 0 ft, 0 fa, 0 pb
DEPTH LINES AND SOUNDINGS LIMIT-DEEP
305 m, 1000 ft, 167 fa,
185 pb
ROCKS DEPTH LIMIT: Chooses range for rocks depth display.
Setting
Setting Range
Default Setting
ROCKS DEPTH LIMIT-SHALLOW
0-304 m
0-999 ft
0-166 fa
0-184 pb
0 m, 0 ft, 0 fa, 0 pb
ROCKS DEPTH LIMIT-DEEP
9 m, 30 ft, 5 fa, 6 pb
7-21
7. CUSTOMIZING YOUR UNIT
7.5
Data Boxes Setup
You may select the data to show in the data boxes for the plotter, radar and sounder
displays. Six boxes may be displayed in case of small size data box and two for large size
data box.
1. Display the radar, plotter or sounder display, whichever you want to set.
2. Press the MENU key to open the main menu.
3. Press one of the following sets of soft keys depending on the display selected at step 1.
Plotter mode: PLOTTER SETUP, D. BOX
Radar mode: RADAR DISPLAY SETUP, D. BOX
Sounder mode: SOUNDER MENU, D. BOX
DATA
BOX
▲
DATABOX SIZE
SMALL
POSITION
WAYPOINT
COG
SOG
STW
BEARING
RANGE
TIME TO GO
ETA
TEMPERATURE
DEPTH
TRIP LOG
DATE
TIME
WIND
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
EDIT
RETURN
Data box menu
4. Use the Cursor pad to select an item, then press the EDIT soft key.
5. Select ON or OFF as desired.
6. Press the ENTER soft key or the ENTER knob to register your selection. Six items may
be set to ON for small data boxes; two for large data boxes.
7. Repeat steps 4-6 to turn other items on or off.
8. Press the MENU key to close the menu.
7-22
7. CUSTOMIZING YOUR UNIT
7.6
Hot Page Setup
Six user-arrangeable hot pages are provided for quick selection of desired display. If the
default hot pages are not to your liking you may change them as shown below.
1. Press the MENU key followed by pressing the SYSTEM CONFIGURATION, SYSTEM
SETUP, HOT PAGE & NAV DISP SETUP and HOT PAGE SETUP soft keys in that
order.
2. Use the Cursor pad to select the hot page number to set, then press the EDIT soft key.
The full-screen selection window appears.
HOT PAGE 1
RADAR
PLOTTER SOUNDER
NAV DATA OVERLAY
Hot page setup menu
7-23
7. CUSTOMIZING YOUR UNIT
3. Rotate the ENTER knob to select the full-screen picture desired and push the ENTER
knob. A set of combination screens, corresponding to the full-screen selected, appears.
HOT PAGE 1
10
20
-----
Combination screen selection window
4. Rotate the ENTER knob to select the full screen or combination screen desired and
push it to set.
7.7
Navigator Setup
This section provides the information necessary for selecting the type of navigator
connected to your plotter.
7.7.1
Navigation data source
The NAV SETUP menu mainly selects the source of
nav data. For GPS receiver other than the GP-320B,
speed averaging and local time offset (to use local
time) are also available. Press the MENU key
followed by the SYSTEM CONFIGURATION, NAV
OPTION and NAV SOURCE SETTINGS soft keys to
display this menu.
POSITION SOURCE
ALL
SPEED SOURCE
ETR
TEMPERATURE SOURCE
ETR
DEPTH SOURCE
ETR
STW CALIBRATION
+00%
TEMP CALIBRATION
+00.0 F
DEPTH CALIBRATION
+00ft
WIND AVERAGING
001 seconds (s)
WIND DIRECTION OFFSET
S000.0
WIND SPEED CALIBRATION
+00%
STW
30.0kt
DEPTH
50.0ft
WIND SPEED
--.-kt
7-24
TEMP
+41.3 F
WIND DIR
---.-
NAV
SETUP
EDIT
RETURN
7. CUSTOMIZING YOUR UNIT
Contents of nav setup menu
Item
Description
Settings
Position
Source
Chooses source of position data.
FURUNO BB GPS: GPS Receiver
GP-310B/320B
GP: GPS navigator (via NETWORK
or NMEA port)
LC: Loran C navigator (via
NETWORK or NMEA port)
ALL: Multiple navaid connection (via
NETWORK or NMEA port)
Speed
Source
Chooses source of speed data
ETR (NavNet sounder), NMEA
Temperature
Source
Chooses source of water temperature data.
ETR, NMEA. Select ETR to show
water temperature data fed from the
network sounder.
Depth
Source
Chooses source of depth data.
ETR (NavNet sounder), NMEA
STW
Calibration
Calibrates NMEA speed data. Enter amount
in percentage.
-50 to +50%
Temp
Calibration
Calibrates NMEA temperature data. Enter
offset to correct NMEA temperature data.
-040.0°F to +40.0°F (or equivalent
in °C)
Depth
Calibration
Calibrates NMEA depth data. Enter offset to
correct NMEA depth data.
-15.0 to +60.0 m (or equivalent in ft,
fa or P/B)
Wind
Averaging
Enter a value to smooth wind speed/direction
data. Ship’s bow is referenced to smooth
wind vector movement.
1-600 s
Wind
Direction
Offset
Offsets wind direction data.
S180°-P180°
Wind Speed
Calibration
Offsets NMEA wind speed data. Enter
amount in percentage.
-50 to +50%
7-25
7. CUSTOMIZING YOUR UNIT
7.7.2
GPS receiver setup (Set equipped with GP-310B/320B)
The GPS SETUP menu sets up the GPS Receiver GP-320B. Press the MENU key followed
by the SYSTEM CONFIGURATION, NAV OPTION and GPS SENSOR SETTINGS soft
keys to display this menu.
GEODETIC DATUM
WGS-84
POSITION SMOOTHING
000 second(s)
SPD/CSE SMOOTHING
005 second(s)
LATITUDE OFFSET
0.000’N
LONGITUDE OFFSET
0.000’E
DISABLE SATELLITE
__ __ __
LATITUDE
38 00.000’ N
LONGITUDE
123 00.000’ E
ANTENNA HEIGHT
005 m
GPS FIX MODE
2D/3D
COLD START
NO
GPS
SETUP
EDIT
GPS
STATUS
WAAS
SETUP*
RETURN
*: Only when the GP-320B is connected.
GPS setup menu
Contents of GPS setup menu
Item
Description
Settings
Geodetic Datum
Geodetic datum is a reference for geodetic
survey measurements consisting of fixed
latitude, longitude and azimuth values
associated with a defined station of
reference. You must have the correct
geodetic datum selected in your plotter so
that it will reference the correct point on
the chart for a given latitude and longitude.
Although WGS-84 is now the world
standard, other categories of charts still
exist. Refer to Appendix for a full list of
geodetic datum.
See Appendix for full list.
(Con’t on next page)
7-26
7. CUSTOMIZING YOUR UNIT
Contents of GPS setup menu (con’t on previous page)
Item
Description
Settings
Position Smoothing
When the DOP or receiving condition is
unfavorable, the GPS fix may change
greatly, even if the vessel is not moving.
This change can be reduced by smoothing
the raw GPS fixes. A setting between 000
to 999 is available. The higher the setting
the more smoothed the raw data. If the
setting is too high, the response time
required to show a change of latitude and
longitude will be too long. This is
especially noticeable if the vessel is
moving fast. Increase the setting if the
GPS fix changes randomly.
0-999 seconds
Spd/Cse Smoothing
During position fixing, ship’s velocity
(speed and course) is directly measured
by receiving GPS satellite signals. The raw
velocity data may vary too much
depending on receiving conditions and
other factors. You can reduce this random
variance by increasing the smoothing. The
higher the smoothing setting, the more the
raw data will be averaged. If this setting is
high, the response to speed and course
changes will slow. For no smoothing, enter
all zeroes.
0-999 seconds
Latitude, Longitude
Offset
Offsets latitude position to further refine
position accuracy.
0.001’S – 9.999’N
0.001’E – 9.999’W
(Con’t on next page)
7-27
7. CUSTOMIZING YOUR UNIT
Contents of GPS setup menu (con’t on previous page)
Item
Description
Settings
Disable Satellite
Every GPS satellite is broadcasting
abnormal satellite number(s) in its
Almanac, which contains general orbital
data about all GPS satellites, including
those which are malfunctioning. Using this
information, the GPS receiver
automatically eliminates any
malfunctioning satellite from the GPS
satellite schedule. However, the Almanac
sometimes may not contain this
information. If you hear about a
malfunctioning satellite from another
source, you can disable it manually. Enter
satellite number (two digits, max. 3
satellites),then press the ENTER soft key.
Max. 3 satellites
Latitude
Sets initial latitude position after cold start.
Use the N < - -> S soft key to switch
coordinate.
—
Longitude
Sets initial longitude position after cold
start. Use the W < - -> E soft key to switch
coordinate.
—
Antenna Height
Enters the height of the GPS antenna unit
above sea surface. For further details refer
to the installation manual.
0-999 m
GPS Fix Mode
Chooses position fixing method: 2D (three
satellites in view), 2D/3D (three or four
satellites in view whichever is greater).
2D, 2D/3D
Cold Start
Clears the Almanac to receive the latest
Almanac.
No, Yes
GPS STATUS
(soft key)
Displays GPS satellite status display.
Requires GPS Receiver GP-310B/320B or
GPS navigator outputting the data
sentence GSA or GSV. For further details
see the chapter on Maintenance.
7-28
7. CUSTOMIZING YOUR UNIT
WAAS SETUP
Press the WAAS SETUP soft key to show the WAAS SETUP display.
Note: This function requires GP-320B antenna. r
Contents of WAAS SETUP menu
Item
Description
Settings
WAAS MODE
Select ON to use the WAAS mode.
On, Off
WAAS SEARCH
WAAS satellite can be searched automatically
or manually. For manual search, enter
appropriate WAAS satellite number.
Auto, Manual
WAAS ALARM
When the WAAS signal is lost, the audible
alarm sounds with the visual message “NO
WAAS SIGNAL.”
On, Off
On: Alarm continues to sound until the WAAS
positioning mode is available again or the alarm
is recognized by key operation.
Off: Alarm sounds three times.
CORRECTION
DATA SET
7.7.3
Selects the type of message for WAAS
correction. Use “02 (default setting)” until the
system becomes operational.
00 to 27, 99
TD display setup
The TD SETUP menu sets which Loran C or Decca chain to use to display TD position.
(Connection of a Loran C or Decca navigator is not necessary to display TD position.)
1. Press the MENU key.
2. Press the SYSTEM CONFIGURATION, NAV OPTION and TD SETUP soft keys to
display the TD SETUP menu.
LORAN-C
GRI
9940:11-27
U.S. WEST COAST
CORRECTION 1
+000.0 µs
CORRECTION 2
+000.0 µs
DECCA
CHAIN
01 R-G
S BALTIC
CORRECTION 1
+00.00 lane
CORRECTION 2
+00.00 lane
TD
SETUP
EDIT
RETURN
TD setup menu
7-29
7. CUSTOMIZING YOUR UNIT
Displaying Loran C TDs
1. Select GRI, then press the EDIT soft key to show the GRI & station pair window.
GRI & STATION PAIR
▼
▲
9940
11-27
▼
U.S. WEST COAST
Loran GRI & station pair window
2. Adjust the Cursor pad upward or downward to select GRI code.
3. Roll the Cursor pad rightward to show the display below, to enable selection of station
pair.
GRI & STATION PAIR
▲
▼
9940
11-27
▼
U.S. WEST COAST
Loran C GRI & station pair window
4. Adjust the Cursor pad vertically to select station pair.
5. Press the ENTER soft key to register your selection.
6. If necessary, you may enter a position offset to refine Loran C position accuracy. Select
(GRI) CORRECTION 1 or CORRECTION 2, then press the EDIT soft key. Enter
correction value with the Cursor pad and ENTER knob. Use the + < − −> - soft key to
switch from plus to minus and vice versa. Press the ENTER soft key or push the ENTER
knob.
7. Press the RETURN soft key twice.
8. Press the GENERAL SETUP soft key followed by the NEXT PAGE soft key.
9. Select “LORAN C” from “TD DISPLAY” and “TD” from “POSITION DISPLAY.”
10. Press the MENU key twice to close the menu.
7-30
7. CUSTOMIZING YOUR UNIT
Displaying DECCA TDs
1. Select CHAIN, then press the EDIT soft key to show the chain & station pair window.
CHAIN STATION PAIR
01
▼
▲
R-G
▼
S BALTIC
Decca chain and station pair window
2. Adjust the Cursor pad upward or downward to select Decca chain number.
3. Roll the Cursor pad rightward to show the display below, to enable selection of station
pair.
CHAIN STATION PAIR
▲
▼
01
R-G
▼
S BALTIC
Decca chain and station pair window
5. Adjust the Cursor pad upward or downward to select station pair (R: red, G: green and
P: purple).
6. Press the ENTER soft key to register your selection.
7. If necessary, you may enter position offset to refine Decca position. Select (CHAIN)
8.CORRECTION 1 or CORRECTION 2, then press the EDIT soft key. Enter correction
value with the Cursor pad and ENTER knob. Use the
+ < − −> - soft key to switch from plus to minus and vice versa. Press the ENTER soft key
or push the ENTER knob.
5. Press the RETURN soft key twice.
6. Press the GENERAL SETUP soft key followed by the NEXT PAGE soft key.
7. Select “DECCA” from “TD DISPLAY” and “TD” from “POSITION DISPLAY.”
8. Press the MENU key twice to close the menu.
7-31
7. CUSTOMIZING YOUR UNIT
7.8
Nav Data Display Setup
The nav data display shows various navigation data, fed from a navigator, network
equipment, etc. You may select the data to display and where to display it as follows:
1. Press the MENU key to open the main menu.
2. Press the SYSTEM CONFIGURATION, SYSTEM SETUP, HOT PAGE & NAV DISP
SETUP and NAV DATA DISPLAY SETUP soft keys.
NAV
DATA
1
POSITION
Positions
for full
screen
Positions
for half
screen
2
WPT POS
3
SOG
4
STW
5
COG
6
BEARING
7
RANGE
8
DEPTH
9
TEMP
10
LOG TRIP
11
TTG
EDIT
RETURN
12
ETA
13
DATE
14
TIME
Nav data setup screen
3. Use the Cursor pad to select a location.
4. Press the EDIT soft key. The following display appears.
DISPLAY DATA
¤
¡
¡
¡
¡
¡
¡
¡
¡
¡
¡
¡
¡
¡
¡
POSITION
WPT POSITION
SOG
STW
COG
BEARING
RANGE
DEPTH
TEMPERATURE
TRIP LOG
TIME TO GO
ETA
DATE
TIME
WIND
Nav data setup window
5. Select the data to display, then press the ENTER soft key or ENTER knob to register
your selection.
6. Press the RETURN soft key followed by the MENU key to close the menu.
7-32
7. CUSTOMIZING YOUR UNIT
7.9
Sounder Setup
This section shows you how to customize your network sounder to your liking. You can set
fish alarm sensitivity, fine tune sensors, etc.
7.9.1
System setup
1. Show the sounder display, then press the MENU key.
2. Press the SOUNDER SYSTEM SETUP soft key.
FISH ALARM LEVEL
MEDIUM
TRANSMISSION
ON
TVG-HF
5
TVG-LF
5
ECHO OFFSET-HF
+00
ECHO OFFSET-LF
+00
BOTTOM LEVEL-HF
+000
BOTTOM LEVEL-LF
+000
KP PULSE
INTERNAL
SMOOTHING
OFF
TLL OUTPUT
ON
Page 1
SYSTEM
SETUP1
EDIT
SENSOR
SETUP
STC-HF
00
STC-LF
00
FREQ. ADJ.-HF
+00.0 %
FREQ.ADJ.-LF
+00.0 %
TARGET ECHO
NORMAL
SYSTEM
SETUP2
EDIT
SENSOR
SETUP
NEXT
PAGE
PREV.
PAGE
RETURN
Page 2 (ETR-30 only)
Sounder system setup menu
7-33
7. CUSTOMIZING YOUR UNIT
Sounder system setup menu description
Item
Fish Alarm
Level
Description
Sets the fish alarm sensitivity; that is,
the minimum echo strength which will
trigger the fish alarms.
Settings
High: Orange and stronger echoes
trigger the alarm.*
Medium: Yellow and stronger echoes
trigger the alarm.*
Low: Green and stronger echoes
trigger the alarm.*
* = 8-color display
Transmission
Turns TX power on/off.
TVG
(HF,LF)
TVG (Time Varied Gain) compensates 0-9
for propagation attenuation of the
ultrasonic waves. It does this by
equalizing echo presentation so that
fish schools of the same size appear in
the same density in both shallow and
deep waters. In addition, it reduces
surface noise. Note that if the TVG
level is set too high short range
echoes may not be displayed.
Echo Offset
(HF, LF)
If the on-screen echo level appears to
be too weak or too strong and the
level cannot be adjusted satisfactorily
with the gain control, adjust echo
offset to compensate for too weak or
too strong echoes.
-50 - +50
Bottom Level
(HF, LF)
If the depth indication is unstable in
automatic operation or the bottom
echo cannot be displayed in
reddish-brown by adjusting the gain
control in manual operation, you may
adjust the bottom echo level detection
circuit, for both HF and LF, to stabilize
the indication. Note that if the level is
set too low weak echoes may be
missed and if set too high the depth
indication will not be displayed.
-100 - +100
KP Pulse
Selects source of keying pulse.
On, Off
Internal, External (See installation
manual.)
Smoothing
Smoothes echoes to present stable
display. The higher the setting the
greater the smoothing.
SM1-SM4, OFF
TLL Output
ON, OFF
Outputs current position to plotter
where it is marked with TLL mark. Use
soft key to output TLL.
(Con’t on next page)
7-34
7. CUSTOMIZING YOUR UNIT
Sounder system setup menu description (con’t from previous page, for ETR-30)
Item
STC (HF, LF)
(For ETR-30N
only)
Description
Settings
Adjusts STC level for the high and low 0-10
frequencies, and is useful for
suppressing surface noise. The
setting range is 0-10; the higher the
setting the greater the extent of
suppression. Setting 10 suppresses
noise up to several meters. Turn off
the STC when there is no noise on the
screen, otherwise weak echoes may
be missed.
FREQ. ADJ.
(HF, LF) (For
ETR-30N
only)
Interference from other acoustic
equipment operating nearby or other
electronic equipment on your boat
may show itself on the display. You
may suppress these type of
interference by adjusting frequency.
-10 - +10 %
TARGET
ECHO
Sets fishing objective.
Normal, Surface
(For ETR-30N
only)
SENSOR
SETUP
soft key
(See next
page.)
Normal for general fishing, Surface for
detecting surface. Pulse repetition
rate is higher than NORMAL on the
specified transducer.
Offsets speed, depth and water
temperature indications and speed of
sound.
See next section for details.
7-35
7. CUSTOMIZING YOUR UNIT
7.9.2
Sensor setup
The SENSOR SETUP menu lets you further refine speed, water temperature and depth
data fed from the network sounder.
1. Show the sounder display, then press the MENU key.
2. Press the SOUNDER SYSTEM SETUP and SENSOR SETUP soft keys to show the
SENSOR SETUP menu. The current ship’s speed, water temperature, depth and speed
of sound are shown at the bottom of the menu.
SPEED CALIBRATION
+ 00%
TEMP CALIBRATION
+ 0°F
DEPTH CALIBRATION
+0.0ft
ACSTC SPD CALIBRATION
+ 000m/s
SPEED
EDIT
RETURN
TEMP
12.3kt
78.8°F
DEPTH
ACSTC SPD
125.0ft
SENSOR
SETUP
1500m/s
Sensor setup menu
3. Select item to adjust, then press the EDIT soft key.
4. Adjust the Cursor pad upward or downward to set appropriate value.
Speed and temperature calibrations: Enter plus or minus value. For example, if the
water temperature readout is 77°F but the actual water temperature is 75°F, enter
–2(°F).
Depth calibration: If you desire the depth readout to show the distance between ship’s
draft and bottom (rather than transducer and bottom), set ship’s draft here. Enter a plus
or minus value.
Acoustic speed calibration: Sets the speed of sound used by the network sounder.
Normally no adjustment is required, however if echoes are returning too slow or too fast
adjust the value as appropriate. This is only used if water salinity is at an extreme level.
Under normal circumstances, do not adjust.
Sensor setup menu settings
Item
Settings
Speed Calibration
-50 -+50%
0 (no offset)
Temperature Calibration
-40°F – +40°F
0 (no offset)
Depth Calibration
-15 - +90 ft
0 (no offset)
Acoustic Speed Calibration
-500 - +500 m/s
0 (no offset)
5. Press the RETURN soft key followed by the MENU key.
7-36
Default Setting
7. CUSTOMIZING YOUR UNIT
7.9.3
Sounding range, zoom range, bottom lock range
This paragraph shows you how to set custom ranges for basic range, zoom range (marker
and bottom zoom) and bottom lock range. All default basic ranges are restored whenever
the unit of depth measurement is changed. Therefore, change the depth unit before
changing the basic ranges.
1. Show the sounder display, then press the MENU key to open the main menu.
2. Press the SOUNDER RANGE SETUP soft key to show the SOUNDER RANGE SETUP
menu.
RANGE
SETUP
RANGE 1
15 ft
RANGE 2
EDIT
30 ft
RANGE 3
60 ft
RANGE 4
120 ft
RANGE 5
200 ft
RANGE 6
400 ft
RANGE 7
1000 ft
RANGE 8
4000 ft
ZOOM RANGE
10 ft
BOTTOM LOCK RANGE
10 ft
RETURN
Sounder range setup menu
3. Select the range to change, then press the EDIT soft key.
4. Rotate the Cursor pad or ENTER knob to set range desired, then press the RETURN
soft key. For basic range, set depth from lowest to highest; a range cannot be higher
than its succeeding neighbor.
5. Press the MENU key to finish.
Default basic ranges
Range 1
Range2
Range 3
Range 4
Range 5
Range 6
Range 7
Range 8
ETR-6/10N
ETR-30N
5m
10 m
20 m
40 m
80 m
150 m
300 m
1200 m
1500 m
15 ft
30 ft
60 ft
120 ft
200 ft
400 ft
1000 ft
4000 ft
4500 ft
3 fa
5 fa
10 fa
20 fa
40 fa
80 fa
150 fa
650 fa
900 fa
3 P/B
5 P/B
10 P/B
30 P/B
50 P/B
100 P/B
200 P/B
700 P/B
900 P/B
Zoom range and bottom-lock ranges
Item
Settings
Default Setting
Zoom Range
2 m – 120 m, 7 ft – 400 ft,
1 fa – 60 fa, 1 P/B – 700 P/B
10 m, 30 ft, 10 fa, 10 P/B
Bottom-lock
Range
3 or 6 m, 10 or 20 ft, 2 or 3
fa, 2 or 3 P/B
6 m, 20 ft, 3 fa, 3 P/B
7-37
7. CUSTOMIZING YOUR UNIT
7.9.4
Function key setup
The function keys provide one-touch execution of a desired function. The default sounder
function key settings are as shown in the table below.
Function Key
Default Function
Function Key Label
1
Output current position.
TLL
2
Suppress clutter.
CLT
3
Erase weak signal.
SLV
4
Suppress noise.
NL
5
Set picture advancement speed.
PA
If the above settings are not to your liking you may change them as follows:
1. Show the sounder display.
2. Press the MENU key.
3. Press the FUNCTION KEY SETUP soft key.
Function
key label
▲
Function key
setting
FUNC
KEY
SOFT KEY 1
TLL: TLL OUTPUT
EDIT
T
L
L
SOFT KEY 2
CLT: CLUTTER
C
L
T
SOFT KEY 3
SLV: SIGNAL LEVEL
S
L
V
SOFT KEY 4
NL: NOISE LEVEL
N
SOFT KEY 5
PA: PICTURE ADV
L
RETURN
P
A
Sounder function key menu
4. Select the function key you want to program, then press the EDIT soft key.
SOFT KEY 1
SOFT KEY 1
SOFT KEY 1
▲
▲
Scroll
down
PA: PICTURE ADV
TG: TEMP. GRAPH
TVH: TVG - HF
TVL: TVG - LF
EOH: OFFSET - HF
EOL: OFFSET - LF
SMT: SMOOTHING
ZMR: ZOOM RANGE
BLR: B/L RANGE
TLL: TLL OUTPUT
Scroll
down
SSR: SNDR SOURCE
DBX: D. BOX ON/OFF
CHG: CHANGE CNTRL
SAV: SAVE SCREEN
QP: QUICK POINT
▲
▲
OFF
MOD: AUTO MODE
GHF: GAIN - HF
GLF: GAIN - LF
SFT: SHIFT
NL: NOISE LIMITER
CLT: CLUTTER
WMK: WHITE MARKER
HUE: HUE
SLV: SIGNAL LEVEL
5. Select function desired with the Cursor pad, then press the ENTER soft key or ENTER
knob to register your selection.
6. Press the MENU key to close the menu.
7-38
7. CUSTOMIZING YOUR UNIT
Sounder function keys
Menu Item
Function
Function Key Label
OFF
Assigns no function.
MOD: AUTO MODE
Display automatic mode selection window.
MOD
GHF: GAIN – HF
Displays high frequency gain adjustment window.
GHF
GLF: GAIN – LF
Displays low frequency gain adjustment window.
GLF
SFT: SHIFT
Shifts range in manual operation.
SFT
NL: NOISE LIMITER
Suppresses noise.
NL
CLT: CLUTTER
Suppresses clutter.
CLT
WMK: WHITE MARKER
Sets white marker.
WMK
HUE: HUE
Sets hue.
HUE
SLV: SIGNAL LEVEL
Erases weak signals.
SLV
PA: PICTURE ADV
Sets picture advance speed.
PA
TG: TEMP. GRAPH
Turns temperature graph on/off.
TG
TVH: TVG – HF
Sets TVG for high frequency
TVH
TVL: TVG – LF
Sets TVG for low frequency.
TVL
EOH: OFFSET – HF
Offsets echo strength for high frequency.
EOH
EOL: OFFSET -LF
Offsets echo strength for low frequency.
EOL
SMT: SMOOTHING
Sets echo smoothing rate.
SMT
ZMR: ZOOM RANGE
Sets zoom range.
ZMR
BLR: B/L RANGE
Sets bottom lock range for bottom-lock display.
BLR
TLL: TLL OUTPUT
Outputs current position to plotter. Also inscribes line
TLL
on sounder and registers position as a waypoint on
plotter.
SSR: SNDR SOURCE
Selects source for sounder data.
SSR
DBX: D. BOX ON/OFF
Turns data boxes on/off.
DBX
CHG: CHANGE CNTRL
Switches control in combination display.
CHG
SAV: SAVE SCREEN
Saves sounder picture to SD card.
SAV
QP: QUICK POINT
Quick point function.
QP
Note: To use CHANGE CNTRL, set it on all displays, with the same soft key number.
7-39
7. CUSTOMIZING YOUR UNIT
7.10 Nav Graphic Display Setup
The nav graphic display (see paragraph 3.1.2) shows either the compass display or the
wind angle display, together with depth and temperature graphs. You may choose which to
display and setup the depth and temperature graphs as follows:
1. Press the MENU key to open the menu.
2. Press the SYSTEM CONFIGURATION, SYSTEM SETUP, HOT PAGE & NAV DISP
SETUP and NAV GRAPHIC DISPLAY SETUP soft keys.
GRAPHIC METER
COMPASS
DEPTH GRAPH UP~DATE
1S/DOT
TEMP GRAPH UP-DATE
1S/DOT
NAV
GRAPHIC
EDIT
RETURN
NAV GRAPHIC menu
3. Choose GRAPHIC METER and press the EDIT key.
GRAPHIC METER
▲
¤ COMPASS
¡ WIND ANGLE
▼
Graphic meter window
4. Choose COMPASS or WIND ANGLE as appropriate and press the ENTER soft key.
5. Choose DEPTH GRAPH UP-DATE and press the EDIT soft key.
DEPTH GRAPH UP-DATE
▲
¤ 0.5s./dot
¡ 1s/dot
¡ 2s/dot
¡ 4s/dot
▼
Depth graph up-date window
6. Choose desired update period/number of dots and press the ENTER soft key.
7. Set TEMP GRAPH UP-DATE similarly.
8. Press the MENU key to close the menu.
7-40
8. MAINTENANCE,
TROUBLESHOOTING
This chapter provides information necessary for keeping your unit in good working order
and remedying simple problems.
WARNING
Do not open the equipment.
Hazardous voltage which can
cause electrical shock exists
inside the equipment. Only
qualified personnel should
work inside the equipment.
8.1
Preventive Maintenance
Regular maintenance is important for optimum performance. A maintenance program
should be established and should at least include the items shown in the table below.
Maintenance program
Item
Check point
Remedy
Display unit connectors
Check for tight connection.
Tighten loosened connectors.
LCD
The LCD will, in time,
accumulate a coating of dust
which tends to dim the picture.
Wipe LCD lightly with soft
cloth to remove dust.
Wipe the LCD carefully to prevent
scratching, using tissue paper and an
LCD cleaner. To remove dirt or salt
deposits, use an LCD cleaner, wiping
slowly with tissue paper so as to
dissolve the dirt or salt. Change paper
frequently so the salt or dirt will not
scratch the LCD. Do not use solvents
such as thinner, acetone or benzene
for cleaning.
Ground terminal
Check for tight connection and Clean or replace ground wire as
corrosion.
necessary.
8-1
8. MAINTENANCE, TROUBLESHOOTING
8.2
Replacement of Batteries
Battery on circuit board
A lithium battery (Type CR2450-F2 ST2L, Code No. 000-144-941) fitted on a circuit board
inside the display unit preserves data when the equipment is turned off, and its life is about
three years. When its voltage is low the battery icon ( ) appears at the top of the display.
When the icon appears, contact your dealer to request replacement of the battery.
Batteries in remote controller
The remote controller has two AA batteries. If the distance from which the remote controller
can be operated has decreased, change the battery.
Note: Replace all batteries together. Do not mix old and new batteries.
WARNING
Ensure battery polarity is correct.
Wrong polarity may cause the batteries to
explode.
8.3
Replacement of Fuse
The fuse on the power cable protects the equipment from reverse polarity of the
ship’s mains and equipment fault. If the fuse blows, find out the cause before
replacing it. Use the correct fuse¥. Using the wrong fuse will damage the
equipment and void the warranty.
1724C, 1734C: 10A for 12V device, 5A for 24V device
GD-1720C: 5A for 12 V device, 3A for 24 VDC device
WARNING
Use the proper fuse.
Use of a wrong fuse can result in damage
to the equipment or cause fire.
8-2
8. MAINTENANCE, TROUBLESHOOTING
8.4
Replacing the Magnetron
When the magnetron has expired, distant targets cannot be seen on the display. When you
feel that long range performance has decreased, contact a FURUNO agent or dealer about
replacement of the magnetron.
Radar model and magnetron used
Model
MODEL 1724C
MODEL 1734C
8.5
Magnetron Type
Code No.
000-146-866
000-146-867
E3588
E3571
Simple Troubleshooting
This section provides simple troubleshooting procedures which the user can
follow to restore normal operation. If you cannot restore normal operation do not
attempt to check inside the unit. Any trouble should be referred to a qualified
technician.
8.5.1
General
General troubleshooting
If…
you cannot turn on the
power
Then…
• check for blown fuse.
• check that the power connector is firmly fastened.
• check for corrosion on the power cable connector.
• check for damaged power cable.
• check battery for proper voltage output (10.8 to 31.2 V).
there is no response
when a key is pressed
• turn off and on the power. If there still is no response the key may
be faulty. Request service.
8-3
8. MAINTENANCE, TROUBLESHOOTING
8.5.2
Radar
GD-1720C requires a network radar.
Radar troubleshooting
If…
you pressed the
POWER/BRILL key and the
RADAR TX soft key to show
the radar picture
marks, legends appear
But…
nothing appears on the
display
•
•
no echo appears
•
the picture is not updated or
it freezes
—
•
•
tuning is adjusted
sensitivity is poor
•
the range is changed
radar picture does not
change
•
•
•
there is poor discrimination in —
range
the true motion presentation
—
is not working properly
the range rings are not
displayed
8.5.3
Then…
check that the antenna cable
is firmly fastened.
check if radar source is
correct.
check that the antenna cable
is firmly fastened.
check antenna cable.
for freeze up, turn the display
unit on and off again.
magnetron may need to be
replaced. Contact your dealer.
try to hit the [+] and [-] keys
again.
turn the display unit off and on
again.
adjust A/C SEA.
• reselect true motion mode.
• check if heading and speed
are input.
• hit the RADAR DISPLY and
RINGS soft keys to display
them.
—
Plotter
Requires GPS Receiver GP-310B/320B.
Plotter troubleshooting
If…
position is not fixed within
three minutes
position is wrong
the track is not plotted
the bearing is wrong
Loran C (or Decca) TDs do
not appear
Loran C (or Decca) TDs
are wrong
the ship’s speed indication
is not zero after the ship is
stopped
8-4
Then…
• check that antenna connector is firmly fastened.
• check number of satellites received, on the GPS status display. (See
page 8-11.) There should be three or more.
• check that the correct geodetic chart system is selected, on the GPS
SENSOR SETTINGS menu.
• enter position offset, on the GPS SENSOR SETTINGS menu.
• track is not being plotted. (“H” icon appears at the top of the display.)
Press the TRACK HALT soft key on the TRACKS & MARKS
CONTROL menu to start plotting again.
• check that correct magnetic variation is entered, on the GENERAL
SETUP menu.
• check that LORAN C (or DECCA) is selected at TD DISPLAY on the
GENERAL SETUP menu. Also, check that proper Loran C (Decca)
chains codes are entered, on the TD SETUP menu.
• enter TD offset, on the TD SETUP menu.
• try to decrease speed/course smoothing, on the GPS SENSOR
SETTINGS menu.
8. MAINTENANCE, TROUBLESHOOTING
8.5.4
Sounder
Requires Network Sounder ETR-6/10N/30N.
Sounder troubleshooting
If…
you selected a sounder
display with the DISP key
But…
picture does not appear
Then…
• check that the network
sounder’s signal cable is firmly
fastened.
• Check that sounder source is
correct.
• check that the network sounder
is plugged in. The LED on the
network sounder should flash
every second.
marks and characters
appear
picture does not appear
• check for loosened transducer
connector.
the picture appears
zero line does not appear
• the picture is shifted. Confirm
shift setting.
picture sensitivity is too low
—
• check gain setting, if using
manual operation.
• marine life or air bubbles may
be clinging to transducer face.
• bottom may be too soft to
return a suitable echo.
the depth indication is not
displayed
—
• adjust gain and range to display
the bottom echo (in reddish
brown), if you are using the
manual sounder mode.
noise or interference shows
on the display
—
• check to be sure the transducer
cable is not near ship’s engine.
• check the ground.
• other video sounders of the
same frequency as yours may
be operating near you.
the water temperature graph
appears
data is wrong
• check that sensor cable is
tightly fastened.
8-5
8. MAINTENANCE, TROUBLESHOOTING
8.6
Diagnostics
This paragraph provides the procedures for testing the equipment for proper operation.
Four tests are provided: Memory I/O test, Keyboard test, Remote controller test, and Test
pattern.
8.6.1
Memory I/O test
The memory I/O test provides for individual testing of the display unit, GPS Receiver
GP-310B/320B, Network Sounder ETR-6/10N, ETR-30N and ARP, displaying program
number and checking for proper operation.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Press the MENU key to show the menu.
Press the SYSTEM CONFIGURATION soft key.
Press the SYSTEM SETUP soft key.
Press the TEST & CLEAR soft key.
Press the MEMORY I/O TEST soft key.
MEMORY
I/O TST
DISPLAY UNIT TEST
GPS SENSOR TEST*
NETWORK SOUNDER TEST**
RETURN
* = Requires GPS Receiver GP-310B/320B.
** = Requires Network Sounder ETR-6/10N, ETR-30N.
MEMORY I/O TEST menu
6. Then, press appropriate soft key to start a diagnostic test.
8-6
8. MAINTENANCE, TROUBLESHOOTING
Display unit test
Press the DISPLAY UNIT TEST soft key at the MEMORY I/O TEST menu to test the
display unit. The equipment displays program version number and checks devices. Results
for device checks are shown as OK or NG (No Good). For any NG, request service. A test
connector is required to check ports. “ - - “ shown when no test connector is connected.
Chart number shown when chart is inserted. Press the RETURN soft key to return the
MEMORY I/O TEST menu.
*For Navioics type. 1950028XX for C-MAP.
PROGRAM No. 1950027XX*
ROM1, 2
: OK
ROM3
: OK 02
SDRAM
: OK
SRAM
: OK
INT. BATTERY
: OK
PORT
NMEA IN/OUT
: -NMEA IN
: -RS232
: -HEADING
: -NETWORK
: -CARD SLOT
:
FPGA No.
: 01.02
No results appear when
H. PULSE
: OK
"sub" radar selected as
B. PULSE
: OK
ON TIME
: 000000.0 h radar source.
TX TIME
: 000000.0 h
Machine Status +108
XX = Program Version No.
Display unit test results
GPS sensor test (Requires GPS Receiver GP-310B/320B)
Press the GPS SENSOR TEST soft key at the MEMORY I/O TEST menu to test the GPS
Receiver GP-310B/320B. The equipment displays GPS receiver program version number,
and checks the GPS unit for proper operation, displaying OK or NG (No Good) as the result.
For NG, request service. Press the RETURN soft key to return the MEMORY I/O TEST
menu.
PROGRAM No. *48502180XX
GPS UNIT
: OK
Machine Status +115
*: This is for GPS-310B,
"48502380XX" appears for GPS-320B.
XX = Program Version No.
GPS receiver test results
8-7
8. MAINTENANCE, TROUBLESHOOTING
Network sounder test (Requires Network Sounder ETR-6/10N, ETR-30N)
Press the NETWORK SOUNDER TEST soft key at the MEMORY I/O TEST menu to test
the Network Sounder ETR-6/10N or ETR-30N. The equipment displays network sounder
program version number, checks the ROM and RAM, and displays water temperature
(appropriate sensor required) and depth. The results of the ROM and RAM check are
shown as OK or NG (No Good). For any NG, request service. Press the RETURN soft key
to return to the MEMORY I/O TEST menu.
PROGRAM No. 02523060XX
ROM 1
: OK
RAM
: OK
TEMPERATURE
: 77°F
DEPTH
: 4000ft
Machine Status +115
XX = Program Version No.
ETR-30N: 0252310XX.XX
Network sounder test results
8.6.2
Test pattern
The test pattern test checks the display for proper display of colors.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Press the MENU key to show the menu.
Press the SYSTEM CONFIGURATION soft key.
Press the SYSTEM SETUP soft key.
Press the TEST & CLEAR soft key.
Press the TEST PATTERN soft key to show the test pattern.
Push the ENTER knob consecutively to show white, red, green, blue and black colors
individually.
7. Press the RETURN soft key.
8. Press the MENU key to close the menu.
8-8
8. MAINTENANCE, TROUBLESHOOTING
BLACK
BLUE
GREEN
GREEN
RED
RETURN
WHITE
WHITE
RETURNPATTERN.
PUSH ENTER KNOB TO CHANGE
[ENTER] knob
WHT
[ENTER] knob
RED
[ENTER] knob
GRN
[ENTER] knob
BLU
[ENTER] knob
BLK
[ENTER] knob
Test pattern sequence
8-9
8. MAINTENANCE, TROUBLESHOOTING
8.6.3
Keyboard, remote controller test
The keyboard test checks the controls on the display unit and remote controller for proper
operation.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Press the MENU key to show the menu.
Press the SYSTEM CONFIGURATION soft key.
Press the SYSTEM SETUP soft key.
Press the TEST & CLEAR soft key.
Press the KEYBOARD & REMOTE TEST soft key.
PUSH "CLEAR" KEY
3 TIMES TO RETURN
K-BOARD
TEST
For Remote Controller
For Display Unit
I/R REMOTE CODE
Screen for testing keyboard, remote controller
6. Operate each control on the keyboard and remote controller one by one. A key is
functioning properly if its on-screen location “fills” in black when the key is pressed. For
the ENTER knob and Trackball, rotate them to show their X-Y positions digitally, and
push the ENTER knob to confirm its function.
7. Press the CLEAR key three times on the display unit or remote controller to escape
from the test.
8. Press the MENU key to close the menu.
8-10
8. MAINTENANCE, TROUBLESHOOTING
8.7
GPS Status Display
The GPS status display provides data about the GPS satellites. It is available with
connection of the GPS Receiver GP-310B/320B or a GPS navigator outputting the data
sentence GSA or GSV.
1. Press the MENU key.
2. Press the SYSTEM CONFIGURATION, NAV OPTION and GPS SENSOR SETTINGS
soft keys to display the GPS SENSOR SETTINGS menu.
3. Press the GPS STATUS soft key.
WAAS satellite
(GPS-320B only)
23:59:59
FEB 27 2005
N
12
23
26
20
30
29
W
GPS 3D
21
W
28 E
05
01
27
17
Date
GPS fix state
DOP
1.2
DOP value
ALT
22 m
GPS antenna height
S
SAT
No. 30
23
12
29
27
01
17
26
05
20
21
30
28
123
SNR
40
50
RETURN
Receive signal level
Bars show satellite
signal levels. Satellites
whose signal level
extends past 40 are
used to fix position.
WAAS satellite
(GPS-320B only)
Estimated position of satellite in the sky.
Satellites used for fixing position are circled.
GPS status display
4. Press the RETURN soft key to quit the GPS status display.
8-11
8. MAINTENANCE, TROUBLESHOOTING
8.8
Clearing Memories
Your equipment has a memory for each of the plotter, radar and sounder sections. These
memories can be cleared to restart operation with default settings.
The following data are not cleared:
Radar: Heading adjustment, timing adjustment, MBS level, tuning point, tuning indication
(short, medium, long), video level, dead sector, antenna height, STC curve, antenna type,
on time, tx time, Sounder: White marker, hue, signal level, TLL output, depth calibration,
range.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Press the MENU key to open the menu.
Press the SYSTEM CONFIGURATION soft key.
Press the SYSTEM SETUP soft key.
Press the TEST & CLEAR soft key.
Press the MEMORY CLEAR soft key.
DISPLAY UNIT
NO
GPS SENSOR
NO
NETWORK SOUNDER
NO
MEMORY
CLEAR
EDIT
RETURN
Memory clear menu
6. Use the Trackball to choose the memory to clear.
7. Press the EDIT soft key.
8. Use the Trackball to select YES, then press the ENTER soft key. One of the following
displays appears depending on the selection made at step 6.
ALL SETTNGS EXCEPT
SNDR ARE RESET TO
DEFAULT. ARE YOU SURE?
YES ... PUSH ENTER KNOB
NO ... PUSH CLEAR KEY
BEGIN COLD START
TO CLEAR GPS
MEMORY. ARE YOU SURE?
YES ... PUSH ENTER KNOB
NO ... PUSH CLEAR KEY
Display Unit Clear
GPS Receiver Clear
Windows for clearing memory
9. Push the ENTER knob to clear the memory selected.
10. Press the MENU key to close the menu.
11. Turn the power off and on again.
8-12
SOUNDER WILL BE
SET TO DEFAULT.
ARE YOU SURE?
YES ... PUSH ENTER KNOB
NO ... PUSH CLEAR KEY
Network Sounder Clear
8. MAINTENANCE, TROUBLESHOOTING
Note: Though the message “SYSTEM HAS FAILED START UP TEST. PLEASE
CONTACT A LOCAL FURUNO REPRESENTATIVE FOR REPAIR. PUSH ANY KEY TO
CONTENUE” may appear when powering on the display unit immediately after the clearing
memories, there is no problem in fact. Press any key to continue the operation.
8.9
Error Messages
In addition to alarm messages your equipment also displays error messages.
Error messages
Error Message
General
Meaning
Remedy
Network sounder disconnected.
• Check that display unit
where the sounder is
connected is turned on.
• Check network sounder’s
cabling.
• Check that display unit
where the radar is
connected is turned on.
• Check antenna cable.
Have a qualified technician
replace the battery.
Check antenna cable.
Connection with the ETR was
cut.
Radar disconnected.
Connection with the RADAR
was cut.
Low Voltage! Internal Battery
No bearing pulse detected.
No position data
Voltage of battery on circuit
board in display unit is low.
No bearing pulse from radar
antenna.
No position data is present.
No GPS fix!
Possible problem with GPS
receiver GP-310B/320B.
No heading pulse detected.
HEADING DATA MISSING!
No heading pulse
Check for obstacles around
GPS antenna.
Disconnect GPS cable from
the display unit, and then
contact your dealer.
Check heading sensor.
Check heading cable.
8-13
8. MAINTENANCE, TROUBLESHOOTING
This page is intentionally left blank.
8-14
APPENDIX
Menu Overview
Radar
RADAR
DISPLAY
SETUP
MENU Key
EBL REFERENCE (TRUE, RELATIVE)
CURSOR POSITION (LAT/LON, TD, RNG&BRG-REL, RNG&BRG-TRUE, MGRS)
TUNING (AUTO, MAN)
TX SECTOR BLANKING (ON (FROM 000°, SECTOR 001°), OFF)
NOISE REJECTION (OFF, LOW, HIGH)
BACKGROUND COLOR (BLACK/GREEN, BLACK/RED, BLUE/WHITE,
DK BLUE/WHITE, WHITE/GREEN)
ECHO COLOR (YELLOW, GREEN, MULTI-COLOR)
WATCHMAN TIME (5, 10, 20 minutes)
RANGE UNIT (nm, km, sm)
D. BOX soft key
(DATABOX SIZE SMALL/LARGE, POSITION, WAYPOINT, COG, SOG, STW,
BEARING, RANGE, TIME TO GO, ETA, TEMPERATURE, DEPTH, TRIP LOG,
DATE, TIME, WIND)
Max. range:
24 nm/sm, km = Radar source is
RADAR
0.125/0.25/0.5/0.75/1/1.5/2/3/4/
1824C/1724C/1734C.
RANGE
6/8/12/16/24/36/48/64/72 (nm & sm) 36 nm/sm, km = Radar source is 1834C.
48 nm/sm, km = Radar source is 1934C.
SETUP#
0.25/0.5/0.75/1/1.5/2/3/4/6/8/
64 nm/sm, km = Radar source is 1944C.
12/16/24/36/48/64/72 (km)
72 nm/sm, km = Radar source is 1954C.
# = Not used on GD-1720C.
ARP SETUP
(Requires ARP
circuit board in
network radar
18X4C/19X4C.)
1
FUNCTION
KEY SETUP*
ARP TARGET INFO (INTERNAL ARP, EXTERNAL ARP, OFF)
CANCEL ALL TARGETS (YES, NO)
ARP VECTOR MODE (RELATIVE, TRUE)
ARP VECTOR TIME (30 seconds; 1, 3, 6, 15, 30 minutes)
HISTORY INTERVAL (OFF, 30 seconds; 1, 3, 6 minutes)
CPA (OFF, 0.5, 1, 2, 3, 5, 6 nm)
TCPA (30 seconds; 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 12 minutes)
AUTO ACQUISITION AREA (ON, OFF)
TARGET ID NUMBER (ON, OFF)
SOFT KEY 1 - SOFT KEY 5
(OFF, HDG LINE OFF, MODE, GAIN, A/C SEA, A/C RAIN, FTC
(Model 17X4C series radar only), ECHO STRETCH, PULSE
LENGTH, ZOOM, OFFCENTER, ECHO TRAIL, RINGS ON/OFF,
TLL OUTPUT, GUARD ALARM, EBL, VRM, TTM ON/OFF, WPT
ON/OFF, WATCHMAN, ACQUISITION (ARP-equipped Model
18X4C/19X4C series network radar only), STBY/TX, RADAR
SOURCE, D. BOX ON/OFF, CHANGE CNTRL, QUICK POINT)
* Default settings for function keys:
SOFT KEY 1, HDG LINE OFF; SOFT KEY 2, RINGS ON/OFF; SOFT KEY 3, ECHO TRAIL;
SOFT KEY 4, OFFCENTER, SOFT KEY 5, STBY/TX
AP-1
APPENDIX
1
SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION
GENERAL
SETUP
Page 1
Page 2
NAV
OPTION
KEY BEEP (ON, OFF)
LANGUAGE (ENGLISH, OTHERS)
RANGE UNIT
(nm, kt; km, km/h; sm, mph; nm&yd, kt; nm&m, kt; km&m, km/h; sm&yd, mph)
TEMPERATURE UNIT (°C, °F)
DEPTH UNIT (m, ft, fa, PB)
WIND UNIT (kt, km/h, MPH, m/s)
WIND DATA (APPARENT, TRUE)
SPEED AVERAGING (0-9999 seconds, 60 seconds)
LOCAL TIME OFFSET (-13:30 - +13:30, 0)
RESET TRIP LOG (YES, NO)
TIMEOUT DISPLAY SETTING (15, 30, 60 seconds, CONTINUE)
SAVE MOB KEY FUNCTION (SAVE SHIP POSITION & MOB,
MOB WITHOUT CONFIRMATION, QUICK POINT FUNCTION)
WALLPAPER (DEFAULT, USER)
LAT/LON DISPLAY
(DD° MM. MM’
DD° MM. MMM’
DD° MM. MMMM’
DD° MM’ SS.S")
TD DISPLAY (LORAN C, DECCA)
SPEED (SOG, STW)
POSITION DISPLAY (LAT/LON, TD, MGRS)
TIME DISPLAY (12 HOURS, 24 HOURS)
INFRARED REMOTE MODE (A, B, C, D)
RANGE & BEARING MODE
(GREAT CIRCLE, RHUMB LINE)
BEARING READOUT (TRUE, MAGNETIC)
MAGNETIC VARIATION (AUTO, MANUAL 07.0 °W)
NAV
SOURCE
SETTINGS
GPS
SENSOR
SETTINGS
POSITION SOURCE
(FURUNO BB GPS, GP, LC, ALL)
SPEED SOURCE (ETR, NMEA)
TEMPERATURE SOURCE (ETR, NMEA)
DEPTH SOURCE (ETR, NMEA)
STW CALIBRATION (-50 - +50 %, 0 %)
TEMP CALIBRATION (-40 - +40 °F, 0 °F)
DEPTH CALIBRATION (-15 - +90 ft, 0 ft)
WIND AVERAGING (1 - 600 seconds, 1 seconds)
WIND DIRECTION OFFSET (S(P)0 - 180 °, S0 °)
WIND SPEED CALIBRATION (-50 - +50 %, 0 %)
GEODETIC DATUM (WGS-84, OTHERS: See page A-10.)
POSITION SMOOTHING (0 - 999 seconds, 0 seconds)
SPD/CSE SMOOTHING (0 - 999 seconds, 5 seconds)
LATITUDE OFFSET (0.000 - 9.999’N(S), 0.000’N)
LONGITUDE OFFSET (0.000 - 9.999’W(E), 0.000’E)
DISABLE SATELLITE (Max. 3)
LATITUDE (45°35.000’N)
LONGITUDE (125°00.000’W)
ANTENNA HEIGHT (0 - 999 m, 5 m)
GPS FIX MODE (2D, 2D/3D)
WAAS MODE (ON, OFF)
COLD START (YES, NO)
WAAS SEARCH (AUTO, MANUAL 134)
GPS STATUS soft key
WAAS ALARM (ON, OFF)
(Displays status of GPS satellites.)
CORRECTIONS DATA SET (02)
WAAS SETUP soft key
(Only when GPS-320B is connected.)
2
AP-2
TD SETUP
LORAN-C GRI (9940: 11-27 (US west coast))
CORRECTION 1 (-999.9-+999.9 µs, 000.0 µs)
CORRECTION 2 (-999.9-+999.9 µs, 000.0 µs)
DECCA CHAIN (01: R-G (S Baltic))
CORRECTION 1 (-99.99-+99.99 lane, 00.00 lane)
CORRECTION 2 (-99.99-+99.99 lane, 00.00 lane)
APPENDIX
2
PORT
SETUP
SYSTEM
SETUP
GPS/NMEA
OUTPUT FORMAT
PORT
(NMEA 0183 Ver.1.5, 2.0)
BAUD RATE
(AUTO, 4800bps, 38400bps)
LAT/LON FORMAT
(DD° MM. MM’
DD° MM. MMM’
DD° MM. MMMM’)
OUTPUT DESTINATION
(YES, NO)
SELECT SNTNC soft key*
PORT MNITR soft key*
PC/NMEA/
CLEAR WINDOW
NMEA OUTPUT FORMAT
EXT. BUZZ
(NMEA Ver.1.5, 2.0)
PORT
BAUD RATE
(4800, 9600, 19200 bps)
BIT LENGTH (7 bits, 8 bits)
STOP BIT (1 bit, 2 bits)
PARITY
(EVEN, ODD, NONE)
4
3
SELECT SNTNC soft key*
PORT MNITR soft key*
CLEAR WINDOW
OUTPUT THROUGH NETWORK
(Select data sentences to output to NavNet
equipment. See * below. All sentences turned off in default setting.)
* = AAM, APB, BOD, BWR(BWC)#1, DPT(DBT)#2, GGA, GLL, GTD,
MTW, RMA, RMB, RMC, VHW, VTG, WPL, XTE, ZDA, HDT, HDG, MWV, ZTG, TTM
(except in case of OUTPUT THROUGH NETWORK)
#1= BWR for rhumb line, BWC for great circle
#2 = DBT for NMEA Ver. 1.5; DPT for NMEA Ver. 2.0
AP-3
APPENDIX
3
4
TEST &
CLEAR
MEMORY
I/O TEST
DISPLAY UNIT TEST
GPS SENSOR TEST*
NETWORK SOUNDER TEST**
KEYBOARD & REMOTE TEST
TEST PATTERN
MEMORY
CLEAR
HOT PAGE
& NAV DISP
SETUP
DISPLAY UNIT (YES, NO)
GPS SENSOR (YES, NO)*
NETWORK SOUNDER (YES, NO)**
HOT PAGE SETUP (Configures HOT PAGE 1 to 5.)
NAV DATA DISPLAY SETUP (Configures nav data displays.)
NAV GRAPHIC DISPLAY SETUP
GRAPHIC METER (COMPASS, WIND ANGLE)
DEPTH GRAPH UP-DATE (0.5, 1, 2, 4 s/dot)
TEMP GRAPH UP-DATE (0.5, 1, 2, 4 s/dot)
SIMULATION
SETUP
RADAR (BUILT IN DATA 1, BUILT IN DATA 2, USER DATA, LIVE)
PLOTTER (SIMULATION, LIVE)
SOUNDER (BUILT IN DATA, ETR DATA, LIVE)
SPEED (0.0-99.9 kt, 0 kt)
COURSE (8 FIGURE, DIRECTION 0.0-359.9°, 000.0°)
LATITUDE (90°0.0’N-90°0.0’S, 45°35.000’N)
LONGITUDE (180°0.0’E-180°0.0’W, 125°00.000’W)
START DATE & TIME (hh: mm dd. mmm. yy, 00:00 01 NOV. 04)
GET RADAR SIMULATION DATA (YES, NO)
* = Requires GPS Receiver GP-310B/320B.
** = Requires Network Sounder ETR-6/10N, ETR-30N.
DATA
TRANSFER
UPLOAD/
DOWNLOAD
DATA
DOWNLOAD WPT/ROUTE TO PC
(WAYPOINTS & ROUTES,
MARKS & LINES)
UPLOAD WPT/ROUTE FROM PC
(WAYPOINTS & ROUTES,
MARKS & LINES)
SAVE DATA TO MEMORY CARD
(TRACKS, MARKS & LINES,
WAYPOINTS & ROUTES,
SETTING DATA)
LOAD DATA IN MEMORY CARD
(TRACKS, MARKS & LINES,
WAYPOINTS & ROUTES,
SETTING DATA, WALLPAPER)
RECEIVE YEOMAN DATA (Receive Yeoman data.)
RECEIVE DATA
VIA NETWORK
AP-4
HOST NAME (NAVNET1, 2, 3, 4)
MARKS & LINES (ON, OFF)
WAYPOINTS & ROUTES (ON, OFF)
SELECT BPS soft key
4800
9600
19200 (bps)
APPENDIX
Plotter
CHART SETUP
MENU Key
CHART OFFSET (Offsets chart position.)
TRACKS
& MARKS
CONTROL
OWN SHIP TRACK DISP (ON, OFF)
OWN SHIP TRACK COLOR (RED, YELLOW, GREEN, LIGHT BLUE,
PURPLE, BLUE, WHITE)
TARGET TRACKS DISPLAY (ON, OFF, ARP ONLY, AIS ONLY, BOTH)
TARGET TRACK COLOR (RED, YELLOW, GREEN, LIGHT BLUE,
PURPLE, BLUE, WHITE)
INTERVAL (TIME, DISTANCE)
TIME INTERVAL (1 - 99m59s,10 seconds)
DISTANCE INTERVAL (0 - 99.99nm/km/sm, 0.1 nm)
MEMORY (TRACK & MARK) (0 - 8000 points, 2000 points)
TRACK soft key (RESUME, HALT)
ERASE T & M soft key
ERASE ALL TRACKS
ERASE TRACKS BY AREA
ERASE TRACKS BY COLOR
ERASE TARGET TRACKS
ERASE ALL MARKS/LINES
ERASE MARKS BY AREA
MARK SETUP soft key
MARKS/LINES COLOR (RED, YELLOW, GREEN, LIGHT BLUE,
PURPLE, BLUE, WHITE)
MARKS SHAPE ( ¡
)
✕
= Default setting
LINES STYLE ( ,
)
,
,
MARKS SIZE (LARGE, SMALL)
CHART
DETAILS
(FURUNO,
NavChartsTM)
Page 1
Page 2
1
2
LAT/LON GRID (RED, YELLOW, GREEN, LIGHT BLUE, PURPLE,
BLUE, WHITE, OFF)
TEXT INFORMATION (ON, OFF)
WAYPOINTS (LARGE, SMALL, OFF)
WAYPOINT NAMES (ON, OFF)
CHART BORDER LINES (ON, OFF)
LANDMASS*
NAVAIDS*
LIGHT SECTOR INFO (ON, OFF)
OTHER SYMBOLS*
OBJECT INFORMATION (OFF, ALL ON, POINTS ON)
CHART DISPLAY (DETAILED, SIMPLE)
NAVAIDS SYMBOL (INTERNATIONAL, US)
CAUTION & ROUTING DATA (ON, OFF)
MARINE FEATURES (ON, OFF)
LAND FEATURES (ON, OFF)
CNTOUR LINE soft key
SPOT SOUNDINGS (ON, OFF)
SAFETY CONTOUR (7, 16, 33, 66 ft)
DEPTH CONTOUR (ALL, 16, 33, 66 ft, OFF)
*: Not used.
AP-5
APPENDIX
2
1
(Defaults are for CUSTOM mode.)
CHART
DETAILS
(C-MAP
chart)
(See page
7-16.)
Page 1
PERSPECTIVE (ON, OFF)
DE-CLUTTER (ON, OFF)
CHART DISPLAY MODE (FULL, SIMPLE, FISHING, LOW, CUSTOM)
SAFETY STATUS (ON, OFF)
WAYPOINT (PLOTTER/OVERLAY, PLOTTER, OFF)
WAYPOINT NAME (PLOTTER/OVERLAY, PLOTTER, OFF)
NAMES (PLOTTER/OVERLAY, PLOTTER, OFF)
BUOYS NAME (PLOTTER/OVERLAY, PLOTTER, OFF)
NAV-AIDS (US, US SIMPLE, INT, INT SIMPLE, PLOTTER/OVERLAY, PLOTTER, OFF)
LIGHT SECTORS (ON, FLASHING, PLOTTER/OVERLAY, PLOTTER, OFF)
ATTENTION AREAS (PLOTTER/OVERLAY, PLOTTER, OFF)
TIDES & CURRENTS (PLOTTER/OVERLAY, PLOTTER, OFF)
Page 2
SEABED TYPE (PLOTTER/OVERLAY, PLOTTER, OFF)
PORTS & SERVICES (PLOTTER/OVERLAY, PLOTTER, OFF)
DEPTH INFO soft key
DEPTH AREAS
(PLOTTER/OVERLAY,
PLOTTER, OFF)
DEPTH AREAS LIMIT
DEPTH LINES & SOUNDINGS
(PLOTTER/OVERLAY,
PLOTTER, OFF
DEPTH LINES & SOUNDINGS
LIMIT
ROCKS DEPTH LIMIT
TRACKS & ROUTES (PLOTTER/OVERLAY, PLOTTER, OFF)
UNDERWATER OBJECTS (PLOTTER/OVERLAY, PLOTTER, OFF)
RIVERS & LAKES (PLOTTER/OVERLAY, PLOTTER, OFF)
NATURAL FEATURES (PLOTTER/OVERLAY, PLOTTER, OFF)
CULTURAL FEATURES (PLOTTER/OVERLAY, PLOTTER, OFF)
LANDMARKS (PLOTTER/OVERLAY, PLOTTER, OFF)
LAT/LON GRID (PLOTTER/OVERLAY, PLOTTER, OFF)
CHART BOUNDARIES (ON, AUTO, PLOTTER/OVERLAY, PLOTTER, OFF)
MIXING (ON, OFF)
CHART LEVEL (LOCK, UNLOCK)
DEPTH INFO soft key (See left margin.)
PLOTTER
SETUP
PLOTTER SETTINGS*
3
*: C-MAP only.
AP-6
WAYPOINT SWITCHING (PERPENDICULAR, ARRVL ALM CRCL, MANUAL)
COURSE VECTOR (VECTOR, LINE, OFF)
SET GO TO METHOD (1 POINT, 35 POINTS, 35PTS/PORT SVC)
QP (EXT WPT (RMB), INTERNAL)
SAFE ROUTE CHECK (ON, OFF)*
D. BOX soft key (Same items as for D. BOX soft key on the RADAR
DISPLAY SETUP menu. See page A-1.)
APPENDIX
3
WAYPOINTS/
ROUTES
WAYPOINTS
LOCAL LIST
ALPHANUMERIC LIST
WAYPOINT BY CURSOR
WAYPOINT BY RNG & BRG
ROUTES
GO TO
NEW ROUTE
EDIT ROUTE
ERASE ROUTE
LOG
RESTART
STOP/RELEASE
RVRSE/FORWARD
SPEED (Speed for ETA, 0-99 kt, GPS or manual input)
COORD TYPE
Destination is
required.
CREATE
VOYAGEBASED
ROUTE
FUNCTION
KEY SETUP*
GO TO
NEW WPT
EDIT WPT
ERASE WPT
NEW WPT
NEW WPT
START POINT
NEW (BCKTRK TIME, BCKTRK DIST, MANUAL)
SELECT ROUTE
SOFT KEY 1 - SOFT KEY 5
(OFF, ADD NEW WPT, MOVE WPT, RULER, GO TO WPT, GO TO
ROUTE, EDIT MK/LINE, TRACK ON/OFF, TTM ON/OFF, DEL TGT TRK,
ALPHA LIST, LOCAL LIST, ROUTE LIST, D. BOX ON/OFF,
CHANGE CNTRL, QUICK POINT)
(Assigns function of each plotter function key.)
* Defaut settings for function keys:
SOFT KEY 1, TRACK ON/OFF; SOFT KEY 2, EDIT MK/LINE;
SOFT KEY 3, RULER; SOFT KEY 4, ADD NEW WPT;
SOFT KEY 5, ALPHA LIST
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION (Same items as on page A-2.)
AP-7
APPENDIX
Sounder
MENU Key
SOUNDER
MENU
NOISE LIMITER (OFF, LOW, MEDIUM, HIGH)
CLUTTER (0-16, AUTO)
WHITE MARKER (1-8 (8-color), 1-16 (16 color), OFF)
ZOOM MARKER (ON, OFF)
HUE (1-9, 1)
SIGNAL LEVEL (OFF, SL1-SL3, 8 color, monochrome, SL1-SL6, 16 color)
PICTURE ADVANCE (2/1, 1/1, 1/2, 1/4, 1/8, 1/16, STOP)
TEMPERATURE GRAPH (ON, OFF)
PRR LEVEL (0-20, SPD SENSING PRR, 20)
D. BOX soft key (Same items as on RADAR DISPLAY SETUP menu. See page A-1.)
SOUNDER
SYSTEM
SETUP
FISH ALARM LEVEL (HIGH, MEDIUM, LOW )
TRANSMISSION (OFF, ON)
TVG-HF (0 - 9, 3)
TVG-LF (0 - 9, 3)
ECHO OFFSET-HF (-50 - +50, 0)
ECHO OFFSET-LF (-50 - +50, 0)
BOTTOM LEVEL-HF (-100 - +100, 0)
BOTTOM LEVEL-LF (-100 - +100, 0)
KP PULSE (INTERNAL, EXTERNAL)
SMOOTHING (OFF, SM1, SM2, SM3, SM4)
TLL OUTPUT (ON, OFF)
SENSOR SETUP soft key
SPEED CALIBRATION (-50 - +50%, 0%)
TEMP CALIBRATION (-40°F - +40°F, 0°F)
DEPTH CALIBRATION ( -15 - +90 ft, 0 ft)
ACSTC SPD CALIBRATION (-500 - +500m/s, 0 m/s)
SOUNDER
RANGE
SETUP
RANGE 1 - RANGE 8*
ZOOM RANGE (2-120 m, 10 m; 7-400 ft, 30 ft; 1-60 fa, 10 fa; 1-70 P/B, 10 P/B)
BOTTOM LOCK RANGE (3 m, 6 m; 10 ft, 20 ft; 2 fa, 3 fa; 2 P/B, 3 P/B)
FUNCTION
KEY SETUP#
SOFT KEY 1- SOFT KEY 5
(OFF, AUTO MODE, GAIN HF, GAIN LF, SHIFT, NOISE LIMITER, CLUTTER,
WHITE MARKER, HUE, SIGNAL LEVEL, PICTURE ADV, TEMP. GRAPH, TVG HF,
TVG LF, OFFSET HF, OFFSET LF, SMOOTHING, ZOOM RANGE, B/L RANGE,
TLL OUTPUT, SNDR SOURCE, D. BOX ON/OFF, CHANGE CNTRL, SAVE
SCREEN, QUICK POINT)
(Assign function of echo sounder function key.)
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION (Same items as on page A-2.)
* = Default sounder ranges
Range 1
Range 2
Range 3
Range 4
Range 5
Range 6
Range 7
Range 8
ETR-6/10N
ETR-30N
5m
10 m
20 m
40 m
80 m
150 m
300 m
1200 m
1500 m
15 ft
30 ft
60 ft
120 ft
200 ft
400 ft
1000 ft
4000 ft
4500 ft
900 fa
150 fa
650 fa
200 P/B 700 P/B 900 P/B
3 fa
5 fa
10 fa
20 fa
40 fa
80 fa
3 P/B
5 P/B
10 P/B
30 P/B
50 P/B
100 P/B
# Default settings for function keys:
SOFT KEY 1, TLL OUTPUT; SOFT KEY 2, CLUTTER; SOFT KEY 3, SIGNAL LEVEL;
SOFT KEY 4, NOISE LIMITER; SOFT KEY 5, PICTURE ADV
AP-8
APPENDIX
ALARM key
Radar Alarms
ALARM key
SET GUARD 1 (ERASE GUARD 1)
SET GUARD 2 (ERASE GUARD 2)
Plotter Alarms
ALARM key
AUDIO ALARM (INT & EXT BUZZ, INTERNAL BUZZ, OFF)
ARRIVAL ALARM (ON, OFF, default range: 0.010 nm(km/sm))
ANCHOR WATCH ALARM (ON, OFF, default range: 0.010 nm(km/sm))
PROXIMITY ALARM (ON, OFF)
XTE ALARM (ON, OFF, default range: 0.050 nm(km/sm))
SPEED ALARM (WITHIN, UNDER/OVER, OFF)
TRIP ALARM (ON, OFF)
BOTTOM ALARM (ON, OFF)
TEMPERATURE ALARM (WITHIN RANGE, OUT OF RANGE, OFF)
GROUNDING ALARM*
GROUNDING ALARM RANGE*
NEXT INFO soft key (Shows which alarms have been violated.)
CLEAR ALARM soft key (Acknowledges violated alarm.)
*: C-MAP only
Sounder Alarms
ALARM key
AUDIO ALARM (INT & EXT BUZZ, INTERNAL BUZZ, OFF)
BOTTOM ALARM (ON, OFF)
TEMPERATURE ALARM (WITHIN RANGE, OUT OF RANGE, OFF)
FISH ALARM (ON, OFF)
FISH ALARM (B/L) (ON, OFF)
NEXT INFO soft key (Shows which alarms have been violated.)
CLEAR ALARM soft key (Acknowledges violated alarm.)
AP-9
APPENDIX
Geodetic Chart List
001: WGS84
002: WGS72
003: TOKYO : Mean Value (Japan, Korea, and Okinawa)
004: NORTH AMERICAN 1927 : Mean Value (CONUS)
005: EUROPEAN 1950 : Mean Value
006: AUSTRALIAN GEODETIC 1984 : Australia and Tasmania Island
007: ADINDAN : Mean Value (Ethiopia and Sudan)
008: : Ethiopia
009: : Mall
010: : Senegal
011: : Sudan
012: AFG : Somalia
013: AIN EL ABD 1970 : Bahrain Island
014: ANNA 1 ASTRO 1965 : Cocos Island
015: ARC 1950 : Mean Value
016: : Botswana
017: : Lesotho
018: : Malawi
019: : Swaziland
020: : Zaire
021: : Zambia
022: : Zimbabwe
023: ARC 1960 : Mean Value (Kenya, Tanzania)
024: : Kenya
025: : Tanzania
026: ASCENSION ISLAND 1958 : Ascension Island
027: ASTRO BEACON "E" : Iwo Jima Island
028: ASTRO B4 SOR. ATOLL : Tem Island
029: ASTRO POS 71/4 : St. Helena Island
030: ASTRONOMIC STATION 1952 : Marcus Island
031: AUSTRALIAN GEODETIC 1966 : Australia and Tasmania Island
032: BELLEVUE (IGN) : Efate and Erromango Islands
033: BERMUDA 1957 : Bermuda Islands
034: BOGOTA OBSERVATORY : Colombia
035: CAMPO INCHAUSPE : Argentina
036: CANTON ISLAND 1966 : Phoenix Islands
037: CAPE : South Africa
038: CAPE CANAVERAL : Mean Value (Florida and Bahama Islands)
039: CARTHAGE : Tunisia
040: CHATHAM 1971 : Chatham Island (New Zealand)
041: CHUA ASTRO : Paraguay
042: CORREGO ALEGRE : Brazil
043: DJAKARTA (BATAVIA) : Sumatra Island (Indonesia)
044: DOS 1968 : Gizo Island (New Georgia Island)
045: EASTER ISLAND 1967 : Easter Island
046: EUROPEAN 1950 (Cont'd) : Western Europe
047: : Cyprus
048: : Egypt
049: : England, Scotland, Channel, and Shetland Islands
050: : England,Ireland, Scotland, and Shetland Islands
051: : Greece
052: : Iran
053: : Italy Sardinia
054: : Italy Sicily
055: : Norway and Finland
056: : Portugal and Spain
057: EUROPEAN 1979 : Mean Value
058: GANDAJIKA BASE : Republic of Maldives
059: GEODETIC DATUM 1949 : New Zealand
060: GUAM 1963 : Guam Island
061: GUX 1 ASTRO : Guadalcanal Island
062: HJORSEY 1955 : Iceland
063: HONG KONG 1963 : Hong Kong
064: INDIAN : Thailand and Vietnam
065: : Bangladesh, India, and Nepal
066: IRELAND 1956 : Ireland
067: ISTS 073 ASTRO 1969 : Diego Garcia
068: JHONSTON ISLAND 1961 : Johnston Island
069: KANDAWALA : Sri Lanka
070: KERGUELEN ISLAND : Kerguelen Island
071: KERTAU 1948 : West Malaysia and Singapore
072: LA REUNION : Mascarene Island
073: L.C. 5 ASTRO : Cayman Brac Island
074: LIBERIA 1964 : Liberia
075: LUZON : Philippines (Excluding Mindanao Island)
076: : Mindanao Island
077: MAHE 1971 : Mahe Island
078: MARCO ASTRO : Salvage Islands
079: MASSAWA : Eritrea (Ethiopia)
080: MERCHICH : Morocco
081: MIDWAY ASTRO 1961 : Midway Island
082: MINNA : Nigeria
083: NAHRWAN : Masirah Island(Oman)
084: : United Arab Emirates
085: : Saudi Arabia
086: NAMIBIA : Namibia
087: MAPARIMA, BWI : Trinidad and Tobago
088: NORTH AMERICAN 1927 : Western United States
089: : Eastern United States
090: : Alaska
091: : Bahamas (Excluding San Salvador Island)
092: : Bahamas San Salvador Island
093: : Canada (Including Newfoundland Island)
094: : Alberta and British Columbia
095: : East Canada
096: : Manitoba and Ontario
097: : Northwest Territories and Saskatchewan
098: : Yukon
099: : Canal Zone
100: : Caribbean
AP-10
101: : Central America
102: : Cuba
103: : Greenland
104: : Mexico
105: NORTH AMERICAN 1983 : Alaska
106: : Canada
107: : CONUS
108: : Mexico, Central America
109: OBSERVATORIO 1966 : Corvo and Flores Islands (Azores)
110: OLD EGYPTIAN 1930 : Egypt
111: OLD HAWAIIAN : Mean Value
112: : Hawaii
113: : Kaual
114: : Maui
115: : Oahu
116: OMAN : Oman
117: ORDNANCE SURVEY OF GREAT BRITAIN 1936 : Mean Value
118: : England
119: : England, Isle of Man, and Wales
120: : Scotland and Shetland Islands
121: : Wales
122: PICO DE LAS NIVIES : Canary Islands
123: PITCAIRN ASTRO 1967 : Pitcairn Island
124: PROVISIONAL SOUTH CHILEAN 1963 : South Chile (near 53° s)
125: PROVISIONAL SOUTH AMERICAN 1956 : Mean Value
126: : Bolivia
127: : Chile Northern Chie (near 19° s)
128: : Chile Southern Chile (near 43° s)
129: : Colombia
130: : Ecuador
131: : Guyana
132: : Peru
133: : Venezuela
134: PUERTO RICO : Puerto Rico and Virgin Islands
135: QATAR NATIONAL : Qatar
136: QORNOQ : South Greenland
137: ROME 1940 : Sardinia Islands
138: SANTNA BRAZ : Sao Maguel, Santa Maria Islands (Azores)
139: SANTO (DOS) : Espirito Santo Island
140: SAPPER HILL 1943 : East Falkland Island
141: SOUTH AMERICAN 1969 : Mean Value
142: : Argentina
143: : Bolivia
144: : Brazil
145: : Chile
146: : Colombia
147: : Ecuador
148: : Guyana
149: : Paraguay
150: : Peru
151: : Trinidad and Tobago
152: : Venezuela
153: SOUTH ASIA : Singapore
154: SOUTHEAST BASE : Porto Santo and Medeira Islands
155: SOUTHWEST BASE : Faial, Graciosa, Pico, Sao Jorge, and Terceira Islands
156: TIMBALAI 1948 : Brunel and East Malaysia (Sarawak and Sadah)
157: TOKYO : Japan
158: : Korea
159: : Okinawa
160: TRISTAN ASTRO 1968 : Tristan da Cunha
161: VITI LEVU 1916 : Viti Levu Island (Fiji Islands)
162: WAKE-ENIWETOK 1960 : Marshall Islands
163: ZANDERIJ : Suriname
164: BUKIT RIMPAH : Bangka and Belitung Islands (Indonesia)
165: CAMP AREA ASTRO : Camp Mcmurdo Area, Antarctica
166: G. SEGARA : Kalimantan Islands(Indonesia)
167: HERAT NORTH : Afghanistan
168: HU-TZU-SHAN : Taiwan
169: TANANARIVE OBSERVATORY 1925 : Madagascar
170: YACARE : Uruguay
171: RT-90 : Sweden
172 : Pulkovo 1942 : Russia
173:: FINNISH KKJ: Finland
APPENDIX
Icons
Icon
Meaning
North marker. Points to North.
Correct chart and suitable scale - full chart reliability.
Chart overenlarged.
Plotter, radar, sounder alarm setting violated.
Track is not being recorded or plotted.
Chart offset applied.
SA
VE
Voyage-based route currently being created.
Latitude and longitude position offset applied.
Voltage of battery on circuit board in display unit is low. Contact your dealer about
replacement.
SI
Simulation mode.
M
AP-11
APPENDIX
This page is intentionally left blank.
AP-12
SPECIFICATIONS OF MARINE RADAR
MODEL 1724C/1734C
1
GENERAL
1.1 Range, Pulse length (PL) & Pulse Repetition Rate (PRR)
Range (nm)
Pulse length (µs)
PRR (Hz approx.)
0.125 to 1.5
0.08
2100
1.5 to 3
0.3
1200
3 to 36*
0.8
600
*Maximum Range: M1724C: 24nm, M1734C: 36nm
1.2 Range Resolution
All models: 21 m
1.3 Bearing Resolution
M1724C: 6.7°, M1734C: 5.5°
1.4 Minimum Range
M1724C: 27 m, M1734C: 35 m
1.5 Bearing Accuracy
±1°
1.6 Range Ring Accuracy
0.9% of range or 8 m, whichever is the greater
2
ANTENNA UNIT
2.1
MODEL1724C:
2.1.1 Radiator
Micro-strip
2.1.2 Polarization
Horizontal
2.1.3 Antenna Rotation
31/25 rpm nominal (for short/long range)
2.1.4 Radiator Length
45 cm
2.1.5 Horizontal Beamwidth 5.2°
2.1.6 Vertical Beamwidth
25°
2.1.7 Sidelobe Attenuation
-20 dB
2.2
MODEL1734C:
2.2.1 Radiator
Printed waveguide array
2.2.2 Polarization
Horizontal
2.2.3 Antenna Rotation
24 rpm nominal
2.2.4 Radiator Length
60 cm
2.2.5 Horizontal Beamwidth 4°
2.2.6 Vertical Beamwidth
20°
2.2.7 Sidelobe Attenuation
-18 dB
SP - 1
3
TRANSCEIVER MODULE
3.1
Frequency and Modulation
3.2
Peak Output Power
9410 MHz ±30MHz (X band), P0N
M1724C: 2 kW nominal,
M1734C: 4 kW nominal,
3.3
Modulator
FET Switching Method
3.4
Intermediate Frequency 60 MHz
3.5
Tuning
Automatic
3.6
Receiver Front End
MIC (Microwave IC)
3.7
Bandwidth
7 MHz
3.8
Duplexer
Circulator with diode limiter
3.9
Warming up
M1724C: 60 s approx, M1734C: 90 s approx.
4
DISPLAY UNIT
4.1
Display
7-inch rectangular color LCD, 480(H) x 640(V) dots,
Effective radar display area: 432 x 432 mm
4.2
Range, Range Ring Interval (RI), Number of Rings
Range (nm) 0.125 0.25
RI (nm)
3 4
6
8 12 16 24 36
0.0625 0.125 0.125 0.25 0.25 0.5 0.5 1 1
2
2
3
4
6 12
3
4
4
4
4
Rings
2
2
0.5 0.75
4
3
1
1.5 2
4
3
4
3 4
3
Maximum range: M1724C: 24nm, M1734C: 36nm
4.3
Markers
Heading Line, Bearing Scale, Range Rings,
Variable Range Marker (VRM), Electronic Bearing Line (EBL),
Alarm Zone, Waypoint Mark (navigation input required)
4.4
Alphanumeric Indications Range, Range Ring Interval, Interference Rejection (IR),
Variable Range Marker (VRM), Electronic Bearing Line (EBL),
Stand-by (ST-BY), Echo Averaging (EAV), TX Pulse width
Guard Alarm (G(IN), G(OUT)), Echo Stretch (ES),
Range and Bearing to Cursor or Cursor Position,
Echo Trailing (TRAIL), Trailing Time,
Data Box (Position, COG, SOG, STW, etc. selectable on menu)
4.5 Input Data
IEC 61162-1 (NMEA 0183 Ver1.5/2.0)
Own ship’s position:
GGA>RMC>RMA>GLL
Ship’s speed:
RMC>RMA>VTG>VHW
Bearing (True):
HDT>HDG*1>HDM*1
Course:
RMC>RMA>VTG
Water depth:
DPT>DBT
Wind:
MWV>VWT>VWR
Water Temperature:
MTW
Time:
ZDA
*1
: calculated by magnetic deviation
SP - 2
4.6 Output Data
Alarm signal
12 VDC, 100 mA or less
NMEA 0183 Ver1.5
GGA, GLL, RMA, RMC, GTD, VTG, ZDA (GPS data required)
RMB, WPL, BWC or BWR, APB, AAM, BOD, XTE, VHW, MTW,
DPT or DBT, HDT, HDG, MWV, ZTG
TLL (L/L, Heading data required), TTM (ARPA required)
5
PLOTTER FUNCTION
5.1
Projection
Mercator
5.2
Usable Area
85 latitude or below
5.3
Effective Area
133.4 x 97.3 mm
5.4
Display pixels
480 x 640 dots
5.5
Position Indication
Latitude/longitude, Loran C LOP, DECCA LOP or MGRS
5.6
Effective Projection Area 0.125 nm to 2,048 nm (at equatorial area)
5.7
Track Display
Plot interval: by time (1 sec. to 99 min. 99 sec.) or
by distance (0 to 99.99 nm)
5.8
Track Colors
Red, yellow, green purple, light-blue, blue, white
5.9
Memory Capacity
Track/mark: 8000 points, Waypoint: 999 points
5.10 Storage Capacity
Simple route: 200 routes with 35 waypoints each
5.11 MOB
1 point
5.12 Quick Routes
1 course with 35 waypoints max.
5.13 Electronic Chart
SD Card: NAVIONICS Gold Chart card, or
C-MAP NT MAX chart card
5.14 Alarms
Arrival and Anchor watch, Cross track error and proximity
alarms, Ship’s speed in and out alarms, Water temperature,
Trip alarm, Fish alarm, Bottom alarm (ETR required), Grounding
alarm (C-MAP only)
6
POWER SUPPLY
6.1
Rated Voltage/Current
6.2
M1724C
12-24 VDC: 5.9-2.8 A
M1734C
12-24 VDC: 5.6-2.7 A
Rectifier (option)
PR-62: 100/110/115/220/230 VAC, 1 phase, 50/60 Hz
SP - 3
7
ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITION
7.1
Ambient Temperature
Antenna Unit: -25°C to +70°C
Display Unit: -15°C to +55°C
Remote Controller: +5°C to +45°C
7.2
Relative Humidity
93 % or less at +40°C
7.3
Waterproofing
Antenna Unit: IPX6
Display Unit: IPX5 (External monitor connected: IPX0)
Remote Controller: IPX0
7.4
Vibration
2 Hz-5Hz to 13.2 Hz: Amplitude: ±1 mm ±10%
13.2 Hz to 100 Hz: Max. acceleration 7m/s2, fixed
8
COATING COLOR
8.1
Display Unit
N3.0
8.2
Antenna Unit
N9.5 (upper), 2.5PB3.5/10 (lower)
SP - 4
SPECIFICATIONS OF VIDEO PLOTTER GD-1720C
1
PLOTTER FUNCTION
1.1
Projection
Mercator
1.2
Usable Area
85 latitude or below
1.3
Effective Area
1933.4 x 97.3 mm
1.4
Display pixels
480 x 640 dots
1.5
Position Indication
Latitude/longitude, Loran C LOP, DECCA LOP or MGRS
1.6
Effective Projection Area 0.125 nm to 2,048 nm (at equatorial area)
1.7
Track Display
Plot interval: by time (1 sec. to 99 min. 99 sec.) or
by distance (0 to 99.99 nm)
1.8
Colors
Red, yellow, green purple, light-blue, blue, white
1.9
Memory Capacity
Track/mark: 8000 points, Waypoint: 999 points
1.10 Storage Capacity
Simple route: 200 routes with 35 waypoints each
1.11 MOB
1 point
1.12 Quick Routes
1 course with 35 waypoints max.
1.13 Electronic Chart
SD card - FURUNO or NAVIONICS Gold Chart card, or
C-MAP NT MAX chart card
1.13.1 Alarms
Arrival and Anchor watch, Cross track error and proximity
alarms, Ship’s speed in and out alarms, Water temperature,
Trip alarm, Fish alarm, Bottom alarm (ETR required), Grounding
alarm
2
POWER SUPPLY
2.1
Rated Voltage/Current
12-24 VDC: 2.1-1.0 A
2.2
Rectifier (option)
PR-62: 100/110/115/220/230 VAC, 1 phase, 50/60 Hz
3
ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITION
3.1
Ambient Temperature
-15°C to +55°C
3.2
Relative Humidity
93% or less at +40°C
3.3
Waterproofing
IPX5
3.4
Vibration
2 Hz-5Hz to 13.2 Hz: Amplitude: ±1 mm ±10%
13.2 Hz to 100 Hz: Max. acceleration 7m/s2, fixed
4
COATING COLOR
4.1
Display Unit
N3.0
SP - 5
This page is intentionally left blank.
INDEX
Ａ
A/C RAIN ............................................2-4
A/C SEA ..............................................2-3
ACQ soft key .....................................2-29
ALARM key
plotter ............................................3-49
radar ..............................................2-24
sounder ..........................................4-15
Alarms
anchor watch .................................3-51
arrival............................................3-49
audio ..............................................3-49
bottom............................................4-16
CPA/TCPA .....................................2-35
fish .................................................4-16
fish(B/L).........................................4-17
guard .............................................2-24
lost target ......................................2-36
messages........................................3-56
messages (plotter) .........................3-55
messages (sounder) .......................4-18
proximity .......................................3-53
speed..............................................3-52
trip .................................................3-53
water temperature ........................4-17
XTE (cross track error) .................3-52
Anchor watch alarm .........................3-51
Antenna height (GPS Receiver
GP-310B) .......................................7-28
ARP
acquisition of targets ....................2-29
activating.......................................2-29
ARP SETUP menu ........................2-29
CPA/TCPA alarm...........................2-35
data................................................2-34
deactivating...................................2-29
lost target alarm ...........................2-36
past position display .....................2-33
test ...................................................8-8
tracking termination.....................2-31
vector .............................................2-32
Arrival alarm ....................................3-49
A-scope display ...................................4-6
Audio alarm ......................................3-49
Auto course-up mode ..........................3-8
AUTO S.SPD soft key .......................2-15
AUTO/D. BOX soft key .......................4-7
Ｂ
Battery replacement ...........................8-2
Bearing measurement by EBL .........2-11
Bearing reference................................7-4
Bottom alarm ....................................4-16
Bottom discrimination display ...........4-5
Bottom echo.......................................4-21
Bottom-lock display ............................4-4
Bottom-zoom display ..........................4-4
Brilliance.............................................1-6
Ｃ
CHART DETAILS menu...................7-15
CHART OFFSET soft key ................7-14
Charts
cursor and data display (C-MAP) .3-14
data for aids to navigation ............3-11
icon data (C-MAP) .........................3-14
icons .................................................3-9
indices............................................3-10
inserting ..........................................1-4
Navionics GOLD chart attributes 7-15
offsetting........................................7-14
port service icons ...........................3-11
tide information (C-MAP) .............3-16
CLEAR ALARM soft key ..................4-18
Clutter rejector .................................4-10
C-MAP charts
cursor and data display.................3-14
icon data ........................................3-14
tide information.............................3-15
CNTRL PLOTTR soft key.................1-10
CNTRL SNDR soft key .....................1-10
Cold start (GPS Receiver GP-310B) .7-28
Colors
radar display ...................................7-6
radar echoes ....................................7-6
sounder echoes ..............................4-14
Compass display .................................3-3
IN-1
INDEX
Controls
display unit..................................... 1-1
remote controller ............................ 1-3
Course-up mode
plotter ............................................. 3-8
radar ............................................... 2-8
CPA/TCPA alarm.............................. 2-35
Cursor
display format................................. 7-5
shifting.......................................... 1-12
Cursor pad
operation ....................................... 1-12
CURSOR soft key............................. 2-14
Ｄ
Data boxes
erasing .......................................... 1-14
hiding ............................................ 1-14
rearranging................................... 1-14
setup ............................................. 7-22
showing ......................................... 1-14
Depth measurement .......................... 4-9
Depth source ...................................... 7-4
Depth unit .......................................... 7-3
Diagnostics
ARP test .......................................... 8-8
display unit test.............................. 8-7
GPS sensor test .............................. 8-7
keyboard test ................................ 8-10
network sounder test...................... 8-8
test menu ........................................ 8-6
test pattern ..................................... 8-8
DISP key............................................. 1-9
Display modes .................................... 1-8
Display unit test ................................ 8-7
DISPLY MODE soft key..................... 4-1
Downloading data .............................. 6-4
Ｅ
E. AVG soft key ................................ 2-22
E. STR soft key................................. 2-21
EBL soft key......................................2-11
EBL/VRM key ....... 2-10, 2-11, 2-16, 2-18
Echo averaging................................. 2-22
Echo offset (sounder)........................ 7-34
Echo stretch ..................................... 2-21
Echo trails
color............................................... 2-20
IN-2
starting.......................................... 2-19
time ............................................... 2-19
EDIT XT-LMT soft key................ 3-4, 3-6
Error messages................................. 8-13
ETA calculation ................................ 3-47
Ｆ
Fish alarm
sensitivity...................................... 7-33
setting ........................................... 4-16
Fish alarm (B/L)
setting ........................................... 4-17
Fish school echo................................ 4-22
Fix mode (GPS Receiver GP-310B).. 7-28
Formatting memory cards ................. 6-1
FREQ LF/HF soft key ........................ 4-2
Function keys
function execution......................... 1-15
setup (plotter) ............................... 7-11
setup (radar) ................................... 7-8
setup (sounder) ............................. 7-38
Fuse replacement ............................... 8-2
Ｇ
GAIN key
radar................................................ 2-2
sounder............................................ 4-8
GENERAL SETUP menu .................. 7-1
Geodetic datum (GPS Receiver
GP-310B)....................................... 7-26
Geodetic datum codes......................... 8-x
GPS Receiver GP-310B setup .......... 7-26
GPS sensor (GP-310B) test ................ 8-7
GPS SETUP menu ........................... 7-26
GPS status display ........................... 8-11
Grounding alarm
report............................................. 3-56
setting ........................................... 3-54
Guard alarm
cancelling ...................................... 2-25
setting ........................................... 2-24
Ｈ
Heading line ..................................... 2-12
Head-up mode .................................... 2-8
Highway display................................. 3-6
HIWAY CNTRL soft key..................... 3-6
HL OFF soft key............................... 2-12
Hot page setup.................................. 7-23
INDEX
Hue
radar, plotter ...................................1-7
sounder ..........................................4-14
Ｉ
I. REJ. soft key .................................2-13
Icons ..................................................... 11
Interference rejection
radar ..............................................2-13
sounder ..........................................4-10
Ｋ
Keyboard test....................................8-10
Keying pulse .....................................7-34
Ｌ
Language ............................................7-2
Latitude, longitude display ................7-4
Lines
entering .........................................3-24
erasing ...........................................3-26
type ................................................3-25
LOAD DATA menu .............................6-3
Lost target alarm..............................2-36
Ｍ
Magnetic variation .............................7-4
Maintenance
battery replacement........................8-2
fuse replacement .............................8-2
preventive........................................8-1
Marker-zoom display ..........................4-3
Marks
color ...............................................3-24
entering .........................................3-24
erasing all......................................3-26
erasing individual .........................3-26
shape .............................................3-24
Memory
clearing..........................................8-12
testing..............................................8-6
Memory cards
error messages ................................6-2
formatting .......................................6-1
playing back ....................................6-3
saving data to..................................6-2
Memory I/O test..................................8-6
Messages
memory cards ..................................6-2
plotter alarms................................3-55
sounder alarms..............................4-18
MOB mark ........................................1-13
Multiple echoes (radar).....................2-37
Ｎ
Nav data display .................................3-7
NAV DATA menu ..............................7-32
Nav data window ................................3-2
Nav graphic display
anemometer display ........................3-5
compass display...............................3-3
NAV OPTION menu .........................7-24
Navigation
canceling route navigation............3-48
port, port services..........................3-43
quick point .....................................3-41
restarting.......................................3-46
routes .............................................3-45
switching waypoints in a route.....3-47
waypoints.......................................3-43
Navigator setup ...................... 7-24, 7-26
NavNet
image source..................................1-11
receiving data from .........................6-8
Network sounder test .........................8-8
NEXT INFO soft key .............. 3-55, 4-18
Noise limiter (sounder) .....................4-10
Noise rejection (radar) ......................2-12
North marker ....................................2-12
North-up mode
plotter ..............................................3-8
radar ................................................2-8
Ｏ
Offset EBL ........................................2-16
OFFSET soft key .................... 2-16, 2-17
Ｐ
Picture advance speed ......................4-12
PLOTTER SETUP menu ..................7-10
Port, port services
icons ...............................................3-11
Position smoothing (GPS Receiver
GP-310B) .......................................7-27
POWER/BRILL key .................... 1-5, 1-6
Presentation mode
plotter ..............................................3-8
radar ................................................2-7
IN-3
INDEX
Proximity alarm
plotter ........................................... 3-53
Pulselength (radar) ............................ 2-6
Ｒ
Racon ................................................ 2-39
RADAR SETTING menu ................... 7-4
RADAR TX/ST-BY soft key ................ 2-2
Range
measurement by cursor (radar) ..... 2-9
measurement by range rings (radar)
..................................................... 2-9
measurement by VRM (radar) ..... 2-10
plotter ............................................. 3-9
radar ............................................... 2-5
setup (radar) ................................... 7-7
setup (sounder) ............................. 7-37
unit of measurement ...................... 7-2
RANGE key
plotter ............................................. 3-9
radar ............................................... 2-5
sounder ........................................... 4-7
Remote controller
control description .......................... 1-3
testing ........................................... 8-10
RESET XTE soft key................... 3-4, 3-6
RINGS soft key .................................. 2-9
Routes
cancelling navigation of................ 3-48
connecting..................................... 3-38
entering with cursor..................... 3-36
entering with existing waypoints 3-35
erasing .......................................... 3-41
following........................................ 3-45
inserting waypoint from plotter
display ....................................... 3-40
inserting waypoint from route list3-39
removing waypoint from .............. 3-41
voyage based................................. 3-36
Ｓ
SART ................................................ 2-38
Satellite disable (GPS Receiver
GP-310B)....................................... 7-28
SAVE DATA menu.............................. 6-1
SAVE/MOB key ................................ 1-13
Sensor setup..................................... 7-36
SENSOR SETUP menu ................... 7-36
IN-4
SENSOR SETUP soft key ................ 7-36
Shadow sector................................... 2-38
Shift
automatic (radar).......................... 2-16
manual (radar).............................. 2-15
sounder............................................ 4-8
SHIFT soft key .......................... 2-15, 4-8
Sidelobe echoes................................. 2-37
Signal level erasure (sounder) ......... 4-11
SIM SETUP menu............................ 1-16
Simulation display ........................... 1-16
Smoothing echoes (sounder) ............ 7-34
Soft keys ............................................. 1-2
Speed alarm...................................... 3-52
Speed display...................................... 7-4
Speed/course smoothing (GPS Receiver
GP-310B)....................................... 7-27
SPLIT soft key.................................... 4-6
System configuration ........................... ix
SYSTEM SETUP menu (sounder) ... 7-33
Ｔ
TARGET INFO soft key ................... 2-34
TARGET soft key.............................. 2-18
TD display .......................................... 7-3
TD setup
Decca ............................................. 7-31
Loran C ......................................... 7-30
TD SETUP menu.............................. 7-29
Test menu ........................................... 8-6
Test pattern ........................................ 8-8
Time measurement (sounder) ............ 4-9
Time notation ..................................... 7-4
TLL data output (radar)................... 2-23
TLL OUTPUT key............................ 2-23
Track
displaying other targets'...... 2-36, 3-18
displaying own ship's.................... 3-18
erasing all own ship's ................... 3-23
erasing all targets’ ..................... 3-23
erasing own ship's by area ........... 3-22
erasing own ship's by color ........... 3-23
memory distribution setting......... 3-21
plotting interval............................ 3-20
plotting method............................. 3-20
plotting of own ship's.................... 3-19
TRACK HALT soft key..................... 3-19
TRACK RESUME soft key............... 3-19
INDEX
TRAIL COLOR soft key....................2-20
TRAIL ON/OFF soft key...................2-19
TRAIL soft key..................................2-18
TRAIL TIME soft key .......................2-18
Trip alarm .........................................3-53
Trip distance resetting .....................3-57
Troubleshooting
general.............................................8-3
plotter ..............................................8-4
radar ................................................8-3
sounder ............................................8-5
True motion mode...............................2-8
Tuning .................................................2-2
TVG ...................................................7-34
Tx sector (radar) .................................7-5
Ｕ
Uploading data ...................................6-4
Ｖ
Vector (ARP) .....................................2-32
Virtual image ....................................2-37
VRM (Variable Range Marker)
radar ..............................................2-10
sounder ............................................4-9
VRM soft key ....................................2-10
Ｗ
W. MAN soft key ...............................2-26
Watchman .........................................2-25
Water temperature alarm ................4-17
Water temperature graph ................4-19
Water temperature unit .....................7-4
Waypoint marker (radar)..................2-27
Waypoints
changing size .................................3-33
color................................................3-28
editing from waypoint list.............3-30
editing waypoint position..............3-31
editing with cursor ........................3-31
entering at own ship position .......3-27
entering by range and bearing......3-29
entering with cursor......................3-27
erasing from the menu ..................3-32
erasing from waypoint list ............3-32
erasing with cursor .......................3-32
loading from Yeoman.......................6-7
navigating to..................................3-43
searching .......................................3-34
shape..............................................3-28
switching in route navigation .......3-47
White marker....................................4-12
Wind display .......................................3-5
WPT MK soft key..............................2-27
Ｘ
XTE (cross track error) alarm ..........3-52
XTE monitor................................ 3-4, 3-6
Ｙ
Yeoman ................................................6-7
Ｚ
Zero line ............................................4-20
Zoom ..................................................2-14
ZOOM/D. BOX soft key.....................2-14
IN-5
">